Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 758

SERVICE HANDBOOK

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO200L/230/280
e-STUDIO202L/232/282
e-STUDIO203L/233/283

Model: DP-2020/2050/2320/2330/2340/2820/2830/2840
Publish Date: June 2004
File No. SHE040003M0
R04022143002-TTEC
Ver13_2007-11

Trademarks

The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.


The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.
The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System.
The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR


e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283 SERIES
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1) Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to hold the positions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 75 kg (165.34 lb.) therefore pay full
attention when handling it.

Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment.
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V or 240
V / 8 A for its power source.
The equipment must be grounded for safety.
Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) on the rear.
The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.

07/11

2) General Precautions at Service


- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the
vicinity.
-

Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit.
Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may
remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
Use designated jigs and tools.
Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.

3) Important Service Parts for Safety


- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended
by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4) Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as Unplug the
power cable during service, CAUTION. HOT, CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE, CAUTION.
LASER BEAM, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.

06/09

5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.

05/11

CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES ................................... 1-1
1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.3.1 e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S ........................................................................ 1-7
1.3.2 e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/232S/233/282/282S/283/283S ....................................... 1-8
1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.4.1 e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S ...................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 e-STUDIO202L/232/232S/282/282S ...................................................................... 1-10
1.4.3 STUDIO203L/233/283/283S .................................................................................. 1-10
1.5 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-11
1.5.1 e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S ...................................................................... 1-11
1.5.2 e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/232S/233/282/282S/283/283S ..................................... 1-17

2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1


2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-10
2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-20
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-23
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280).......................................... 2-25
2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)................... 2-32
2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-40
2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-43
2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280) .................................................. 2-44
2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283) ........................... 2-64
2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)......................................................... 2-84
2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)................................ 2-153
2.2.9 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-262
2.2.10 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280) .................................................................................... 2-272
2.2.11 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283) ............................................................. 2-276

3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1


3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-5
3.2.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-7
3.2.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-12
3.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-21
3.3.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-21
3.3.2 Gamma slope adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-23
3.3.4 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-24
3.3.5 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-24
3.3.6 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-25
3.3.7 Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 202L/203L/232/233/282/283 > ............ 3-25
3.3.8 Adjustment of image density .................................................................................. 3-26
3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-27
3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-27
2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
CONTENTS

1
05/12

3.4.2 Adjustment of image density .................................................................................. 3-28


3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-29
3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-29
3.5.2 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-30
3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-31
3.5.4 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-32
3.5.5 Setting range correction (Adjustment of text peak) ................................................ 3-32
3.6 Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer .......................................................................... 3-33
3.6.1 Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-33
3.6.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................ 3-39
3.7 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-41
3.7.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-41
3.7.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.8 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-49
3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-49
3.9 Adjustment of Developer Unit ............................................................................................ 3-50
3.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap .............................................................................................. 3-50
3.10 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3016).................................................................................. 3-53
3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position ................................................................................. 3-53
3.10.2 Adjustment of RADF height .................................................................................... 3-57
3.10.3 Adjustment of skew ................................................................................................ 3-59
3.10.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ............................ 3-61
3.10.5 Adjustment of aligning ............................................................................................ 3-62
3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing ........................................................................ 3-63
3.10.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .............................................................................. 3-64
3.10.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch.......................................................... 3-66
3.10.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor ......................................................... 3-67
3.10.10Adjustment of tray volume ..................................................................................... 3-68
3.11 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3020).................................................................................. 3-69
3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-69
3.11.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-74
3.11.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-76
3.11.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-79
3.11.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-80
3.11.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-82
3.11.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-83
3.12 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................ 3-84
3.12.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ............................................................................ 3-84
3.12.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................. 3-86
3.12.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................. 3-87
3.12.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ....................................... 3-88
3.12.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate .................................................... 3-90
3.12.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................ 3-91
3.12.7 DIP switch functions ............................................................................................... 3-93
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1025)................................................................................ 3-95
3.13.1 Adjusting the folding position (Electrical system (Finisher/Saddle unit)) ................ 3-95
3.13.2 Adjusting the sensor output (Electrical system (Puncher unit; option)) .................. 3-96
3.13.3 Registering the number of punch hole
(Electrical system (Puncher unit; option))............................................................... 3-97
3.13.4 After replacing the EEP-ROM
(IC1002) (Electrical system (Puncher unit; option))................................................ 3-98
3.14 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) .................................................................................... 3-99
3.15 Adjustment of Dogleg ...................................................................................................... 3-101

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1


4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1
e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
CONTENTS

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8

4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1


4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-6
General Descriptions for PM Procedure .............................................................................. 4-7
Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-8
Preventive Maintenance Checklist....................................................................................... 4-9
PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-25
Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-26
Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-27
Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-28
4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-28
4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-29
4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade...................................................... 4-30
4.8.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ...................................... 4-30
4.8.5 Checking and replacing the cleaning roller ............................................................ 4-30

5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1


5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 5-15
5.1.3 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-22
5.1.4 Transport jam (RADF) ............................................................................................ 5-28
5.1.5 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-35
5.1.6 Drive system related service call ............................................................................ 5-47
5.1.7 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-48
5.1.8 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-54
5.1.9 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-56
5.1.10 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-58
5.1.11 RADF related service call (MR-3016)..................................................................... 5-59
5.1.12 RADF related service call (MR-3020)..................................................................... 5-60
5.1.13 Laser optical unit related service call ..................................................................... 5-60
5.1.14 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-61
5.1.15 Service call for others ............................................................................................. 5-76
5.1.16 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 5-79
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image........................................................................................... 5-94
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-116
5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-116
5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-119
5.3.3 Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed ............................. 5-121
5.3.4 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-121
5.3.5 Replacing or clearing NVRAM.............................................................................. 5-124

6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1


6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO200L/230/280) ...................................... 6-3
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-5
6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) ........................................................................... 6-12
6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-21
6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283) ............. 6-32
6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ........................................................................... 6-34
6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-48
6.2.3 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-50
6.3 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280) ........ 6-60
6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)......................... 6-72
6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)........................................................................... 6-86
2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
CONTENTS

3
06/09

6.6 Appendix.......................................................................................................................... 6-109


6.6.1 e-STUDIO200L/230/280....................................................................................... 6-109
6.6.2 e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283................................................................ 6-110

7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1


7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4

8. REMOTE SERVICE....................................................................................................... 8-1


8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-12
8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-14
8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.2 Setting (e-STUDIO200L/230/280) .......................................................................... 8-14
8.2.3 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO200L/230/280) ....................................................... 8-19
8.2.4 Setting (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283) ................................................... 8-24
8.2.5 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283) ................................ 8-30

9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE


(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283) ...................................................................... 9-1
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5

AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1


DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S) .......................................... Appendix
Connector Table (e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S)............................................ Appendix
DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO202L/232/282)............................................................. Appendix
Connector Table (e-STUDIO202L/232/282) .............................................................. Appendix

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
CONTENTS

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4
05/11

1.

2.

3.

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES /
OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC


MODE

ADJUSTMENT
3

4.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)


4

5.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5

6.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6

7.

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


7

8.

REMOTE SERVICE
8

9.

DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE


(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)

10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS


10

1.

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1.1

Specifications

Values in { } are for e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L and values in [ ] are for e- STUDIO280/280S/282/


282S/283/283S in case that the specification is different among e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L,
e-STUDIO230/230L/232/232S/233 and e-STUDIO280/280S/282/282S/283/283S.
Copy process
Type
Original table
Accepted originals

Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)


Desktop type (console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) and large
capacity feeder (LCF) are installed)
Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled. Carbon
paper are not acceptable either.
Maximum size: A3/LD
Single - sided original

Double - sided original

MR-3016

50 ~ 127 g/m2 (13 lb. Bond - 34 lb. Bond)

50 ~ 105 g/m2 (13 lb. Bond - 28 lb. Bond)

MR-3018

35 ~ 157 g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond - 58 lb. Cover)

50 ~ 157 g/m2 (13 lb. Bond - 58 lb. Cover)

Copy speed (Copies/min.)


e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L
Paper size

Drawer

A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R


A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
A3, LD

20
19
18
16

Bypass feed
Size specified
Size not specified
20
16
19
16
18
16
16
16

PFP

LCF

20
19
18
16

20

PFP

LCF

23
21.5
18
16

23

PFP

LCF

28
21.5
18
16

28

e-STUDIO230/230L/232/232S/233
Paper size

Drawer

A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R


A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
A3, LD

23
21.5
18
16

Bypass feed
Size specified
Size not specified
23
16
21.5
16
18
16
16
16

e-STUDIO280/280S/282/282S/283/283S

*
*

Paper size

Drawer

A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R


A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
A3, LD

28
21.5
18
16

Bypass feed
Size specified
Size not specified
28
16
21.5
16
18
16
16
16

means Not acceptable.


The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side,
multiple copying.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-1
07/11

When the RADF is used, the copy speed of {20}23[28] sheets per minute is only available under the
following conditions:
Original/Mode:
Single side original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected.
Number of sheets:
{20}23[28] or more.
Reproduction ratio: 100%

Copy speed for thick paper (Copies/min.)


e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283 series
Thick 1 (81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 21.3 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Paper size

Drawer

Bypass feed
Size specified

Size not specified

PFP

LCF

A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R

{20} 23 [27]

{20} 23 [27]

{15} 16 [16]

{20} 23 [27]

{20} 23 [27]

A4-R, B5-R, LT-R

{19} 21 [21]

{19} 21 [21]

{15} 16 [16]

{19} 21 [21]

{-} - [-]

B4, LG

{18} 18 [18]

{18} 18 [18]

{15} 16 [16]

{18} 18 [18]

{-} - [-]

A3, LD

{15} 16 [16]

{15} 16 [16]

{15} 16 [16]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

PFP

LCF

Thick 2 (106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 28 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)


Paper size

Drawer

Bypass feed
Size specified

Size not specified

A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R

{-} - [-]

{20} 23 [27]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

A4-R, B5-R, LT-R

{-} - [-]

{19} 21 [21]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

B4, LG

{-} - [-]

{18} 18 [18]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

A3, LD

{-} - [-]

{15} 16 [16]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

PFP

LCF

Thick 3 (164 g/m2 to 209 g/m2, 90 lb. Index to 115.7 lb. Index)
Paper size

*
*

Drawer

Bypass feed
Size specified

Size not specified

A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R

{-} - [-]

{20} 23 [27]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

A4-R, B5-R, LT-R

{-} - [-]

{19} 21 [21]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

B4, LG

{-} - [-]

{18} 18 [18]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

A3, LD

{-} - [-]

{15} 16 [16]

{15} 16 [16]

{-} - [-]

{-} - [-]

Only A4/LT size is available for the LCF.


The tolerance is within 2.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2
07/11

System copy speed


Copy mode
Single-sided originals

Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Single-sided copies

*
*
*

1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets

e-STUDIO200L/202/
203L
34.18
95.53
154.28
37.44
96.81
155.54
70.26
188.48
306.64
64.65
184.73
302.58

Sec.
e-STUDIO230/230L/
232/232S/233
31.5
84.8
136.2
34.5
85.9
137.4
64.8
167.7
270.6
57.8
163.1
266.1

e-STUDIO280/280S/
282/282S/283/283S
27.6
72.2
114.0
31.6
73.4
116.4
58.9
143.8
228.5
50.5
137.3
222.1

The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original
are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from
pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured
value.
Upper drawer is selected and copying is at the non-sort mode.
Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off.
Finisher is not installed.
Copy paper
Size

Drawer ADU PFP


A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R,
FOLIO, COMPUTER,
13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5", 8K,
16K, 16K-R

Weight

64 to 105 g/m2
17 to 28 lb. Bond

Special
paper

LCF
Bypass copy
A4, LT A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, FOLIO,
COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5", 8K,
16K, 16K-R
(Non-standard or user-specified
sizes can be set.)
64 to 209 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond to 110 lb.
Index
(Continuous feeding)
50 to 209 g/m2, 13 lb. Bond to 110 lb.
Index
(Single paper feeding)
Tracing paper, labels,
OHP film
(thickness: 80 m or thicker),
tab paper, envelope
(COM10, Monarch, DL, CHO-3,
YOU-4)

Remarks

These special papers recommended by Toshiba Tec


CHO-3: 92 mm x 235 mm
YOU-4: 105 mm x 235 mm

First copy time ......................... Approx. 5.4 sec. or less


(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
Warming-up time ..................... Approx. 25 sec. (temperature: 20C)
Multiple copying....................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
Reproduction ratio ................... Actual ratio: 1000.5%
Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
(25 to 200% when using RADF)
Resolution/Gradation............... Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi
Gradation: 256 steps

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-3
07/11

Eliminated portion.................... Leading edges: 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (print)
Paper feeding .......................... Standard drawers:
1 or 2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets;
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond)): Depends on destinations or
versions.
PFP:
Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to
550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
LCF:
Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets;
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
Bypass feeding:
Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17
to 22 lb. Bond)
Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option)
.................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:
100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less)
Automatic duplexing unit (ADU is available as standard equipment for some destinations or versions.)
.................................................. Stackless, Switchback type
Toner supply ............................ Automatic toner density detection/supply
Toner cartridge replacing method (There is a recovered toner supply
mechanism.)
Density control......................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
Weight ..................................... Approximately 75 kg (165.34 lb.): e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S
Approximately 77 kg (169.75 lb.): e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/232S/
282/282S/283 (include the developer material and drum) (The ADU
and Drawer module are installed.)
Power requirements ................ AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A
220-240 V or 240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz)
* The acceptable value of each voltage is 10%.
Power consumption................. 1.5 kW or less (115 V series, 200 V series)
* The electric power is supplied to the RADF, (ADU), Finisher, Job Separator, Offset Tray, PFP and
LCF through the equipment.
Total counter............................ Electronical counter

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-4
07/11

Dimensions of the equipment...................... See the figure below (W 637 x D 719 x H 739 (mm))
When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.

719

45
739

637
Fig. 1-1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-5
04/09

1.2

Accessories

Unpacking/setup instruction

1 set

Operators manual

3 pcs. (except for MJD)

Operator's manual pocket

1 pc.

Power cable

1 pc.

Warranty sheet

1 pc. (for NAD)

Setup report

1 set (for NAD and MJD)

Customer satisfaction card

1 pc. (for MJD)

Drum (installed inside of the equipment)

1 pc.

Toner cartridge

1 pc. (except for NAD, MJD)

Developer material

1 pc. (except for NAD, MJD)

Control panel stopper

1 pc.

Blind seal

1 pc.

Rubber plug

5 pcs.

CD-ROM

4 pcs. *2

Transfer charger wire cleaner


(installed inside of the transfer cover)

1 pc.

Paper stopper *1

1 pc.

Stopper bracket *1

1 pc.

Machine version
NAD:
North America
ARD:
Argentina
ASD:
Central and South America / Hong Kong
AUD:
Australia
MJD:
Europe
ASU:
Asia
SAD:
Saudi Arabia
IRD:
Iran
CND:
China
TWD:
Taiwan
JPD:
Japan
KRD:
Korea
*1: e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S only
*2: In e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/232S/233/282/282S/283, 2 discs are included.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-6
07/11

1.3

Options

1.3.1

e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S

Platen Cover

KA-3511 PC/PC-C

Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)

MR-3016

Drawer Module

MY-1021/-C

Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)

KD-1011/-C

Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)

KD-1012 A4/LT/A4-C

Finisher (Hanging type)

MJ-1022/-C

Saddle stitch Finisher

MJ-1025/-C

Hole Punch Unit

MJ-6005 N/E/F/S *1

Staple Cartridge

STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)


STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1025)

Bridge Kit

KN-3520/-C

Job Separator

MJ-5004/-C

Offset Tray

MJ-5005/-C

Key copy Counter, Key copy counter socket

MU-8, MU-10

Work Tray

KK-3511

Damp Heater

MF-2320 U/E

Fax Board

GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/TW/C/AS

2nd Line for Fax Board

GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C

Wireless LAN Adapter

GN-1010

PCI Slot

GO-1040/C

Scrambler Board

GP-1030

Printer Kit

GM-1020/GM-1030

Printer/Scanner Kit

GM-2020/GM-2030

Scanner upgrade Kit

GM-3020/GM-3030

Parallel interface kit

GF-1140

Desk

MH-1700

Harness kit for coin controller

GQ-1020

Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU)

MD-0102

Slot cover

KE-2330

NIC board

GF-1150

Data overwrite kit

GP-1050

* 1) N: North America
E: Europe
F: France S: Sweden
Notes:
The bridge unit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1025).
The finisher (MJ-1025) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6005N/E/F/S).
The PCI slot (GO-1040) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030) and
parallel interface kit (GF-1140).
GM-1030/GM-2030/GM-3030 are exclusive for e-STUDIO200L.
They do not operate with e-STUDIO230/230L/280/280S.
2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-7
05/11

1.3.2

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/232S/233/282/282S/283/283S

Platen Cover

KA-3511PC/-C

Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)

MR-3020

Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU)

MD-0102

Drawer module

MY-1021/-C

Slot cover

KE-2330

Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)

KD-1011/-C

Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)

KD-1012LT/A4/A4-C

Finisher (Hanging type)

MJ-1022/-C

Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type)

MJ-1025

Hole punch unit (for MJ-1025)

MJ-6005N/E/F/S *1

Staple cartridge

STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)


STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1025)

Bridge kit

KN-3520/-C

Job separator

MJ-5004/-C

Offset tray

MJ-5005/-C

Work tray

KK-3511/-C

Damp heater

MF-3520U/E

Fax board

GD-1150NA/EU/AU/AS/C/TW

2nd line for fax board

GD-1160NA/EU-N/C/TW

Printer kit

GM-1070/1071/1080U/1081U

Printer/Scanner kit

GM-2070/2071/2080U/2081U

Scanner kit

GM-4070/GM-4080U

Printer ELK

GM-1130 (e-STUDIO232/232S/233/
282/282S/283/283S)
GM-1140U (e-STUDIO202L/203L)

Printer/Scanner ELK

GM-2130 (e-STUDIO232/232S/233/
282/282S/283/283S)
GM-2140U (e-STUDIO202L/203L)

Scanner ELK

GM-4130 (e-STUDIO232/232S/233/
282/282S/283/283S)
GM-4140U (e-STUDIO202L/203L)

Memory

GC-1230

Scrambler board

GP-1040

Wireless LAN module

GN-1041

Bluetooth module

GN-2010

Antenna

GN-3010

Data overwrite kit

GP-1060

PCI slot

GO-1060

Desk

MH-1700

Harness kit for coin controller

GQ-1020

* 1) N: North America E: Europe F: France S: Sweden


e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-8
07/11

Notes:
1. The bridge kit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022 or MJ-1025).
2. The saddle stitch finisher (MJ-1025) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit
(MJ-6005N/E/F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040).
4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and
Bluetooth module (GN-2010).
5. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and the Bluetooth module (GN-2010) are
installed, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.
6. GM-1080U / GM-2080U / GM-4080U are exclusive to e-STUDIO202L. They do not operate
with e-STUDIO232/232S/282/282S.
7. GM-1081U / GM-2081U / GM-4080U are exclusive to e-STUDIO202L/203L. They do not
operate with e-STUDIO232/232S/233/282/282S/283.
8. The Printer kit (GM-1070/1080U) or Printer/Scanner kit (MG-2070/2080U) does not have a
function for printing an XPS file.
9. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer kit (GM-1071/1081U) or Printer/Scanner kit
(GM-2071/1081U), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.
10.To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer ELK (GM-1130/1140U) or Printer/Scanner
ELK (GM-2130/2140U), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-9
07/11

1.4

Supplies

1.4.1

e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S

Drum

OD-1600

Toner cartridge

PS-ZT2320 /T/D/C/E *1

Developer

D-2320 /C

* 1) T: Taiwan

1.4.2

D: Asia

C: China

E: Europe

e-STUDIO202L/232/232S/282/282S

Drum

OD-1600

Toner cartridge

PS-ZT2340 /T/D/C/E *1

Developer

D-2340 /C

* 1) T: Taiwan

1.4.3

NONE: North America

D: Asia

C: China

E: Europe

NONE: North America

STUDIO203L/233/283/283S

Drum

OD-1600

Toner cartridge

PS-ZT2840 /E *1
PS-ZT2340C *1

Developer

D-2340 /C

* 1) C: China

E: Europe

NONE: North America

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 10
07/11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 11

05/11

Slot cover
KE-2330

2nd Line for


FAX Board
GD-1160
NA/EU/TW/C

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000

Saddle stitch
Finisher
MJ-1025

Drawer Module
MY-1021

FAX Board
GD-1150
NA/AU/EU/
TW/C/AS

Wireless LAN
Adapter
GN-1010

Scrambler
Board
GP-1030

Parallel interface
kit
GF-1140

Hole Punch Unit


MJ-6005 N/E/F/S

Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1011

Platen Cover
KA-3511

Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1012 A4/LT

PCI Slot
GO-1040

Offset Tray
MJ-5005

Job Separator
MJ-5004

Bridge Kit
KN-3520

Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder (RADF)
MR-3016

Desk
MH-1700

Harness kit for


coin controller
GQ-1020

Data
overwrite kit
GP-1050

NIC board
GF-1150

Scanner
Upgrade Kit
GM-3020/
GM-3030

Printer Kit
GM-1020/
GM-1030

Printer/
Scanner Kit
GM-2020/
GM-2030

Automatic
Duplexing Unit
(ADU)
MD-0102

Damp Heater
MF-2320 U/E

Key Copy
Counter Socket
MU-10

Key Copy
Counter
MU-8

Work Tray
KK-3511

1.5.1

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-1600

Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022

1.5
System List

e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S
1

Fig. 1-2

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

e-STUDIO280/280S
Australia

Europe

Asia

NAD
(115V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

Central and
South America/
Hong Kong
ASD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

AUD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

MJD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

ASU
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

Standard

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012LT

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005N
KN-3520

MJ-6005E
KN-3520

MJ-6005E
KN-3520

MJ-6005E/F/S
KN-3520

MJ-6005E
KN-3520

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

KK-3511
MF-2320U
GD-1150NA

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AU

KK-3511
MF-2320E
GD-1150EU

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

GD-1160NA

GD-1160EU

GD-1160EU

GD-1160EU

GD-1160EU

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

Area

North America

Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Key copy counter
Key copy counter
socket
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Parallel interface kit
NIC board
Printer/Scanner kit
Printer kit
Scanner upgrade kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 12
04/09

Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Key copy counter
Key copy counter
socket
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Parallel interface kit
NIC board
Printer/Scanner kit
Printer kit
Scanner upgrade kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

Saudi Arabia
SAD
(127V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

Iran
IRD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012-C

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012-C

MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022-C

MJ-1022-C

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150NA

KK-3511
Standard
N/A

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150C

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150C

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150TW

GD-1160NA

N/A

GD-1160C

GD-1160C

GD-1160TW

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
Standard
GM-1020

GO-1040C
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020

GO-1040C
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
Standard
GM-1020

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

China
CND
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO280S e-STUDIO280
Standard
Standard
MR-3016
MR-3016

Taiwan
TWD
(110V)
e-STUDIO280
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1 - 13
04/09

e-STUDIO230/230L
Australia

Europe

NAD
(115V)
e-STUDIO230
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

Central and
South America/
Hong Kong
ASD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO230
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

AUD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO230
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

MJD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO230 e-STUDIO230L
KA-3511PC
KA-3511PC
MR-3016
MR-3016

Standard

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012LT

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005N
KN-3520

MJ-6005E
KN-3520E

MJ-6005E
KN-3520

MJ-6005E/F/S
KN-3520

MJ-6005E
KN-3520

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

KK-3511
MF-2320U
GD-1150NA

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AU

KK-3511
MF-2320E
GD-1150EU

KK-3511
MF-2320E
GD-1150EU

GD-1160NA

GD-1160EU

GD-1160EU

GD-1160EU

GD-1160EU

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020
GM-3020
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

Area

North America

Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Key copy counter
Key copy counter
socket
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Parallel interface kit
NIC board
Printer/Scanner kit
Printer kit
Scanner upgrade kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 14
04/09

Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Key copy counter
Key copy counter
socket
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Parallel interface kit
NIC board
Printer/Scanner kit
Printer kit
Scanner upgrade kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

Asia
ASU
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO230
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

Saudi Arabia
SAD
(127V)
e-STUDIO230
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

China
CND
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO230
Standard
MR-3016

Taiwan
TWD
(110V)
e-STUDIO230
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022-C

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

MU-10

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150NA

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150C

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150TW

GD-1160EU

GD-1160NA

GD-1160C

GD-1160TW

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GN-1010

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2020
GM-1020

GO-1040C
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
Standard
GM-1020

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
Standard
GM-2020
GM-1020

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GM-3020
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1 - 15
04/09

e-STUDIO200L
Area

North America

Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Key copy counter
Key copy counter
socket
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Parallel interface kit
NIC board
Printer/Scanner kit
Printer kit
Scanner upgrade kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

NAD
(115V)
e-STUDIO200L
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

Central and
South America
ASD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO200L
KA-3511PC
MR-3016

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012LT

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005N
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
MU-8

MU-10

MU-10

KK-3511
MF-2320
GD-1150NA

KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

GD-1160NA

GD-1160EU

GN-1010

GN-1010

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2030
GM-1030
GM-3030
MH-1700

GO-1040
GP-1030
GF-1140
GF-1150
GM-2030
GM-1030
GM-3030
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 16

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 17

07/11
Slot cover
KE-2330

2nd Line for


FAX Board
GD-1160
NA/EU-N/TW/C

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000

Saddle stitch
Finisher
MJ-1025

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-1600

Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022

Drawer Module
MY-1021

FAX Board
GD-11150
NA/EU/AU/
AS/C/TW

Data overwrite
kit
GP-1060

Scrambler
Board
GP-1040

Hole Punch Unit


MJ-6005 N/E/F/S

Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1011

Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1012 A4/LT

PCI Slot
GO-1060

Offset Tray
MJ-5005

Job Separator
MJ-5004

Bridge Kit
KN-3520

Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder (RADF)
MR-3020

Desk
MH-1700

Platen Cover
KA-3511

Harness kit for


coin controller
GQ-1020

Memory
GC-1230

Scanner Kit.ELK
GM-4070/4080U
GM-4130/4140U

Printer/
Scanner Kit.ELK
GM-2070/2071
GM-2080U/2081U
GM-2130/2140U
Printer Kit.ELK
GM-1070/1071
GM-1080U/1081U
GM1130/1140U

Automatic
Duplexing Unit
(ADU)
MD-0102

Damp Heater
MF-2320 U/E

Antenna
GN-3010

Bluetooth
module
GN-2010

Wireless LAN
module
GN-1041

1.5.2
e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/232S/233/282/282S/283/283S
1

Fig. 1-3

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

e-STUDIO282/282S/283/283S
Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

North America

Central and
South America/Hong Kong
ASD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO282

Argentina

Australia

Europe

AUD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO282

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

ARD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
282/283
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

MJD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
282/283
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012LT

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011-N
KD-1012A4

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005N
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
MF-2320U
GD-1150NA

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AU

MJ-6005E/F/S
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
MF-2320E
GD-1150EU

GD-1160NA

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160EU-N

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

NAD
(115V)
e-STUDIO
282/283
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 18
07/11

Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

China

Asia

Saudi Arabia

ASU
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO282

SAD
(127V)
e-STUDIO282

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021-C

MY-1021-C

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011-C
KD-1012A4-C

MD-0102-C
KD-1011-C
KD-1012A4-C

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022-C

MJ-1022-C

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005E

MJ-6005E

MJ-6005E

MJ-6005E

KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150NA

KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
KK-3511-C
Standard
GD-1150C

KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
KK-3511-C
Standard
GD-1150C

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160NA

GD-1160C

GD-1160C

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-2010

GN-2010

GN-2010

GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
Standard
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

CND
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
e-STUDIO
282/283
282S/283S
Standard
Standard
MR-3020
MR-3020

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1 - 19
07/11

Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

Taiwan
TWD
(110V)
e-STUDIO282
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

Korea
KRD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO282
Standard
MR-3020

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150TW

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

GD-1160TW

GD-1160EU-N

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 20
07/11

e-STUDIO232/232S/233
Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

North America

Central and
South America/Hong Kong
ASD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO232

Argentina

Australia

Europe

AUD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO232

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

ARD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
232/233
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

MJD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
232/233
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012LT

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011-N
KD-1012A4

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005N
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
MF-2320U
GD-1150NA

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AU

MJ-6005E/F/S
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
MF-2320E
GD-1150EU

GD-1160NA

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160EU-N

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

NAD
(115V)
e-STUDIO
232/233
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1 - 21
07/11

Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

China

Asia

Saudi Arabia

ASU
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO232

SAD
(127V)
e-STUDIO232

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

KA-3511PC
MR-3020

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021-C

MY-1021-C

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012

KE-2330
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

Standard
KD-1011-C
KD-1012A4-C

MD-0102-C
KD-1011-C
KD-1012A4-C

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

MJ-1022-C

MJ-1022-C

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005E

MJ-6005E

MJ-6005E

MJ-6005E

KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150NA

KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
KK-3511-C
Standard
GD-1150C

KN-3520-C
MJ-5004-C
MJ-5005-C
KK-3511-C
Standard
GD-1150C

GD-1160EU-N

GD-1160NA

GD-1160C

GD-1160C

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-2010

GN-2010

GN-2010

GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
Standard
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

CND
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
e-STUDIO232S
232/233
Standard
Standard
MR-3020
MR-3020

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 22
07/11

Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

Taiwan
TWD
(110V)
e-STUDIO232
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

Korea
KRD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO232
Standard
MR-3020

Standard

Standard

MY-1021

MY-1021

MD-0102
KD-1011-TW
KD-1012A4

MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150TW

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

GD-1160TW

GD-1160EU-N

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1070/1071
GM-2070/2071
GM-4070
GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1 - 23
07/11

e-STUDIO202L/203L
Area
Machine version
(destination)
Model name
Platen cover
RADF
Drawer module
(for Equipment)
Drawer module
(for PFP)
Slot cover
ADU
PFP
LCF
Finisher
(Hanging type)
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1022)
Saddle stitch finisher
Staple cartridge
(for MJ-1025)
Hole punch unit
Bridge kit
Job separator
Offset tray
Work tray
Damp heater
Fax board
2nd line for Fax
board
Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer kit
Printer/Scanner kit
Scanner kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
Harness kit for coin
controller

North America
NAD
(115V)
e-STUDIO
202L/203L
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

Argentina
ARD
(220-240V)
e-STUDIO
202L/203L
KA-3511PC
MR-3020

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

MY-1021

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011
KD-1012LT

Standard
MD-0102
KD-1011-N
KD-1012A4

MJ-1022

MJ-1022

STAPLE-1600

STAPLE-1600

MJ-1025

MJ-1025

STAPLE-2000

STAPLE-2000

MJ-6005N
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
MF-2320U
GD-1150NA

MJ-6005E
KN-3520
MJ-5004
MJ-5005
KK-3511
Standard
GD-1150AS

GD-1160NA

GD-1160EU-N

GN-1041

GN-1041

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1080U/
1081U
GM-2080U/
2081U
GM-4080U
GP-1060
MH-1700

GN-2010
GN-3010
GO-1060
GP-1040
GM-1080U/
1081U
GM-2080U/
2081U
GM-4080U
GP-1060
MH-1700

GQ-1020

GQ-1020

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 24
07/11

2.

ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2.1

Error Code List

One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the
[CLEAR] button and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the CLEAR PAPER or CALL SERVICE symbol is blinking.

2.1.1

Jam

Error code
E010

Classification
Paper exit jam

E020

E030

Other paper jam

E061

E062

E063

E064

E065

E090
E110

E120

E130

E140

E150

Paper misfeeding

Contents
Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach
the exit sensor.
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the
paper transport path when power is turned ON.

Troubleshooting
P. 5-1

Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The


size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer:
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer:
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size
setting of the equipment.
HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be
printed cannot be prepared.
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor): The paper which has passed through
ADU does not reach the 1st transport sensor during
duplex printing.
Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 1st
transport sensor): The paper fed from the bypass
tray does not reach the 1st transport sensor.
Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
1st transport sensor): The paper fed from the upper
drawer does not reach the 1st transport sensor.

P. 5-2

Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the


2nd transport sensor): The paper fed from the lower
drawer does not reach the 2nd transport sensor.
PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP
upper drawer feed sensor.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 5-1

P. 5-2

P. 5-2

P. 5-2

P. 5-2

P. 5-2

P. 5-3
P. 5-15

P. 5-16

P. 5-17

P. 5-18

P. 5-19

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-1
06/09

Error code
E160

Classification
Paper misfeeding

E190

E200

E210

E220

E270

E280

E300

E310

E320

E330

E340

E350

E360

Paper transport jam

Contents

Troubleshooting

PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching


the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not
reach the LCF feed sensor.
Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the 1st transport sensor.
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the 1st transport sensor.
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
1st transport sensor): The paper does not reach the
1st transport sensor after it has passed the lower
drawer feed sensor.
Bypass transport jam (paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st transport
sensor.
ADU transport jam (paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through
ADU and the 1st transport sensor does not reach
the registration sensor during duplex printing.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
1st transport sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor): The paper does not
reach the 1st transport sensor after it has passed
the 2nd transport sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd transport sensor): The paper does not
reach the 2nd transport sensor after it has passed
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
1st transport sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor): The paper does not
reach the 1st transport sensor after it has passed
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd transport sensor): The paper does not
reach the 2nd transport sensor after it has passed
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.

P. 5-20

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

P. 5-21

P. 5-3

P. 5-3

P. 5-4

P. 5-5

P. 5-5

P. 5-3

P. 5-4

P. 5-6

P. 5-3

P. 5-4

P. 5-6

P. 5-7

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-2

Error code
E3C0

Classification
Paper transport jam

E3D0

E3E0

E400

Cover open jam

E410
E420
E430
E440
E450
E480
E490
E491
E510

Paper transport jam


(ADU section)

E520

E550

Other paper jam

Contents

Troubleshooting

LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st transport
sensor.
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st
transport sensor): The paper does not reach the 1st
transport sensor after it has passed the 2nd transport sensor.
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd
transport sensor): The paper does not reach the
2nd transport sensor after it has passed the LCF
feed sensor.
Transfer cover open jam: The transfer cover has
opened during printing.
Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened
during printing.
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has
opened during printing.
ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during printing.
Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened
during printing.
LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has
opened during printing.
Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened
during printing.

P. 5-3

P. 5-4

2
P. 5-6

P. 5-22
P. 5-23
P. 5-24
P. 5-25
P. 5-25
P. 5-26
P. 5-26

Job separator cover open jam: The job separator


cover has opened during printing.
Offset tray cover open jam: The offset tray cover
has opened during printing.
Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU
entrance sensor.
Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The
paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.

P. 5-27

Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The


paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).

P. 5-10

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 5-27
P. 5-8

P. 5-9

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-3

Error code
E711

E712

E713

E714

E721

E722

E723

E724

E725

E726

E731

E741

E742

E743

E860
E870

Classification
RADF jam

Contents

Troubleshooting

Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The


original fed from the original feeding tray does not
reach the original length sensor.
Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach
the registration sensor.
Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing
edge of the original does not pass the original
length sensor after its leading edge has reached
this sensor.
Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse
side).
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning):
The original which passed the read sensor does not
reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the
scanning section to exit section.
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor
does not reach the reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section.
Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing
edge of the original does not pass the registration
sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives
the transport/exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the exposure waiting
position.
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of
the original does not pass the reversal sensor after
its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during
reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original
does not reach the reverse sensor when original is
fed from the reverse section.
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse
feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reverse sensor when the
original is exited from the reverse section.
RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam
access cover has opened during RADF operation.
RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF
operation.

P. 5-28

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

P. 5-28

P. 5-28

P. 5-29

P. 5-29

P. 5-30

P. 5-30

P. 5-30

P. 5-31

P. 5-31

P. 5-32

P. 5-32

P. 5-33

P. 5-33

P. 5-34
P. 5-34

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4

Error code
E910

Classification
Finisher jam
(Bridge unit)

E920

E930

E940

E950

Job separator jam

E951

E960

Offset tray jam

E961

E9F0
EA10

Finisher jam
(Puncher unit)
Finisher jam
(Finisher unit)

EA20
EA30
EA40
EA50
EA60
EA70

EAB0

Finisher jam
(Saddle Stitcher section)

EAC0

EAD0

Other paper jam

Contents

Troubleshooting

Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The


paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor-1 after its leading edge has
reached the sensor.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit
transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor-1.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The
trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge
unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor-2.
Jam not reaching the job separator transport sensor: The paper has passed through the exit sensor
does not reach the job separator transport sensor.
Stop jam at the job separator transport sensor: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the job separator transport sensor.
Jam not reaching the offset tray transport sensor:
The paper has passed through the exit sensor does
not reach the offset tray transport sensor.

P. 5-35

Stop jam at the offset tray transport sensor: The


trailing edge of the paper does not pass the offset
tray transport sensor.
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.
[MJ-1025 (When MJ-6005 is installed)]
Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has
passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1025]
Paper transport stop jam: The paper does not pass
through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1025]
Power-ON jam: Paper exists at the inlet sensor
when power is turned ON. [MJ-1022/1025]
Door open jam: The finisher has been released
from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022/1025]
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
[MJ-1022/1025]
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper
earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022]
Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of
paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack
tray. [MJ-1022/1025]
Saddle paper transport stop jam: The paper which
passed through the inlet sensor does not reach or
pass through the folding position sensor. [MJ-1025]
Saddle transport delay jam: The paper which has
reached the inlet sensor does not pass through this
sensor. [MJ-1025]
Print end command time-out jam: The printing has
not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board
at the end of printing.

P. 5-11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 5-35

P. 5-35

P. 5-35

P. 5-11

P. 5-11

P. 5-11

P. 5-36
P. 5-37

P. 5-38
P. 5-39
P. 5-40
P. 5-41
P. 5-42
P. 5-43

P. 5-45

P. 5-45

P. 5-46

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-5

Error code

Classification

EAE0

Finisher jam

EAF0

Finisher jam
(Finisher unit)

EB30

Finisher jam

EB50

Paper transport jam

EB60

Contents

Troubleshooting

Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been


interrupted because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher when the
paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher.
Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which
passed through the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022]
Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled
because of the communication error between the
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is
detected at [EB50]).

P. 5-46

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

P. 5-44

P. 5-46

P. 5-12

P. 5-14

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6

2.1.2

Service call

Error code
Classification
C010
Drive system
related service call
C040
Paper feeding system related service call
C130
C140
C150
C160
C180
C1A0
C1B0
C260

Scanning system
related service call

C270
C280
C410

Fuser unit related


service call

C430

C440

C450
C550
(C780)
C570
C580

Optional communication related service call

Contents
Troubleshooting
Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not rotating
P. 5-47
normally.
PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating
P. 5-48
normally.
P. 5-49
Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer tray
motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is not moving normally.
Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer tray
P. 5-49
motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is not moving normally.
PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper
P. 5-50
drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer
tray is not moving normally.
P. 5-50
PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower
drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer
tray is not moving normally.
LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray-up motor is
P. 5-51
not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally.
P. 5-52
LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence
motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving
normally.
LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport
P. 5-53
motor is not rotating normally.
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp
P. 5-54
(white reference) is not detected when power is turned
ON.
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a
P. 5-55
specified period of time: The carriage does not shift from
its home position in a specified period of time.
P. 5-55
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a
specified period of time: The carriage does not reach to
its home position in a specified period of time.
Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: AbnorP. 5-56
mality of service call the thermistor is detected when
power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller
does not rise in a specified period of time after power is
turned ON.
Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment:
P. 5-57
Abnormality of the thermistor is detected after a specified
period of time has passed from power-ON (including
ready state).
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The temP. 5-57
perature of the fuser roller has exceeded the range of
control (in this case, the main switch turns OFF automatically) or does not even reach the range.
Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality of the
P. 5-57
thermistor is detected during printing.
RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred
P. 5-58
between the RADF and the scanner.
Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC
P. 5-58
board
Communication error between IPC board and finisher
P. 5-58

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-7
07/04

Error code
Classification
C730
RADF related service call
C740
C810
C820
C830
C940
C970
CA10

Circuit related service call


Process related
service call
Laser optical unit
related service call

CA20
CB10
CB20
CB30
CB50
CB60
CB80

CC30

CC50

CC60
CC80

CC90

Finisher related
service call

Contents
EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialized
normally when performing the code 05-356.
Reverse sensor adjustment error
Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally.
Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot
be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356.
Original length sensor adjustment error: The original
length sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356.
Engine-CPU abnormality

Troubleshooting
P. 5-59

High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of the


main charger is detected.
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor is not
rotating normally.
H-Sync detection error: H-Sync detection PC board cannot detect laser beams.
Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor or
stack transport roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1025]
Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery
roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022/1025]
Tray lift motor abnormality: The tray lift motor is not rotating normally or the delivery tray is not moving normally.
[MJ-1025]
Staple motor (staple/fold) abnormality: The staple motor
is not rotating normally or the stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1025]
Stapler unit shift motor abnormality: The stapler unit shift
motor is not rotating normally or the Stapler Unit is not
moving normally. [MJ-1025]
Backup RAM data abnormality:
1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller
board is detected when the power is turned on.
[MJ-1025]
2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch controller
board is detected when the power is turned on.
[MJ-1025 (when MJ-6005 is installed)]
Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating normally or the stack delivery belt
is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not rotating normally or the swing guide is not moving normally.
[MJ-1025]
Horizontal registration motor abnormality: The horizontal
registration motor is not rotating normally or the puncher
is not moving normally.
[MJ-1025 (when MJ-6005 is installed)]
Punch motor abnormality: The punch motor is not rotating
normally or the puncher is not moving normally.
[MJ-1025 (when MJ-6005 is installed)]
Front jogging motor abnormality: Front jogging motor is
not rotating normally or the front alignment plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Alignment motor (front) abnormality: The alignment motor
(front) is not rotating normally or the front alignment plate
is not moving normally. [MJ-1025]
Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper stack
tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack tray is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]

P. 5-76

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

P. 5-59
P. 5-59
P. 5-59
P. 5-59
P. 5-76

P. 5-60
P. 5-60
P. 5-61
P. 5-62
P. 5-63
P. 5-64
P. 5-66
P. 5-67

P. 5-67

P. 5-69

P. 5-69
P. 5-70

P. 5-71

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8
06/09

Error code
Classification
CCA0
Finisher related
service call
CCB0

CDC0
CDD0
CDE0
CDF0

Offset tray related


service call

CE00

Finisher related
service call

CF60
F070

Other service call


Communication
related service call
Other service call

F090
F091
F092
F100
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F110
F111
F120
F130
F200

Communication
related service call
Other service call

Contents
Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower stack
tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack tray is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Rear jogging motor abnormality: Rear jogging motor is
not rotating normally or the rear alignment plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Alignment motor (rear) abnormality: The alignment motor
(rear) is not rotating normally or the rear alignment plate
is not moving normally. [MJ-1025]
Punch power failure abnormality: 24 V is not applied to
the punch controller board.
[MJ-1025 (when MJ-6005 is installed)]
Folding position sensor abnormality: Automatic adjustment of the folding position sensor can not be performed
properly. [MJ-1025]
Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor does not
rotate properly. [MJ-1025]
Initialization error of the offset tray: The home position of
the separator cannot be detected when the power is
turned ON.
Communication error between finisher unit and puncher
unit: Communication error between the finisher controller
PC board and punch controller PC board.
[MJ-1025 (when MJ-6005 is installed)]
Toner for recycle transport area lock
Communication error between System-CPU and EngineCPU
SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally.
HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be
detected.
HDD start error: HDD cannot become Ready state.
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified period of time.
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of
HDD.
HDD other error
Point and Print partition damage
/SHR partition damage
/SHA partition damage
Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU
Scanner response abnormality
Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally.
Invaid MAC address
Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Troubleshooting
P. 5-72
P. 5-73

2
P. 5-74
P. 5-74
P. 5-75
P. 5-76
P. 5-75

P. 5-76
P. 5-58
P. 5-76
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-78
P. 5-78
P. 5-78
P. 5-58
P. 5-58
P. 5-78
P. 5-78
P. 5-78

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-9

2.1.3

Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function

1) Internet FAX related error


(when GM-1020/3020, GM-1030/3030, GM-2020, GM-2030, GM-1070/4070, GM-1080U/4080U,
GM-2070, GM-2080U, GM-1071/4070, GM-1081U/4080U, GM-2071, GM-2081U, GM-1130/4130,
GM-1140U/4140U, GM-2130, or GM-2140U is installed)
Error code
1C10
1C11
1C12
1C13
1C14
1C15
1C20
1C21
1C22
1C30
1C31
1C32
1C33
1C40

Contents
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Exceeding file capacity
System management module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality

Troubleshooting
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-79
P. 5-80
P. 5-80

1C60
1C61
1C62
1C63
1C64
1C65
1C66

HDD full failure during processing


Address Book reading failure
Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error

P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-80

1C67
1C68
1C69
1C6A
1C6B
1C6C
1C6D
1C70
1C71
1C72
1C80
1C81
1C82
1CC0
1CC1

NIC time time-out error


NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error
Terminal mail address error
Destination mail address error
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Job canceling
Power failure

P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-80
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-81

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10
07/11

2) RFC related error


(when GM-1020/3020, GM-1030/3030, GM-2020, GM-2030, GM-1070/4070, GM-1080U/4080U,
GM-2070, GM-2080U, GM-1071/4070, GM-1081U/4080U, GM-2071, GM-2081U, GM-1130/4130,
GM-1140U/4140U, GM-2130, or GM-2140U is installed)
Error code
2500

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Syntax error, command unrecognized

2501

Syntax error in parameters or


arguments

2503

Bad sequence of commands

2504
2550

Command parameter not implemented


Mailbox unavailable

2551

User not local

2552

Insufficient system storage

2553

Mailbox name not allowed

Contents

Troubleshooting

HOST NAME error (RFC: 500)


Destination mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 500)
HOST NAME error (RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 503)
HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)

P. 5-82

Destination mail address error


(RFC: 550)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 551)
Terminal/Destination mail address error
(RFC: 552)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 553)

P. 5-82

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2
P. 5-82

P. 5-82
P. 5-82

P. 5-82
P. 5-82
P. 5-82

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 11
07/11

3) Electronic Filing related error


Error code
2B10
2B11
2B20
2B21
2B30
2B31

2B32

2B50
2B51
2B60

2B70

2B71
2B80
2B90
2BA0
2BA1
2BB0
2BB1
2BC0
2BC1
2BD0
2BE0
2BF0
2BF1

2BF2

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
There was no applicable job.

Contents
No applicable job error in job control
module
JOB status abnormality
File library function error
Exceeding file capacity

Job status failed.


Failed to access file.
Message size exceeded limit or
maximum size
Insufficient disk space.
Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition
Failed to access Electronic Filing. Status of specified Electronic Filing or
folder is undefined or being created/
deleted
Failed to print Electronic Filing
Electronic Filing printing failure:
document.
Specified document can not be printed
because of client's access (being edited,
etc.).
Failed to process image.
Image library error
Failed to process print image.
List library error
The folder was renamed. A folder A folder with the same name exists in the
box.
of the same name already
existed.
The document was renamed. A
A document with the same name exists
document of the same name
in the box or folder.
already existed.
Document(s) expire(s) in a few
Documents expiring in a few days exist
days
Hard Disk space for Electronic
Hard disk space in /SHR partition is
Filing nearly full.
nearly full (90%).
Insufficient Memory.
Insufficient memory capacity
Invalid Box password specified.
Invalid Box password
Incorrect paper size
A Paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected.
Job canceled
Job canceling
Power failure occurred
Power failure
System fatal error.
Fatal failure occurred.
Failed to acquire resource.
System management module resource
acquiring failure
Power failure occurred during ePower failure occurred during restoring
Filing restoring.
of Electronic Filing
Failed to get machine parameter. Machine parameter reading failure
Maximum number of pages has
Exceeding maximum number of pages
been exceeded (list Maximum)
Maximum number of documents Exceeding maximum number of documents
has been exceeded (list Maximum)
Maximum number of folders has
been exceeded (list Maximum)

Exceeding maximum number of folders

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Troubleshooting
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-83

P. 5-83

P. 5-83
P. 5-83
-

P. 5-83
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-84

P. 5-84

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12
07/11

4) E-mail related error


(when GM-1020/3020, GM-1030/3030, GM-2020, GM-2030, GM-1070/4070, GM-1080U/4080U,
GM-2070, GM-2080U, GM-1071/4070, GM-1081U/4080U, GM-2071, GM-2081U, GM-1130/4130,
GM-1140U/4140U, GM-2130, or GM-2140U is installed)
Error code
2C10
2C11
2C12
2C13
2C14
2C15
2C20
2C21
2C22
2C30
2C31
2C32
2C33
2C40
2C43
2C44
2C60
2C61
2C62
2C63
2C64
2C65
2C66
2C67
2C68
2C69
2C6A
2C6B
2C6C
2C6D
2C70
2C71
2C72
2C80
2C81
2CC0
2CC1

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
Message size exceeded limit or
maximum size
Illegal Job status

Contents
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error

P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85

Invalid parameter
Exceeding file capacity

P. 5-85
P. 5-85

System management module access


abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
Encryption error

P. 5-85

Illegal Job status


Illegal Job status
Failed to create directory
Failed to create file
Failed to delete file
Failed to create file
Failed to convert image file format
Encryption error. Failed to create
file.
Creating the image file was not
Encryption PDF enforced mode error
permitted.
Failed to process your Job. Insuffi- HDD full failure during processing
cient disk space.
Failed to read AddressBook
Not enough memory
Invalid Domain Address
Invalid Domain Address
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Failed to send E-Mail message
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Invalid address specified in From:
field
Invalid address specified in To:
field
NIC system error
SMTP service is not available
Failed SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP Authentication
Failed
Failed to process received E-mail
job
Failed to process received Fax job
Job canceled
Power failure occurred

Troubleshooting

P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-85
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86

Address Book reading failure


Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
Terminal mail address error

P. 5-86
P. 5-85
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-86
P. 5-87

Destination mail address error (No RFC


error)
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error

P. 5-87

E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received


Process failure of FAX job received
Job canceling
Power failure

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 5-86
P. 5-87
P. 5-87
P. 5-87
P. 5-87
P. 5-87
P. 5-87

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 13
07/11

5) File sharing related error


(when GM-1020/3020, GM-1030/3030, GM-2020, GM-2030, GM-1070/4070, GM-1080U/4080U,
GM-2070, GM-2080U, GM-1071/4070, GM-1081U/4080U, GM-2071, GM-2081U, GM-1130/4130,
GM-1140U/4140U, GM-2130, or GM-2140U is installed)
Error code
2D10
2D11
2D12
2D13
2D14
2D15

2D20
2D21
2D22
2D30
2D31
2D32
2D33
2D40
2D43
2D44
2D60
2D61
2D62
2D63
2D64
2D65

2D66
2D67
2D68
2DA0
2DA1
2DA2
2DA3

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
There are too many documents in
the folder. Failed in creating new
document.
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Failed to create directory
Failed to create file
Failed to delete file
Failed to create file
Failed to convert image file format
Encryption error. Failed to create
file.
Creating the image file was not
permitted.
Failed to copy file
Invalid parameter specified
Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path
Specified network path is invalid.
Check destination path
Logon to file server failed. Check
username and password
There are too many documents in
the folder. Failed in creating new
document.
Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space.
FTP service is not available
File Sharing service is not available
Expired scan documents deleted
from share folder.
Expired Sent Fax documents
deleted from shared folder.
Expired Received Fax documents
deleted from shared folder.
Scanned documents in shared
folder deleted upon user's
request.

Contents

Troubleshooting

System access abnormality


Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error

P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88

Invalid parameter
Exceeding document number

P. 5-88
P. 5-88

System management module access


abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality

P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-89

Encryption error

P. 5-89

Encryption PDF enforced mode error

P. 5-89

File library access abnormality


Invalid parameter
File server connection error

P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-89

Invalid network path

P. 5-89

Login failure

P. 5-89

Exceeding documents in folder: Creating


new document is failed.

P. 5-89

HDD full failure during processing

P. 5-89

FTP service not available


File sharing service not available

P. 5-89
P. 5-89

Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly.


Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX
documents completed properly.
Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly.
Manual deletion of scanned documents
completed properly.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14
07/11

Error code
2DA4

2DA5

2DA6
2DA7
2DA8
2DC0
2DC1

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Sent Fax Documents in shared
folder deleted upon user's
request.
Received Fax Documents in
shared folder deleted upon user's
request.
Failed to delete file.
Failed to acquire resource.
The HDD is running out of capacity for the shared folder.
Job canceled
Power failure occurred

Contents

Troubleshooting

Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly.

Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly.

File deletion failure


Resource acquiring failure
Hard disk space in /SHA partition is
nearly full (90%).
Job canceling
Power failure

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-89

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 15
07/11

6) E-mail reception related error


(when GM-1020/3020, GM-1030/3030, GM-2020, GM-2030, GM-1070/4070, GM-1080U/4080U,
GM-2070, GM-2080U, GM-1071/4070, GM-1081U/4080U, GM-2071, GM-2081U, GM-1130/4130,
GM-1140U/4140U, GM-2130, or GM-2140U is installed)
Error code
3A10
3A11

3A12

3A20
3A21

3A22

3A30
3A40
3A50
3A51

3A52

3A60
3A61

3A62

3A70

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
MIME Error has been detected in
the received mail.
MIME Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has
been transferred to the administrator.
MIME Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could
not be transferred to the administrator.
Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
has been transferred to the
administrator.
Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Whole partial mails were not
reached by timeout.
Partial Mail Error has been
detected in the received mail.
HDD Full Error has been
occurred in this mail.
HDD Full Error has been
occurred in this mail. This mail
has been transferred to the
administrator.
HDD Full Error has been
occurred in this mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.
HDD Full Warning has been
occurred in this mail.
HDD Full Warning has been
occurred in this mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.
HDD Full Warning has been
occurred in this mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Receiving partial mail was
aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable.

Contents
E-mail MIME error

Troubleshooting
P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

E-mail analysis error

P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

Partial mail time-out error

P. 5-90

Partial mail related error

P. 5-90

Insufficient HDD capacity error

P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

Warning of insufficient HDD capacity

P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

Warning of partial mail interruption

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

P. 5-90

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16
07/11

Error code
3A80
3A81

3A82

3B10
3B11

3B12

3B20
3B21

3B22

3B30
3B31

3B32

3B40
3B41

3B42

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Partial mail was received during
the partial mail setting is disabled.
Partial mail was received during
the partial mail setting is disabled.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Partial mail was received during
the partial mail setting is disabled.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Format Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Format Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
has been transferred to the
administrator.
Format Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Charset Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Charset Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
has been transferred to the
administrator.
Charset Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Decode Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Decode Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
has been transferred to the
administrator.
Decode Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail
could not be transferred to the
administrator.

Contents
Partial mail reception setting OFF

Troubleshooting
P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

E-mail format error

P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

Content-Type error

P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

Charset error

P. 5-91
P. 5-91

P. 5-91

E-mail decode error

P. 5-90
P. 5-90

P. 5-90

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 17

Error code
3C10
3C11

3C12

3C13
3C20
3C21

3C22

3C30
3C31

3C32

3C40
3C41

3C42

3C50

3C51

3C52

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Tiff Analyze Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Analyze Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail.

Contents
TIFF analysis error

Troubleshooting
P. 5-91
P. 5-91

P. 5-91

P. 5-91
TIFF compression error

P. 5-91
P. 5-91

P. 5-91

TIFF resolution error

Tiff Resolution Error has been


detected in the received mail.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
TIFF paper size error
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has
Offramp destination error
been detected in the received
mail.
Offramp Destination Error has
been detected in the received
mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has
been detected in the received
mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

P. 5-91
P. 5-91

P. 5-91

P. 5-91
P. 5-91

P. 5-91

P. 5-91

P. 5-91

P. 5-91

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18

Error code
3C60
3C61

3C62

3C70
3D10

3D20

3D30
3E10
3E20

3E30
3E40
3F00
3F10
3F20
3F30
3F40

Message displayed in the


TopAccess screen
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail has been transferred to
the administrator.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail could not be transferred
to the administrator.
Power Failure has been occurred
in E-mail receiving.
SMTP Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail.
This mail was deleted.
Offramp Destination limitation
Error has been detected in the
received mail.
Fax Board Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Timeout Error
has been occurred in the
received mail.
POP3 Login Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Login Error occurred in
received mail.
File I/O Error has been occurred
in this mail. The mail could not be
received until File I/O is recovered.

Contents
Offramp security error

Troubleshooting
P. 5-91
P. 5-91

P. 5-91

Power failure error

P. 5-91

Destination address error

P. 5-91

Offramp destination limitation error

P. 5-91

FAX board error

P. 5-92

POP3 server connection error

P. 5-92

POP3 server connection time-out error

P. 5-92

POP3 login error

P. 5-92

POP3 login method error

P. 5-92

File I/O error

P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 19
05/11

2.1.4

Printer function error

Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen
(when GM-1020/3020, GM-1030/3030, GM-2020, GM-2030, GM-1070/4070, GM-1080U/4080U, GM2070, GM-2080U, GM-1071/4070, GM-1081U/4080U, GM-2071, GM-2081U, GM-1130/4130, GM1140U/4140U, GM-2130, or GM-2140U is installed)
Error code
4030

4031
4032
4033

4034
4035
4036
A221
A222
A290
A291
A292

Contents
No Printer Kit / Printer Kit function disabled: The Printer Kit (GM-1010) or the
Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2010) is not installed. Or network printing of an XPS
file is performed without the Expansion Memory (GC-1230), or network printing is performed after the termination of a trial period..
HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid
network print are saved in HDD.
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed.
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not
registered as a user.
Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from
the print job screen.
Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during
print job (copy, list print, network print).
Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time.
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code.
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Troubleshooting
P. 5-92

P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92

P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
P. 5-93

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20
07/11

<<Error history: e-STUDIO200L/230/280>>


In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
04 07 11 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
EA10
Error code
YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A

D
E
F

G
H
I
J
K
L

MMM
NNN
O

Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Unused 5: PFP lower drawer 6: Unused
7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13 LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Postcard
J: 8.5SQ K: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 (Envelope)
Q: DL (Envelope) R: Monarch (Envelope) S: CHO-3 (Envelope)
T: YOU-4 (Envelope) Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple
A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission
3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print
6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Mode
0: Unused 1: Unused 2: Black

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 21
06/09

<<Error history: e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>>


In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
99999999
04 07 11 17 57 32
064
064
EA10
Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
4 digits
8 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
with its last two digits.)
A

D
E
F

G
H
I
J
K
L

MMM
NNN
O

23621000000
ABCDEFHIJLO
11 digits

Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13 LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Postcard
J: 8.5SQ K: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 (Envelope)
Q: DL (Envelope) R: Monarch (Envelope) S: CHO-3 (Envelope)
T: YOU-4 (Envelope) Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple
A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission
3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print
6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Mode
0: Unused 1: Unused 2: Black

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22
07/11

2.2

Self-diagnosis Modes

Mode
Control panel
check mode
Test mode
Test print
mode
Adjustment
mode
Setting mode
List print mode
PM support
mode
Firmware
update mode

For start
[0]+[1]+
[POWER]
[0]+[3]+
[POWER]
[0]+[4]+
[POWER]
[0]+[5]+
[POWER]
[0]+[8]+
[POWER]
[9]+[START]
+[POWER]
[6]+[START]
+[POWER]
[8]+[9]+
[POWER]

Contents
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the
LCD pixels blink.
Checks the status of input/output signals.
Outputs the test patterns.
Adjusts various items.
Sets various items.
Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08,
PM support mode and pixel counter.
Clears each counter.
Performs updating of the system firmware.

For exit
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON

Display
100% C A4
TEST MODE
100% P A4
TEST PRINT
100% A A4
TEST MODE
100% D
TEST MOD
100% UA A4
LIST PRINT
100% K
TEST MODE
-

Notes:
1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagnosis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line connectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be
sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connecting the modular code.
<Operation procedure>
Control panel check mode (01):
[0][1]
[POWER]

LED lit/
LCD blinking

[START]

(Button check)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

[START]

Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel
(Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)

Test mode (03): Refer to


P. 2-25 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)"/
P. 2-32 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)" and
P. 240 "2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03)".

Test print mode (04): Refer to

Adjustment mode (05): Refer to


P. 2-44 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)"/
P. 2-64 "2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)".

Setting mode (08): Refer to


P. 2-84 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)"/
153 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)".

P. 2-43 "2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04)".

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 2-

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 23
07/11

List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.

[9][START]
[POWER]

[START]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
Key in the first
101: Adjustment mode (05)
code to be printed
102: Setting mode (08)

[START]

[Digital keys]
Key in the last
code to be printed

[START]
List starts to
be printed

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history

PM support mode (6S):


[6][START]
[POWER]

(Code)
1: Auto-toner adjustment
2: PM Support Screen

[START]
(Operation started)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Firmware update mode (89): Refer to 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING.


[POWER]
ON
Normal
[0][1]

Warming up

Control panel
check mode

[0][3]

Test mode

[0][4]
Test print
mode

[0][5]
Adjustment
mode

[0][8]
Setting
mode

[9][START]
List print
mode

[6][START]
PM support
mode

[8][9]

Firmware
update mode

Ready

[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user

State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes


Fig. 2-1

*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24

2.2.1

Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)

The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).

<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[POWER]

[START]

[FAX]

[Digital keys]

(LCD ON)

[CLEAR]

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.

Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 25
05/12

[FAX] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF)


Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A

LCF connection
Bypass unit connection
Bypass paper sensor
ADU connection
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
PFP upper drawer detection switch

Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Not connected
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

B
C

PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor

D
E
F
G
H

PFP upper drawer feed sensor


PFP connection
PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor

LCF tray bottom sensor

Tray at bottom
position

LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor

Correct stacking
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

C
D
E

LCF drawer detection switch

F
G
H

LCF feed side paper stock sensor

PFP lower drawer detection sensor

B
C

PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor

D
E

PFP lower drawer feed sensor


PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor

F
G
H

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

e.g.
Connected
Connected
Paper present
Connected
ADU closed
No paper
No paper
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
Other than
bottom position
Incorrect
stacking
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26
05/12

Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[5]

LCF end fence home position sensor

LCF end fence stop position sensor

C
D
E

LCF standby side empty sensor


LCF side cover opening/closing switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
LCF tray-up sensor

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

LCF feed sensor


LCF feed side empty sensor

1st transport sensor


Upper drawer empty sensor
Upper drawer tray-up sensor

Lower drawer empty sensor


Lower drawer tray-up sensor

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D

Bypass feed paper width sensor-2


Bypass feed paper width sensor-1
Bypass feed paper width sensor-0
Upper drawer detection switch

Upper drawer paper stock sensor

F
G
H

No paper
Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Fence home
position
Fence stop
position
No paper
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
Tray at upper
limit position

Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

2nd transport sensor


-

e.g.
Other than
home position
Other than
stop position
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Other than
upper limit
position
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
-

Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Drawer not
Drawer
installed
present
Paper almost
Paper present
empty
-

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 27
05/11

Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[0]

A
B
C
D

Lower drawer detection switch

Lower drawer paper stock sensor

F
G
H

Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
-

e.g.
Drawer
present
Paper present
-

Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper-width sensor
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

Paper-width size
A3/A4
B5-R
A5-R
A3/A4
Card size
A4-R/A5
B6-R
B4-R/B5

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28
05/11

[FAX] button: ON ([FAX] LED: ON)


Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[1]

[2]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C

24 V power supply
IPC board connection
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Auger lock switch
Toner cartridge installation switch
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Auto-toner sensor connection
Front cover opening/closing switch
Side cover opening/closing sensor
Transfer cover opening/closing switch
Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Key copy counter connection
Job Separator upper stack sensor
(When Job Separator is installed)
Offset Tray separate sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)

Fuser unit connection

Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is


installed)
Bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch
(When Bridge unit is installed)
Job Separator cover switch (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor
(When bridge unit is installed)
Job Separator lower stack sensor
(When Job Separator is installed)
Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bypass feed sensor
High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection

F
[3]

[4]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e.g.

Power ON
Not connected
Abnormal rotation
Lock
OFF
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
Cover opened
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation
Not connected
Paper full

Power OFF
Connected
Normal rotation
Unlock
ON
No paper
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Cover closed
Cover closed
Normal rotation
Connected
Paper not full

Separator at
home position
Fuser unit
installed
No paper

Other than
home position
Fuser unit not
installed
Paper present

Cover opened

Cover closed

Cover opened

Cover closed

Cover opened
Paper not full

Cover closed
Paper full

Paper full

Paper not full

Paper full
No paper

Paper not full


Paper present

Paper present

No paper

Paper present
No paper
Normal

No paper
Paper present
Abnormal

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 29
05/11

Digital
key

Button

Items to check

A
B
C
D
E
F

RADF connection

Platen sensor

Carriage home position sensor

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

A
B
C
D

APS sensor (APS-R)

RADF connected
Platen cover
opened
Carriage at
home position
No original

APS sensor (APS-C)

No original

APS sensor (APS-3)

No original

APS sensor (APS-2)

No original

APS sensor (APS-1)

No original

RADF tray sensor

RADF empty sensor

C
D
E

RADF jam access cover switch


RADF opening/closing sensor
RADF exit sensor

RADF reverse sensor

RADF read sensor

RADF registration sensor

Original
present
Original
present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present

A
B
C
D
E

RADF original length sensor

RADF original width sensor-1

RADF original width sensor-2

RADF original width sensor-3

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

e.g.
Not connected
Platen cover
closed
Other than
home position
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30
05/11

Digital
key

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Button

Items to check

Refer to table 2

D
E
F
G
H
A

Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection3


Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection2
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection1
Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2020 or 2030))

Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1020 or 1030))

Connectable

Dongle (for Scanner upgrade kit (GM-3020 or 3030))

Connectable

Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices

Connectable

e.g.

B
C
[9]

[0]

E
F
G
H

e.g.

Refer to table 2

Refer to table 2
Connectable

Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
-

Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment


Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray
connection detection-3
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray
connection detection-2
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray
connection detection-1

Bridge unit
Normal display
Highlighting
display
Normal display

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Job Separator
Highlighting
display
Highlighting
display
Normal display

Offset Tray
Highlighting
display
Normal display
Normal display

None
Highlighting
display
Highlighting
display
Highlighting
display

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 31
05/11

2.2.2

Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)

The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[POWER]

[START]

[FAX]

[Digital keys]

(LCD ON)

[CLEAR]

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.

Fig. 2-3 Example of display during input check

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32
07/11

[FAX] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF)


Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A

LCF connection
Bypass unit connection
Bypass paper sensor
ADU connection
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
PFP upper drawer detection switch

Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Not connected
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

B
C

PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor

D
E
F
G
H

PFP upper drawer feed sensor


PFP connection
PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor

LCF tray bottom sensor

Tray at bottom
position

LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor

Correct stacking
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

C
D
E

LCF drawer detection switch

F
G
H

LCF feed side paper stock sensor

PFP lower drawer detection sensor

B
C

PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor

D
E

PFP lower drawer feed sensor


PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor

F
G
H

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e.g.
Connected
Connected
Paper present
Connected
ADU closed
No paper
No paper
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
Other than
bottom position
Incorrect
stacking
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 33
05/11

Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[5]

LCF end fence home position sensor

LCF end fence stop position sensor

C
D
E

LCF standby side empty sensor


LCF side cover opening/closing switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
LCF tray-up sensor

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

LCF feed sensor


LCF feed side empty sensor

No paper
Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

1st transport sensor


Upper drawer empty sensor
Upper drawer tray-up sensor

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Lower drawer empty sensor


Lower drawer tray-up sensor

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D

Bypass feed paper width sensor-2


Bypass feed paper width sensor-1
Bypass feed paper width sensor-0
Upper drawer detection switch

Upper drawer paper stock sensor

Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

2nd transport sensor


-

F
G
H

Fence home
position
Fence stop
position
No paper
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
Tray at upper
limit position

e.g.
Other than
home position
Other than
stop position
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Other than
upper limit
position
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
-

Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Drawer not
Drawer
installed
present
Paper almost
Paper present
empty
-

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34
05/11

Digital
key

Button

Items to check

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.

[0]

A
B
C
D

Lower drawer detection switch

Lower drawer paper stock sensor

F
G
H

Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
-

e.g.
Drawer
present
Paper present
-

Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper-width sensor
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

Paper-width size
A3/A4
B5-R
A5-R
A3/A4
Card size
A4-R/A5
B6-R
B4-R/B5

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 35
05/11

[FAX] button: ON ([FAX] LED: ON)


Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.

[1]

[2]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C

24 V power supply
IPC board connection
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Auger lock switch
Toner cartridge installation switch
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Auto-toner sensor connection
Front cover opening/closing switch
Side cover opening/closing sensor
Transfer cover opening/closing switch
Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Key copy counter connection
Job Separator upper stack sensor
(When Job Separator is installed)
Offset Tray separate sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)

Fuser unit connection

Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is


installed)
Bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch
(When Bridge unit is installed)
Job Separator cover switch (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor
(When bridge unit is installed)
Job Separator lower stack sensor
(When Job Separator is installed)
Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bypass feed sensor
High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection

F
[3]

[4]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

e.g.

Power ON
Not connected
Abnormal rotation
Lock
OFF
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
Cover opened
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation
Not connected
Paper full

Power OFF
Connected
Normal rotation
Unlock
ON
No paper
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Cover closed
Cover closed
Normal rotation
Connected
Paper not full

Separator at
home position
Fuser unit
installed
No paper

Other than
home position
Fuser unit not
installed
Paper present

Cover opened

Cover closed

Cover opened

Cover closed

Cover opened
Paper not full

Cover closed
Paper full

Paper full

Paper not full

Paper full
No paper

Paper not full


Paper present

Paper present

No paper

Paper present
No paper
Normal

No paper
Paper present
Abnormal

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36
05/11

Digital
key

Button

Items to check

A
B
C
D
E
F

RADF connection

Platen sensor

Carriage home position sensor

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

A
B
C
D

APS sensor (APS-R)

RADF connected
Platen cover
opened
Carriage at
home position
No original

APS sensor (APS-C)

No original

APS sensor (APS-3)

No original

APS sensor (APS-2)

No original

APS sensor (APS-1)

No original

RADF tray sensor

RADF empty sensor

C
D
E

RADF jam access cover switch


RADF opening/closing sensor
RADF exit sensor

RADF intermediate sensor

RADF read sensor

RADF registration sensor

Original
present
Original
present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present

A
B
C
D
E

RADF original length sensor

RADF original width sensor-1

RADF original width sensor-2

RADF original width sensor-3

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e.g.
Not connected
Platen cover
closed
Other than
home position
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 37
05/11

Digital
key

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Button

Items to check

Refer to table 2

D
E
F
G
H
A

Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection3


Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection2
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection1
Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2020 or 2030))

Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1020 or 1030))

Connectable

Dongle (for Scanner upgrade kit (GM-3020 or 3030))

Connectable

Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices

Connectable

e.g.

B
C
[9]

[0]

E
F
G
H

e.g.

Refer to table 2
Refer to table 2
Connectable

Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
-

Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment


Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray
connection detection-3
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray
connection detection-2
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray
connection detection-1

Bridge unit
Normal display
Highlighting
display
Normal display

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Job Separator
Highlighting
display
Highlighting
display
Normal display

Offset Tray
Highlighting
display
Normal display
Normal display

None
Highlighting
display
Highlighting
display
Highlighting
display

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38
05/11

[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: ON)
Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play

Items to check

e.g.
A
B
C
[0]

D
E
F
G
H

Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2070 or 2080U)) Connected


Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1070, 1071, 1080U or 1081U))
Connected
Dongle (for Scanner kit (GM-4070 or 4080U)) Connected
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices Connected
Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1)
-

Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Acceptable
-

e.g.
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not acceptable
-

*1

Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used
with this code.
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise
this code cannot be used.
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB
storage device.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 39
07/11

2.2.3

Output check (test mode 03)

Status of the output signals can be checked by keying in the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
[0][3]
[POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Operation
ON

Stop
code

[START]

Operation
OFF

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 2
[0][3]
[POWER]

(Code)

Operation
One direction

[START]

[CLEAR]

Test mode
standby

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][3]
[POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Operation
ON

[START]

Operation
OFF

[CLEAR]

Test mode
standby

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 4
[0][3]
[POWER]

(Code)

[START]

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

[POWER] OFF

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40

Code
101
102
103
108
109
110
118
120
121
122
177
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
217
218
222
225
226
228
232
234
235
236
237
242
243
248
249
252
253
255
256
261
264
265
267

Function
Code
Function
Main motor ON (operational without
151
Code No. 101 function OFF
developer unit)
Toner motor ON (normal rotation)
152
Code No. 102 function OFF
Polygonal motor ON (600 dpi)
153
Code No. 103 function OFF
Registration clutch ON
158
Code No. 108 function OFF
PFP motor ON
159
Code No. 109 function OFF
ADU motor ON (low speed)
160
Code No. 110 function OFF
Laser ON
168
Code No. 118 function OFF
Exit motor ON (normal rotation)
170
Code No. 120 function OFF
Exit motor ON (reverse rotation)
171
Code No. 121 function OFF
LCF motor ON
172
Code No. 122 function OFF
Offset Tray motor ON (reciprocating movement)
Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Upper transport clutch ON/OFF
Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF
Middle transport clutch ON/OFF
LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF
LCF end fence reciprocating movement
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF
Lower transport clutch ON/OFF
Key copy counter count up
ADU clutch ON/OFF
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF
Discharge LED ON/OFF
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (low speed)
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (high speed)
Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
Developer bias [+DC] ON/OFF
Developer bias [-DC] ON/OFF
Main charger ON/OFF
Separation bias ON/OFF
Transfer guide bias ON/OFF
Transfer transformer ON/OFF
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the
[ZOOM] button
SLG board cooling fan 1 ON/OFF
SLG board cooling fan 2 ON/OFF
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 41
05/11

Code
271
278
280
281
282
283
284
285
289
290
294
295
297
410
411

Function
LCF tray-up motor (up/down)
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
Internal cooling fan 1 ON/OFF (high speed)
Internal cooling fan 1 ON/OFF (low speed)
RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF
Power OFF mode (for 200 V series)
RADF fan motor ON/OFF
Internal cooling fan 2 ON/OFF (low speed)
Internal cooling fan 2 ON/OFF (high speed)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42
05/11

2.2.4

Test print mode (test mode 04)

The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode
(04).
<Operation procedure>
[0][4]
[POWER]

2
(Code)

[START]

Operation
Continuous
Test Printing

[CLEAR]

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.
Code
111
113
142

Types of test pattern


Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Grid pattern

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
Error diffusion
Error diffusion
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 43

2.2.5

Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)

Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in
order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)

[START]
[CANCEL]

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]

([FAX])
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Stores value in RAM)


[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
(Corrects value)

Procedure 2

[0][5]
[POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Value
displayed

[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

[START]
[CANCEL]

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)

[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

[START]

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )

([FAX])
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44
05/12

Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

Automatic
( adjustment
)

[START]

[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)

([FAX])
(Test copy)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

Automatic
( adjustment
)

[START]

[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM

([FAX])
(Test copy)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

[START]

Value
displayed

[START]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)

Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

Automatic
adjustment

Manual
adjustment

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )

([FAX])
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )

When the storing is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the
manual adjustment, the automatic adjustment starts automatically.

Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after
it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 45

Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)


Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at
Standby Screen.
Code
1
3

Types of test pattern


Grid pattern
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)

Remarks
Refer to 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment
Refer to 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46

Notes:
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M
stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.

Code

Classification

200

Developer

201

Developer

205
210

Developer
Charger

220

Transfer

221

Transfer

222

Transfer

233

280

Separation
Separation
Separation
Process

286

Laser

305

Scanner

234
235

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Automatic adjustment of
ALL
As the value increases,
auto-toner sensor
the sensor output
(Fuser heater ON)
increases correspondingly.
The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes
after this adjustment was
started and is automatically set in the range of
2.35 to 2.45 V.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit
is not installed.
(Chap. 3.1)
Correction of auto-toner
ALL
164
M
Corrects the control
sensor
<0-255>
value of the auto-toner
(Fuser heater ON)
sensor setup in 05-200.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit
is not installed.
Developer bias DC output
ALL
135
M
As the value increases,
adjustment
<0-255>
the transformer output
increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL
90
M
ingly. Remove the develput adjustment
<0-255>
oper unit and install the
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
165
M
adjustment jig to make
output adjustment (H)
<0-255>
adjustment.
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
179
M
(Chap. 3.6)
output adjustment (C)
<0-255>
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
126
M
output adjustment (L)
<0-255>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
64
M
output adjustment (H)
<0-255>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
65
M
output adjustment (C)
<0-255>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
46
M
output adjustment (L)
<0-255>
Forced performing of idling
ALL
M
Perform this adjustment
for toner recycle
before the replacement
of the developer material. (The toner is forcibly
removed from the
cleaner.)
Laser power adjustment
ALL
63
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases, the laser output increases correspondingly.
Image location adjustment
ALL
125
SYS When the value
of secondary scanning
<92-164>
increases by 1, the
direction
image shifts by approx.
(scanner section)
0.137 mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
17

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 47
05/12

Code

Classification

306

Scanner

308

Scanner

340

Scanner

354

RADF

355
356

RADF

357

RADF

358

RADF

359

Scanner

365

RADF

366

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Image location adjustment
ALL
156
SYS When the value
of primary scanning direc<0-255>
increases by 1, the
tion
image shifts by approx.
(scanner section)
0.0846 mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Distortion mode
ALL
Moves carriages to the
6
adjusting position.
(Chap. 3.2.4)
1
ALL
129
SYS When the value
Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scan<0-255>
increases by 1, the
ning direction
reproduction ratio in the
(scanner section)
secondary scanning
direction (vertical to
paper feeding direction)
increases by approx.
0.223%.
1
Adjustment of for single - ALL
10
SYS When the value
RADF paper
sided orig<0-20>
increases by 1, the
alignment
inal
aligning amount
ALL
10
SYS increases by approx.
1
for double
0.5 mm.
<0-20>
sided original
Automatic adjustment of
ALL
SYS Performs the adjustment
6
RADF sensor and
and initialization when
EEPROM initialization
the RADF board or
RADF sensor is
replaced.
1
Fine adjustment of RADF
ALL
50
SYS When the value
transport speed
<0-100>
increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio of the
secondary scanning
direction when using the
RADF increases by
approx. 0.1%.
1
RADF sideways deviation
ALL
128
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0846 mm.
1
ALL
128
SYS When the value
Carriage position adjust<0-255>
increases by 1, the carment during scanning from
riage position when
RADF
using the RADF shifts by
approx. 0.1 mm toward
the original feeding side.
1
RADF leadfor single - ALL
50
SYS When the value
ing edge posi- sided orig<0-100>
increases by 1, the
tion
inal
copied image of original
adjustment
for double
ALL
50
SYS fed from the RADF shifts
1
toward the trailing edge
sided orig<0-100>
of paper by approx.
inal
0.1 mm.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48

Code

Classification

367

RADF

368

RADF

401

Laser

405

410

Laser

411
421

Drive

422
424
425

Drive

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
6
RADF original guide width
ALL
Stores the current width
adjustment
of RADF original guide
(Minimum)
by keying in this code
with the guide set at the
minimum width. Perform
this adjustment when the
RADF board or volume is
replaced, or when the
code (05-356) is performed.
6
RADF original guide width
ALL
Stores the current width
adjustment
of RADF original guide
(Maximum)
by keying in this code
with the guide set at the
maximum width. Perform this adjustment
when the RADF board or
volume is replaced, or
when the code (05-356)
is performed.
1
PRT
136
M
When the value
Fine adjustment of polygo<0-255>
increases by 1, the
nal motor rotation speed
reproduction ratio of pri(adjustment of primary
mary scanning direction
scanning direction reproPPC
134
M
1
increases by approx.
duction ratio)
<0-255>
0.07%. (approx. 0.1 mm/
step)
1
PPC
128
M
When the value
Adjustment of primary
<0-255>
increases by 1, the writscanning laser writing start
ing start position shifts to
position.
PRT
153
M
1
the front side by approx.
<0-255>
0.0423 mm.
PPC/
129
M
When the value
1
Adjustment of secondary
PRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
scanning direction reproreproduction ratio of secduction ratio
ondary scanning direc(fine adjustment of main
FAX
139
M
1
tion increases by approx.
motor speed)
<0-255>
0.04%.
Fine adjustment of exit
PPC/
160
M
When the value
1
motor speed
PRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
rotation becomes faster
FAX
121
M
1
by approx. 0.05%.
<0-255>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 49
04/09

Code

Classification

430

Image

431

Image

432

Image

433

Image

434-0

Image

434-1

Image

435

Image

436

Image

437

Image

438

Image

440

Laser

441
442
443
444
445

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Top margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
When the value
(blank area at the leading
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
edge of the paper)
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
Left margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
0.0423 mm.
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
(blank area at the right of
<0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PPC
0
M
Bottom margin adjustment
<0-255>
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
Bottom margin adjustment PPC/
29
M
(blank area at the trailing
PRT
<0-255>
edge of the paper)/
Reverse side at duplexing
PPC/
29
M
Right margin adjustment
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)/Reverse
side at duplexing
Top margin adjustment
PRT
24
M
(blank area at the leading
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
Left margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the right of
<0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the trailing
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
M
When the value
ALL
8
Adjustment of Upper
increases by 1, the
drawer
<Refer to
secondary
image shifts toward the
content>
scanning
leading edge of the
laser writing
Lower
ALL
21
M
paper by approx.
start position
drawer
<0-40>
0.2 mm.
Bypass
ALL
8
M
<Acceptable value>
feeding
<0-15>
e-STUDIO230,
LCF
ALL
8
M
e-STUDIO280: 0-15
<0-15>
e-STUDIO200L,
PFP
ALL
8
M
e-STUDIO230L/S,
<0-15>
e-STUDIO280S: 0-40
Duplex
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1
1

1
4

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50
04/09

Code
448-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

448-1
448-2

449-0

Paper
feeding

449-1
449-2

450-0

Paper
feeding

450-1
450-2

452-0

Paper
feeding

452-1
452-2

455-0

Paper
feeding

455-1
455-2

457

Paper
feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
10
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
increases by approx.
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short size
ALL
8
M
<Paper length>
(PFP upper
<0-63>
Long size:
drawer/Plain
330 mm or longer
paper)
Middle size:
ALL
10
M
Paper aligning Long size
220 mm to 329 mm
amount
<0-63>
Short size:
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
219 mm or shorter
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
8
M
(PFP lower
<0-63>
drawer/Plain
paper)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
17
M
(Upper
<0-63>
drawer/Plain
paper)
ALL
12
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
10
M
(Lower
<0-63>
drawer/Plain
paper)
ALL
20
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
20
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
30
M
(Duplex feed<0-63>
ing/Plain
paper)
Paper aligning amount
ALL
8
M
adjustment at the registra<0-63>
tion section
(LCF/Plain paper)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 51

Code
458-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

458-1
458-2

460-0

Paper
feeding

460-1
460-2

461-0

Paper
feeding

461-1
461-2

462-0

Paper
feeding

462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0

Paper
feeding

463-1
463-2
464-0
464-1
464-2

Paper
feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
26
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
increases by approx.
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short size
ALL
25
M
<Paper length>
(Bypass feed<0-63>
Long size:
ing/Plain
330 mm or longer
paper)
Middle size:
Paper aligning Long size
ALL
26
M
220 mm to 329 mm
<0-63>
amount
Short size:
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
219 mm or shorter
the registrasize
<0-63>
* Postcard is suption section
Short size
ALL
26
M
ported only for JPN
(Bypass feed<0-63>
model.
ing/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing/Thick
Postcard
ALL
14
M
paper 3)
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing/OHP film)
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing /Envelope)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52

Code
466-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

466-1
466-3
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
468-0

Finisher

468-1
468-2
469-0

Paper
feeding

469-1

469-2
469-3
469-4

469-5
470-0

Paper
feeding

470-1
470-2

471-0
471-1
471-2

Paper
feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
4
ALL
0
M
When the value
Adjustment of Plain
paper
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
paper pushdriving speed of bypass
ing amount/
Postcard
ALL
0
M
4
feed roller increases by
Bypass feed<0-255>
approx. 0.2 ms when the
ing
Envelope
ALL
0
M
4
paper transport is started
<0-255>
from the registration secThick
ALL
0
M
4
tion.
paper 1
<0-255>
* Postcard is supThick
ALL
0
M
4
ported only for JPN
paper 2
<0-255>
model.
Thick
ALL
0
M
4
paper 3
<0-255>
OHP film
ALL
0
M
4
<0-255>
A4-R/LT-R
ALL
0
M
When the value
4
Fine adjust<-14-14>
increases by 1, the
ment of binding position/
binding/folding position
B4
ALL
0
M
4
shifts toward the right
folding posi<-14-14>
tion
page by 0.25 mm.
A3/LD
ALL
0
M
4
<-14-14>
4
ALL
20
M
When the value
Paper aligning Thick
paper 1
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Long size
increases by approx.
the registraThick
ALL
20
M
4
0.8 mm.
tion section
paper 1
<0-63>
<Paper length>
(Upper
Middle
Long size:
drawer)
size
330 mm or longer
ALL
20
M
4
Thick
Middle size:
<0-63>
paper 1
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size
Short size:
Thick
ALL
20
M
4
219 mm or shorter
paper 2
<0-63>
Long size
Thick
ALL
22
M
4
paper 2
<0-63>
Middle
size
Thick
ALL
19
M
4
paper 2
<0-63>
Short size
ALL
20
M
4
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
4
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
19
M
4
(Lower
<0-63>
drawer/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
20
M
4
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
4
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
19
M
4
(PFP upper
<0-63>
drawer/Thick
paper 1)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 53

Code
472-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

472-1
472-2

473

Paper
feeding

474-0

Paper
feeding

474-1
474-2

497-0

Laser

497-1

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
20
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
increases by approx.
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short size
ALL
19
M
<Paper length>
(PFP lower
<0-63>
Long size:
drawer/Thick
330 mm or longer
paper 1)
Middle size:
ALL
8
M
Paper aligning amount
220 mm to 329 mm
adjustment at the registra<0-63>
Short size:
tion section
219 mm or shorter
(LCF/Thick paper 1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Duplex feeding/Thick
paper 1)
Adjustment of
drawer sideways deviation

497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0

Laser

498-1

501

Image

503
504
505
506
507

Image

Adjustment of
primary scanning laser
writing start
position at
duplex feeding
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Center value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Light step
value

Long size

ALL

Middle
size
Short size

ALL

Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
PFP upper
drawer
PFP lower
drawer
LCF

ALL

Bypass
feeding
Long size

ALL

ALL

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

ALL

Short size
(A4/LT or
smaller)

ALL

Photo

PPC

Text/Photo

PPC

Text

PPC

Text/Photo

PPC

Photo

PPC

Text

PPC

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
4
4
4

24
<0-63>
24
<0-63>
33
<0-63>

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
148
<0-255>

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SYS

When the value


increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423 mm.

4
4

M
M

SYS

When the value


increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423 mm.

When the value


increases, the image at
the center step becomes
darker.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

1
1

When the value


increases, the image of
the light steps becomes
lighter.

1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54

Code

Classification

508

Image

509

510

512

Image

514
515
532

Image

533
534
570

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Text/Photo PPC
EUR:20
SYS When the value
Density
UC:20
increases, the image of
adjustment
JPN:30
the dark steps
Fine adjust<0-255>
becomes darker.
ment of manual density/
Photo
PPC
EUR:24
SYS
Dark step
UC:24
value
JPN:24
<0-255>
Text
PPC
EUR:20
SYS
UC:20
JPN:27
<0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS becomes darker.
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density Text
PPC
128
SYS
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
40
SYS When the value
tion/Back<0-255>
increases, the background peak
Photo
PPC
16
SYS ground becomes more
adjustment
brightened.
<0-255>
Text

Image

Range correc- Text/Photo


tion on original manually
set on the
original glass

PPC
PPC

571

Photo

PPC

572

Text

PPC

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

64
<0-255>
EUR:12
UC:12
JPN:22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>

SYS
SYS

SYS

SYS

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

Sets whether the values


of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. Ones place is an
adjustment for automatic density and tens
place is for manual density. Once they are
fixed, the range correction is performed with
standard values. The
values of the background
peak and text peak affect
the reproduction of the
background density and
text density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 55

Code

Classification

593

Image

594

Image

595

Image

620

Image

621

622

653

Image

654

Image

655

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Gamma data
Text/Photo PPC
0
SYS Ones place:
slope adjust<0-99>
0: Equivalent to the set
ment
Photo
PPC
0
SYS value 5
1
1 to 9: Select the slope of
<0-99>
Text
PPC
0
SYS Gamma curve (The
1
larger the value is, the
<0-99>
larger the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
low density (The smaller
the value is, the darker
the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value
1
Sharpness
Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 1
SYS When the value
adjustment
UC: 1
increases, the image
JPN: 0
becomes sharper. When
<0-99>
the value decreases, the
image becomes softer.
The smaller the value is,
the less the moire
Photo
PPC
2
SYS becomes.
1
Ones place: Fixed value
<0-99>
(05-620 is 1, 05-621 is
2, 05-622 is 5)
Tens place: Adjustable
from 0 to 9 regarding the
Text
PPC
EUR: 45 SYS default value as the stan1
dard (The larger the
UC: 45
value is, the sharper the
JPN: 45
image becomes.)
<0-99>
* When entering 0 on
the ten's place, this
value is not displayed
on the entry screen.
1
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC EUR: 208 SYS Adjusts the level of the
UC: 208
smudged/faint text.
smudged/faint
JPN: 216
With increasing the
text
<0-255>
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
1
Adjustment of PS
PRT
5
M
Adjustment of the
smudged/faint
<0-9>
smudged/faint text.
text
With decreasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
PCL
PRT
5
M
1
increasing it, the
<0-9>
smudged text is suppressed.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56

Code

Classification

667-0

Image

667-1
667-2

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Density adjustment of cop- PPC
0
M
Adjusts the density level
ied image
<0-10>
of copied image.
When the value
PPC
4
M
decreases, the text
<0-10>
becomes lighter.
PPC
5
M

667-3

PPC

667-4

PPC

672-0

Image

672-1

Adjustment of
printer image
density

Normal

PRT
PRT

672-2

PRT

672-3

PRT

672-4

PRT

676-0

Toner saving

PRT

676-1

PRT

676-2

PRT

676-3

PRT

676-4

PRT

693

Image

Range correc- Text/Photo


tion on original set on the
RADF

PPC

694

Photo

PPC

695

Text

PPC

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

<0-10>
6
<0-10>
10
<0-10>
0
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
10
<0-10>
0
<0-10>
2
<0-10>
3
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
EUR:12
UC:12
JPN:22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>

Procedure
4
4
4

M
M
M

Adjustment of the image


density.
With decreasing the
value, the text becomes
lighter.

4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

Sets whether the values


of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. Ones place is an
adjustment for automatic density and tens
place is for manual density. Once they are
fixed, the range correction is performed with
standard values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background
density and text density
respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 57

Code

Classification

700

Image

701

702

710

Image

714
715

Image

719

720

Image

724

725

Image

729
820
821
822

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of Center
FAX
120
SYS When the value
binarized
value
<0-255>
increases, the image at
threshold
the center step becomes
(Text)
lighter.
Light step
FAX
20
SYS When the value
value
<0-255>
increases, the image of
light side becomes
lighter.
Dark step
FAX
20
SYS When the value
value
<0-255>
increases, the image of
dark side becomes
darker.
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
Density
adjustment
<0-255>
increases, the image at
the center step becomes
Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX
128
SYS darker.
ual density/
<0-255>
Center value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
the light steps becomes
Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX
20
SYS lighter.
ual density/
<0-255>
Light step
value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
the dark steps
Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX
20
SYS becomes darker.
ual density/
<0-255>
Dark step
value
Density
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-255>
increases, the image
Fine adjustText/Photo FAX
128
SYS becomes darker.
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density
224
SYS When the value
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
<0-255>
decreases, the text
tion/Text peak
adjustment
Text
SCN
224
SYS becomes darker.
<0-255>
Photo
SCN
239
SYS
<0-255>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1

1
1

1
1
1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 58

Code

Classification

825

Image

826

827

830

Image

831

832

835

Image

836
837
845
846
847

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
SYS Sets whether the values
12
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
of the background peak
<11-14,
tion on origiand text peak are fixed
21-24,
nal manually
or not. Ones place is an
31-34,
set on the
adjustment for auto41-44>
original glass
Text
SCN
12
SYS matic density and tens
1
place is for manual den<11-14,
sity. Once they are
21-24,
fixed, the range correc31-34,
tion is performed with
41-44>
SYS standard values. The
1
Photo
SCN
12
values of the background
<11-14,
peak and text peak affect
21-24,
the reproduction of the
31-34,
background density and
41-44>
text density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
1
SYS Sets whether the value
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
12
of the background peak
tion on origi<11-14,
and text peak are fixed
nal set on the
21-24,
or not. Ones place is an
RADF
31-34,
adjustment for auto41-44>
SYS matic density and tens
1
Text
SCN
12
place is for manual den<11-14,
sity. Once they are
21-24,
fixed, the range correc31-34,
tion is performed with
41-44>
Photo
SCN
12
SYS standard values.
1
The values of the back<11-14,
ground peak and text
21-24,
peak affect the reproduc31-34,
tion of the background
41-44>
density and text density
respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
48
SYS When the value
1
tion/Back<0-255>
increases, the background peak
Text
SCN
48
SYS ground becomes more
1
adjustment
brightened.
<0-255>
Photo
SCN
40
SYS
1
<0-255>
Density
Text/Photo SCN
128
SYS When the value
1
adjustment
<0-255>
increases, the image at
Fine adjustText
SCN
128
SYS the center step becomes
1
ment of mandarker.
<0-255>
ual density/
Photo
SCN
128
SYS
1
Center value
<0-255>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 59
04/09

Code

Classification

850

Image

851
852
855

Image

856
857
860

Image

861
862
865-0

Image

865-1
865-2

866-0

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Text/Photo SCN
20
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
20
SYS the light steps becomes
lighter.
ment of man<0-255>
ual density/
Photo
SCN
20
SYS
Light step
<0-255>
value
Text/Photo SCN
20
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
20
SYS the dark steps
becomes darker.
ment of man<0-255>
ual density/
Photo
SCN
20
SYS
Dark step
<0-255>
value
Text/Photo SCN
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
128
SYS becomes darker.
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density Photo
SCN
128
SYS
<0-255>
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS When the value
Sharpness
tion ratio
<0-99>
increases, the image
adjustment
40% or
becomes sharper. When
(Text/Photo)
smaller
the value decreases, the
1
SYS image becomes softer.
Reproduc- SCN
The smaller the value is,
<0-99>
tion ratio
the less the moire
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS becomes.

Sharpness
adjustment
(Text)

866-1
866-2

867-0

867-1
867-2

Image

Sharpness
adjustment
(Photo)

tion ratio
81% or
larger
Reproduction ratio
40% or
smaller
Reproduction ratio
41-80%
Reproduction ratio
81% or
larger
Reproduction ratio
40% or
smaller
Reproduction ratio
41-80%
Reproduction ratio
81% or
larger

<0-99>

One's place: Fixed value


(05-865 is 1, 05-866 is
2, 05-867 is 5)
Ten's place: Sharpness
intensity (0: Use default
value, 1-9: Filter intensity)

Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4

4
4

SCN

2
<0-99>

SYS

SCN

2
<0-99>

SYS

SCN

2
<0-99>

SYS

SCN

5
<0-99>

SYS

SCN

5
<0-99>

SYS

SCN

5
<0-99>

SYS

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 60

Code

Classification

913

Image

914

915

916

Image

917

918

919
920
921

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
SYS Set whether the values
PPC
EUR:12
Range correc- Custom
of the background peak
Mode 1
UC:12
tion on origiand text peak are fixed
JPN:22
nal manually
or not. One's place is an
<11-14,
set on the
adjustment for auto21-24,
original glass
matic density and ten's
31-34,
place is for manual den41-44>
SYS sity. Once they are
Custom
PPC
22
fixed, the range correcMode 2
<11-14,
tion is performed with
21-24,
standard values. The
31-34,
values of the background
41-44>
peak and text peak affect
SYS the reproduction of the
Custom
PPC
12
background density and
Mode 3
<11-14,
text density respectively.
21-24,
1: fixed/fixed
31-34,
2: varied/fixed
41-44>
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
SYS Set whether the values
Range correc- Custom
PPC
EUR:12
of the background peak
tion on origiMode 1
UC:12
and text peak are fixed
nal set on the
JPN:22
or not. One's place is an
RADF
<11-14,
adjustment for auto21-24,
matic density and ten's
31-34,
place is for manual den41-44>
SYS sity. Once they are
Custom
PPC
22
fixed, the range correcMode 2
<11-14,
tion is performed with
21-24,
standard values. The
31-34,
values of the background
41-44>
peak and text peak affect
the reproduction of the
SYS background density and
Custom
PPC
12
text density respectively.
Mode 3
<11-14,
1: fixed/fixed
21-24,
2: varied/fixed
31-34,
3: fixed/varied
41-44>
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
PPC
40
SYS When the value
Range correc- Custom
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the backtion
Background
Custom
PPC
64
SYS ground becomes more
brightened.
peak adjustMode 2
<0-255>
ment
Custom
PPC
16
SYS
Mode 3

<0-255>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1

1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 61

Code

Classification

922

Image

923

924

928

Image

931

Image

932
933
934

Image

935
936
937

Image

938
939
940
941
942

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Sharpness
Custom
PPC
1
SYS When the value
adjustment
Mode 1
<0-99>
increases, the image
becomes sharper. When
the value decreases, the
image becomes softer.
The smaller the value is,
the less the moire
Custom
PPC
EUR:45
SYS becomes.
1
One's place: Fixed value
Mode 2
UC:45
(05-922 is 1, 05-923 is
JPN:45
5, 05-924 is 2)
<0-99>
Tens place: Adjustable
from 0 to 9 regarding the
Custom
PPC
2
SYS default value as the stan1
dard (The larger the
Mode 3
<0-99>
value is, the sharper the
image becomes.)
* When entering 0 on
the ten's place, this
value is not displayed
on the entry screen.
Adjustment of Custom
PPC
208
SYS Adjustment of the
1
smudged/faint Mode 1
<0-255>
smudged/faint text.
text
With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
Custom
PPC
128
SYS When the value
1
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS the center step becomes
1
darker.
ment of man- Mode 2
<0-255>
ual density/
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
1
Center value
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
20
SYS When the value
1
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS the light step density
1
becomes lighter.
ment of man- Mode 2
<0-255>
ual density/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
1
Light step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
20
SYS When the value
1
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS the dark step density
1
becomes darker.
ment of man- Mode 2
<0-255>
ual density/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
1
Dark step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
1
Custom
PPC
128
SYS When the value
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the image
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS becomes darker.
1
ment of auto- Mode 2
<0-255>
matic density Custom
PPC
128
SYS
1
Mode 3
<0-255>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 62
05/05

Code

Classification

943

Image

944

945

976

Maintenance

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Gamma data
Custom
PPC
0
SYS Ones place:
slope adjustMode 1
<0-99>
0: Equivalent to the set
ment
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
Gamma curve (The
Custom
PPC
0
SYS larger the value is, the
larger the slope
Mode 2
<0-99>
becomes.)
Tens place:
0: Equivalent to the set
Custom
PPC
0
SYS value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
Mode 3
<0-99>
low density (The smaller
the value is, the darker
the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value
Equipment number (serial
ALL
SYS When this adjustment is
number) entry
performed with this code,
the setting code (08-995)
is also performed automatically (10 digits).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 63
05/05

2.2.6

Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)

Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in
order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)

[START]
[CANCEL]

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]

([FAX])
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Stores value in RAM)


[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
(Corrects value)

Procedure 2

[0][5]
[POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Value
displayed

[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

[START]
[CANCEL]

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)

[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

[START]

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )

([FAX])
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 64
07/11

Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

Automatic
( adjustment
)

[START]

[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)

([FAX])
(Test copy)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

Automatic
( adjustment
)

[START]

[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM

([FAX])
(Test copy)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

[START]

Value
displayed

[START]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)

Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

Automatic
adjustment

Manual
adjustment

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )

([FAX])
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )

When the storing is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the
manual adjustment, the automatic adjustment starts automatically.

Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after
it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 65
05/12

Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)


Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at
Standby Screen.
Code
1
3

Types of test pattern


Grid pattern
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)

Remarks
Refer to 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment
Refer to 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 66
05/12

Notes:
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M
stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.

Code

Classification

200

Developer

201

Developer

205
210

Developer
Charger

220

Transfer

221

Transfer

222

Transfer

233

280

Separation
Separation
Separation
Process

286

Laser

305

Scanner

234
235

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Automatic adjustment of
ALL
As the value increases,
auto-toner sensor
the sensor output
(Fuser heater ON)
increases correspondingly.
The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes
after this adjustment was
started and is automatically set in the range of
2.35 to 2.45 V.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit
is not installed.
(Chap. 3.1)
Correction of auto-toner
ALL
164
M
Corrects the control
sensor
<0-255>
value of the auto-toner
(Fuser heater ON)
sensor setup in 05-200.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit
is not installed.
Developer bias DC output
ALL
135
M
As the value increases,
adjustment
<0-255>
the transformer output
increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL
90
M
ingly. Remove the develput adjustment
<0-255>
oper unit and install the
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
165
M
adjustment jig to make
output adjustment (H)
<0-255>
adjustment.
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
179
M
(Chap. 3.6)
output adjustment (C)
<0-255>
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
126
M
output adjustment (L)
<0-255>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
64
M
output adjustment (H)
<0-255>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
65
M
output adjustment (C)
<0-255>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
46
M
output adjustment (L)
<0-255>
Forced performing of idling
ALL
M
Perform this adjustment
for toner recycle
before the replacement
of the developer material. (The toner is forcibly
removed from the
cleaner.)
Laser power adjustment
ALL
63
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases, the laser output increases correspondingly.
Image location adjustment
ALL
125
SYS When the value
of secondary scanning
<92-164>
increases by 1, the
direction
image shifts by approx.
(scanner section)
0.137 mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
17

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 67
07/11

Code

Classification

306

Scanner

308

Scanner

340

Scanner

350

Scanner

351
354

RADF

355
357

RADF

358

RADF

359

Scanner

365

RADF

366

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Image location adjustment
ALL
156
SYS When the value
of primary scanning direc<0-255>
increases by 1, the
tion
image shifts by approx.
(scanner section)
0.0846 mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Distortion mode
ALL
Moves carriages to the
6
adjusting position.
(Chap. 3.2.4)
1
ALL
129
SYS When the value
Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scan<0-255>
increases by 1, the
ning direction
reproduction ratio in the
(scanner section)
secondary scanning
direction (vertical to
paper feeding direction)
increases by approx.
0.223%.
Shading posi- Original
ALL
128
SYS 0.1369 mm/step
1
tion adjustglass
<118ment
138>
SYS
1
RADF
ALL
128
<118138>
Adjustment of for single - ALL
10
SYS When the value
1
RADF paper
sided orig<0-20>
increases by 1, the
alignment
inal
aligning amount
for double
ALL
10
SYS increases by approx.
1
0.5 mm.
sided orig<0-20>
inal
1
Fine adjustment of RADF
ALL
50
SYS When the value
transport speed
<0-100>
increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio of the
secondary scanning
direction when using the
RADF increases by
approx. 0.1%.
1
RADF sideways deviation
ALL
128
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0846 mm.
1
ALL
128
SYS When the value
Carriage position adjust<0-255>
increases by 1, the carment during scanning from
riage position when
RADF
using the RADF shifts by
approx. 0.1 mm toward
the original feeding side.
1
RADF leadfor single - ALL
50
SYS When the value
ing edge posi- sided orig<0-100>
increases by 1, the
tion
inal
copied image of original
adjustment
for double
ALL
50
SYS fed from the RADF shifts
1
toward the trailing edge
sided orig<0-100>
of paper by approx.
inal
0.1 mm.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 68
07/11

Code

Classification

401

Laser

405

410

Laser

411
421

Drive

422
424
425

Drive

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
PRT
136
M
When the value
Fine adjustment of polygo<0-255>
increases by 1, the
nal motor rotation speed
reproduction ratio of pri(adjustment of primary
mary scanning direction
scanning direction reproM
1
PPC
134
increases by approx.
duction ratio)
<0-255>
0.07%. (approx. 0.1 mm/
step)
1
Adjustment of primary
PPC
128
M
When the value
scanning laser writing start
<0-255>
increases by 1, the writposition.
ing start position shifts to
PRT
153
M
1
the front side by approx.
<0-255>
0.0423 mm.
Adjustment of secondary
PPC/
129
M
When the value
1
scanning direction reproPRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
duction ratio
reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direc(fine adjustment of main
FAX
139
M
1
tion increases by approx.
motor speed)
<0-255>
0.04%.
Fine adjustment of exit
PPC/
160
M
When the value
1
motor speed
PRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
rotation becomes faster
FAX
121
M
1
by approx. 0.05%.
<0-255>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 69
07/11

Code

Classification

430

Image

431

Image

432

Image

433

Image

434-0

Image

434-1

Image

435

Image

436

Image

437

Image

438

Image

440

Laser

441
442
443
444
445

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
value>
Top margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
When the value
(blank area at the leading
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
edge of the paper)
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
Left margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
0.0423 mm.
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
(blank area at the right of
<0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PPC
0
M
Bottom margin adjustment
<0-255>
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
Bottom margin adjustment PPC/
29
M
(blank area at the trailing
PRT
<0-255>
edge of the paper)/
Reverse side at duplexing
PPC/
29
M
Right margin adjustment
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)/Reverse
side at duplexing
Top margin adjustment
PRT
24
M
(blank area at the leading
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
Left margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the right of
<0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the trailing
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
M
When the value
ALL
8
Adjustment of Upper
increases by 1, the
drawer
<Refer to
secondary
image shifts toward the
content>
scanning
leading edge of the
laser writing
Lower
ALL
21
M
paper by approx.
start position
drawer
<0-40>
0.2 mm.
Bypass
ALL
8
M
<Acceptable value>
feeding
<0-15>
e-STUDIO232/233/282/
LCF
ALL
8
M
283: 0-15
<0-15>
e-STUDIO202L/203L:
PFP
ALL
8
M
0-40
<0-15>
Duplex
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1
1

1
4

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 70
07/11

Code
448-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

448-1
448-2

449-0

Paper
feeding

449-1
449-2

450-0

Paper
feeding

450-1
450-2

452-0

Paper
feeding

452-1
452-2

455-0

Paper
feeding

455-1
455-2

457

Paper
feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
10
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
increases by approx.
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short size
ALL
8
M
<Paper length>
(PFP upper
<0-63>
Long size:
drawer/Plain
330 mm or longer
paper)
Middle size:
ALL
10
M
Paper aligning Long size
220 mm to 329 mm
amount
<0-63>
Short size:
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
219 mm or shorter
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
8
M
(PFP lower
<0-63>
drawer/Plain
paper)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
17
M
(Upper
<0-63>
drawer/Plain
paper)
ALL
12
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
10
M
(Lower
<0-63>
drawer/Plain
paper)
ALL
20
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
20
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
30
M
(Duplex feed<0-63>
ing/Plain
paper)
Paper aligning amount
ALL
8
M
adjustment at the registra<0-63>
tion section
(LCF/Plain paper)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 71
07/11

Code
458-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

458-1
458-2

460-0

Paper
feeding

460-1
460-2

461-0

Paper
feeding

461-1
461-2

462-0

Paper
feeding

462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0

Paper
feeding

463-1
463-2
464-0
464-1
464-2

Paper
feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
26
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
increases by approx.
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short size
ALL
25
M
<Paper length>
(Bypass feed<0-63>
Long size:
ing/Plain
330 mm or longer
paper)
Middle size:
Paper aligning Long size
ALL
26
M
220 mm to 329 mm
<0-63>
amount
Short size:
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
219 mm or shorter
the registrasize
<0-63>
* Postcard is suption section
Short size
ALL
26
M
ported only for JPN
(Bypass feed<0-63>
model.
ing/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing/Thick
Postcard
ALL
14
M
paper 3)
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing/OHP film)
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed<0-63>
ing /Envelope)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 72
07/11

Code
466-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

466-1
466-3
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
468-0

Finisher

468-1
468-2
469-0

Paper
feeding

469-1

469-2
469-3
469-4

469-5
470-0

Paper
feeding

470-1
470-2

471-0
471-1
471-2

Paper
feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
4
ALL
0
M
When the value
Adjustment of Plain
paper
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
paper pushdriving speed of bypass
ing amount/
Postcard
ALL
0
M
4
feed roller increases by
Bypass feed<0-255>
approx. 0.2 ms when the
ing
Envelope
ALL
0
M
4
paper transport is started
<0-255>
from the registration secThick
ALL
0
M
4
tion.
paper 1
<0-255>
* Postcard is supThick
ALL
0
M
4
ported only for JPN
paper 2
<0-255>
model.
Thick
ALL
0
M
4
paper 3
<0-255>
OHP film
ALL
0
M
4
<0-255>
A4-R/LT-R
ALL
0
M
When the value
4
Fine adjust<-14-14>
increases by 1, the
ment of binding position/
binding/folding position
B4
ALL
0
M
4
shifts toward the right
folding posi<-14-14>
tion
page by 0.25 mm.
A3/LD
ALL
0
M
4
<-14-14>
4
ALL
20
M
When the value
Paper aligning Thick
paper 1
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Long size
increases by approx.
the registraThick
ALL
20
M
4
0.8 mm.
tion section
paper 1
<0-63>
<Paper length>
(Upper
Middle
Long size:
drawer)
size
330 mm or longer
ALL
20
M
4
Thick
Middle size:
<0-63>
paper 1
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size
Short size:
Thick
ALL
20
M
4
219 mm or shorter
paper 2
<0-63>
Long size
Thick
ALL
22
M
4
paper 2
<0-63>
Middle
size
Thick
ALL
19
M
4
paper 2
<0-63>
Short size
ALL
20
M
4
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
4
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
19
M
4
(Lower
<0-63>
drawer/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
20
M
4
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
4
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short size
ALL
19
M
4
(PFP upper
<0-63>
drawer/Thick
paper 1)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 73
07/11

Code
472-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

472-1
472-2

473

Paper
feeding

474-0

Paper
feeding

474-1
474-2

497-0

Laser

497-1

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
20
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
increases by approx.
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short size
ALL
19
M
<Paper length>
(PFP lower
<0-63>
Long size:
drawer/Thick
330 mm or longer
paper 1)
Middle size:
ALL
8
M
Paper aligning amount
220 mm to 329 mm
adjustment at the registra<0-63>
Short size:
tion section
219 mm or shorter
(LCF/Thick paper 1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Duplex feeding/Thick
paper 1)
Adjustment of
drawer sideways deviation

497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0

Laser

498-1

501

Image

503
504
505
506
507

Image

Adjustment of
primary scanning laser
writing start
position at
duplex feeding
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Center value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Light step
value

Long size

ALL

Middle
size
Short size

ALL

Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
PFP upper
drawer
PFP lower
drawer
LCF

ALL

Bypass
feeding
Long size

ALL

ALL

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

ALL

Short size
(A4/LT or
smaller)

ALL

Photo

PPC

Text/Photo

PPC

Text

PPC

Text/Photo

PPC

Photo

PPC

Text

PPC

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
4
4
4

24
<0-63>
24
<0-63>
33
<0-63>

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
148
<0-255>

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SYS

When the value


increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423 mm.

4
4

M
M

SYS

When the value


increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423 mm.

When the value


increases, the image at
the center step becomes
darker.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

1
1

When the value


increases, the image of
the light steps becomes
lighter.

1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 74
007/11

Code

Classification

508

Image

509

510

512

Image

514
515
532

Image

533
534
570

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Text/Photo PPC
EUR:20
SYS When the value
Density
UC:20
increases, the image of
adjustment
JPN:30
the dark steps
Fine adjust<0-255>
becomes darker.
ment of manual density/
Photo
PPC
EUR:24
SYS
Dark step
UC:24
value
JPN:24
<0-255>
Text
PPC
EUR:20
SYS
UC:20
JPN:27
<0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS becomes darker.
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density Text
PPC
128
SYS
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
40
SYS When the value
tion/Back<0-255>
increases, the background peak
Photo
PPC
16
SYS ground becomes more
adjustment
brightened.
<0-255>
Text

Image

Range correc- Text/Photo


tion on original manually
set on the
original glass

PPC
PPC

571

Photo

PPC

572

Text

PPC

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

64
<0-255>
EUR:12
UC:12
JPN:22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>

SYS
SYS

SYS

SYS

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

Sets whether the values


of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. Ones place is an
adjustment for automatic density and tens
place is for manual density. Once they are
fixed, the range correction is performed with
standard values. The
values of the background
peak and text peak affect
the reproduction of the
background density and
text density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 75
07/11

Code

Classification

593

Image

594

Image

595

Image

596-0

Image

596-1

Image

596-2

Image

597-0

Image

597-1

Image

597-2

Image

598-0

Image

598-1

Image

598-2

Image

599-0

Image

599-1

Image

599-2

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Gamma data
Text/Photo PPC
0
SYS Ones place:
slope adjust<0-99>
0: Equivalent to the set
ment
Photo
PPC
0
SYS value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
<0-99>
Text
PPC
0
SYS Gamma curve (The
larger the value is, the
<0-99>
larger the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
low density (The smaller
the value is, the darker
the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value
Gamma balLow
PRT
128
SYS When the value
ance adjustdensity
<0-255>
increases, the density in
ment
Medium
PRT
128
SYS the target area becomes
(PS/Photo)
higher.
density
<0-255>

Gamma balance adjustment


(PS/Text)

Gamma balance adjustment


(PCL/Photo)

Adjustment of
gamma balance
(PCL/Detail)

High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density

PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

When the value


increases, the density in
the target area becomes
higher.

SYS
SYS

1
1

4
4

4
4
4

When the value


increases, the density in
the target area becomes
higher.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

Procedure

4
4
4

When the value


increases, the density in
the target area becomes
higher.

4
4
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 76
07/11

Code

Classification

620

Image

621

622

648

Image

654

Image

655

667-0
667-1
667-2
667-3
667-4

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Sharpness
Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 1
SYS When the value
adjustment
UC: 1
increases, the image
JPN: 0
becomes sharper. When
<0-99>
the value decreases, the
image becomes softer.
The smaller the value is,
the less the moire
Photo
PPC
2
SYS becomes.
1
Ones place: Fixed value
<0-99>
(05-620 is 1, 05-621 is
2, 05-622 is 5)
Tens place: Adjustable
from 0 to 9 regarding the
Text
PPC
EUR: 45 SYS default value as the stan1
dard (The larger the
UC: 45
value is, the sharper the
JPN: 45
image becomes.)
<0-99>
* When entering 0 on
the ten's place, this
value is not displayed
on the entry screen.
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC
2
SYS Adjusts the level of the
1
smudged/faint
<0-4>
smudged/faint text.
text
With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
1
PRT
5
M
Adjustment of the
Adjustment of PS
<0-9>
smudged/faint text.
smudged/faint
With decreasing the
text
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
PCL
PRT
5
M
1
increasing it, the
<0-9>
smudged text is suppressed.
4
Density adjustment of cop- PPC
0
M
Adjusts the density level
ied image
<0-10>
of copied image.
When the value
PPC
4
M
4
decreases, the text
<0-10>
becomes lighter.
PPC
5
M
4
<0-10>
PPC
6
M
4
<0-10>
PPC
10
M
4
<0-10>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 77
07/11

Code

Classification

672-0

Image

672-1
672-2

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of Normal
PRT
0
M
Adjustment of the image
printer image
<0-10>
density.
density
With decreasing the
PRT
4
M
value, the text becomes
<0-10>
lighter.
PRT
5
M

672-3

PRT

672-4

PRT

676-0

Toner saving

PRT

676-1

PRT

676-2

PRT

676-3

PRT

676-4

PRT

693

Image

Range correc- Text/Photo


tion on original set on the
RADF

PPC

<0-10>
6
<0-10>
10
<0-10>
0
<0-10>
2
<0-10>
3
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
EUR:12
UC:12
JPN:22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>

SYS

SYS

695

Text

PPC

22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>

SYS

Center
value

FAX

120
<0-255>

SYS

701

Light step
value

FAX

20
<0-255>

SYS

702

Dark step
value

FAX

20
<0-255>

SYS

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

PPC

Adjustment of
binarized
threshold
(Text)

Photo

Image

694

700

Procedure

Sets whether the values


of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. Ones place is an
adjustment for automatic density and tens
place is for manual density. Once they are
fixed, the range correction is performed with
standard values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background
density and text density
respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step becomes
lighter.
When the value
increases, the image of
light side becomes
lighter.
When the value
increases, the image of
dark side becomes
darker.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 78
07/11

Code

Classification

710

Image

714
715

Image

719

720

Image

724

725

Image

729
820

Image

821
822
825

826

827

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Density
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-255>
increases, the image at
Fine adjustthe center step becomes
ment of man- Text/Photo FAX
128
SYS darker.
ual density/
<0-255>
Center value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
the light steps becomes
Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX
20
SYS lighter.
ual density/
<0-255>
Light step
value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image of
adjustment
the dark steps
Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX
20
SYS becomes darker.
ual density/
<0-255>
Dark step
value
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo FAX
128
SYS becomes darker.
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density
224
SYS When the value
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
<0-255>
decreases, the text
tion/Text peak
adjustment
Text
SCN
224
SYS becomes darker.
<0-255>
Photo
SCN
239
SYS
<0-255>
SYS Sets whether the values
12
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
of the background peak
<11-14,
tion on origiand text peak are fixed
21-24,
nal manually
or not. Ones place is an
31-34,
set on the
adjustment for auto41-44>
original glass
SYS matic density and tens
Text
SCN
12
place is for manual den<11-14,
sity. Once they are
21-24,
fixed, the range correc31-34,
tion is performed with
41-44>
Photo
SCN
12
SYS standard values. The
values of the background
<11-14,
peak and text peak affect
21-24,
the reproduction of the
31-34,
background density and
41-44>
text density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1
1
1
1

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 79
07/11

Code

Classification

830

Image

831

832

835

Image

836

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
SYS Sets whether the value
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
12
of the background peak
tion on origi<11-14,
and text peak are fixed
nal set on the
21-24,
or not. Ones place is an
RADF
31-34,
adjustment for auto41-44>
Text
SCN
12
SYS matic density and tens
1
place is for manual den<11-14,
sity. Once they are
21-24,
fixed, the range correc31-34,
tion is performed with
41-44>
SYS standard values.
1
Photo
SCN
12
The values of the back<11-14,
ground peak and text
21-24,
peak affect the reproduc31-34,
tion of the background
41-44>
density and text density
respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
48
SYS When the value
1
tion/Back<0-255>
increases, the background peak
Text
SCN
48
SYS ground becomes more
1
adjustment
brightened.
<0-255>

837
845

Image

846
847
850

Image

851
852
855

Image

856
857
860
861
862

Image

Photo

SCN

Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Center value

Text/Photo

SCN

Text

SCN

Photo

SCN

Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of automatic density

Text/Photo

SCN

Text

SCN

Photo

SCN

Text/Photo

SCN

Text

SCN

Photo

SCN

Text/Photo

SCN

Text

SCN

Photo

SCN

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

40
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SYS

20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SYS

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

SYS
SYS

1
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step becomes
darker.

SYS
SYS
SYS

When the value


increases, the image of
the light steps becomes
lighter.

SYS

1
1
1

When the value


increases, the image of
the dark steps
becomes darker.

SYS

SYS

1
1

SYS

SYS

1
1
1

When the value


increases, the image
becomes darker.

1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 80
07/11

Code

Classification

865-0

Image

865-1
865-2

866-0

Image

866-1
866-2

867-0

Image

867-1
867-2

913

914

915

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Sharpness
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS When the value
adjustment
tion ratio
<0-99>
increases, the image
(Text/Photo)
40% or
becomes sharper. When
smaller
the value decreases, the
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS image becomes softer.
The smaller the value is,
tion ratio
<0-99>
the less the moire
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS becomes.
tion ratio
<0-99>
One's place: Fixed value
81% or
(05-865 is 1, 05-866 is
larger
2, 05-867 is 5)
Reproduc- SCN
2
SYS Ten's place: Sharpness
Sharpness
tion ratio
<0-99>
adjustment
intensity (0: Use default
40% or
(Text)
value, 1-9: Filter intensmaller
sity)
2
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
2
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
Sharpness
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
adjustment
tion ratio
<0-99>
(Photo)
40% or
smaller
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
SYS Set whether the values
PPC
EUR:12
Range correc- Custom
of the background peak
Mode 1
UC:12
tion on origiand text peak are fixed
JPN:22
nal manually
or not. One's place is an
<11-14,
set on the
adjustment for auto21-24,
original glass
matic density and ten's
31-34,
place is for manual den41-44>
SYS sity. Once they are
Custom
PPC
22
fixed, the range correcMode 2
<11-14,
tion is performed with
21-24,
standard values. The
31-34,
values of the background
41-44>
peak and text peak affect
Custom
PPC
12
SYS the reproduction of the
background density and
Mode 3
<11-14,
text density respectively.
21-24,
1: fixed/fixed
31-34,
2: varied/fixed
41-44>
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
4

4
4

4
4

4
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 81
07/11

Code

Classification

916

Image

917

918

919

Image

920
921
922

Image

923

924

928

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
SYS Set whether the values
Range correc- Custom
PPC
EUR:12
of the background peak
tion on origiMode 1
UC:12
and text peak are fixed
nal set on the
JPN:22
or not. One's place is an
RADF
<11-14,
adjustment for auto21-24,
matic density and ten's
31-34,
place is for manual den41-44>
SYS sity. Once they are
1
Custom
PPC
22
fixed, the range correcMode 2
<11-14,
tion is performed with
21-24,
standard values. The
31-34,
values of the background
41-44>
peak and text peak affect
the reproduction of the
SYS background density and
1
Custom
PPC
12
text density respectively.
Mode 3
<11-14,
1: fixed/fixed
21-24,
2: varied/fixed
31-34,
3: fixed/varied
41-44>
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
PPC
40
SYS When the value
1
Range correc- Custom
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the backtion
Background
Custom
PPC
64
SYS ground becomes more
1
brightened.
peak adjustMode 2
<0-255>
ment
Custom
PPC
16
SYS
1
Mode 3
<0-255>
1
Sharpness
Custom
PPC
1
SYS When the value
adjustment
Mode 1
<0-99>
increases, the image
becomes sharper. When
the value decreases, the
image becomes softer.
The smaller the value is,
the less the moire
Custom
PPC
EUR:45
SYS becomes.
1
One's place: Fixed value
Mode 2
UC:45
(05-922 is 1, 05-923 is
JPN:45
5, 05-924 is 2)
<0-99>
Tens place: Adjustable
from 0 to 9 regarding the
Custom
PPC
2
SYS default value as the stan1
dard (The larger the
Mode 3
<0-99>
value is, the sharper the
image becomes.)
* When entering 0 on
the ten's place, this
value is not displayed
on the entry screen.
1
Adjustment of Custom
PPC
2
SYS Adjustment of the
smudged/faint Mode 1
<0-4>
smudged/faint text.
text
With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 82
07/11

Code

Classification

931

Image

932
933

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Density
Custom
PPC
128
SYS When the value
adjustment
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the image of
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS the center step becomes
ment of man- Mode 2
darker.
<0-255>
ual density/
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Center value
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3

PPC

Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3

PPC

Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Custom
Mode 1

PPC

944

Custom
Mode 2

PPC

0
<0-99>

SYS

945

Custom
Mode 3

PPC

0
<0-99>

SYS

ALL

SYS

934

Image

935
936
937

Image

938
939
940

Image

941
942
943

976

Image

Maintenance

Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of automatic density
Gamma data
slope adjustment

Equipment number (serial


number) entry

PPC
PPC

PPC
PPC

PPC
PPC
PPC

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SYS

20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SYS

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
0
<0-99>

SYS

SYS

When the value


increases, the image of
the light step density
becomes lighter.

SYS

SYS

When the value


increases, the image of
the dark step density
becomes darker.

1
1
1
1

1
1
1

When the value


increases, the image
becomes darker.

SYS
SYS

SYS

SYS

Procedure

1
1
1

Ones place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
Gamma curve (The
larger the value is, the
larger the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope of
low density (The smaller
the value is, the darker
the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value
When this adjustment is
performed with this code,
the setting code (08-995)
is also performed automatically (10 digits).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 83
07/11

2.2.7

Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)

The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).

Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed

[START]

[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub-code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Press [HELP] to enter -.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 84
05/12

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Setting)

[ENTER]
or
(HDD formatting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[Select icon]

Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(1st setting)

[START]

[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[Digital key]
(2nd setting)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

*1. Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter -, when entering telephone number.


*2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub-code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Adjustment value
cannot be changed

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 85

Notes:
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
e-STUDIO200L/230/280: In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code
is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board, SYS and
UTY stands for the SYS board and NIC stands for the NIC
board.

Code

Classification

200

General

201

General

202

User
interface

203

General

204

User
interface

205

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Date and time setting
ALL
Year/month/date/day/
<13 dighour/minute/second
its>
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
Day - 0 is for
Sunday. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday
from 1 to 6.
Destination selection
ALL
EUR: 0
M
0: EUR
UC: 1
1: UC
JPN: 2
2: JPN
<0-2>
Counter installed externally ALL
0
M
0: No external counter
<0-3>
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
(This value is valid
only when 2 is set
to 08-201.)
3: Key copy counter
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
M
0: For factory ship<0-1>
ment
1: For line
* Field: 0 must be
selected
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
SYS Timer to return the
<0-10>
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:Set number x 15
sec.
SYS Timer to automatically
Auto power save mode
ALL
EUR: 11
switch to the Auto
timer setting
UC: 11
power save mode when
JPN: 6
the equipment has not
Others:
been used
11
0: Invalid
6: 3min.
<0, 6-15>
7: 4min.
8: 5min.
9: 7min.
10: 10min.
11: 15min.
12: 20min.
13: 30min.
14: 45min.
15: 60min.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
5

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 86
07/05

Code
206

Classification
User
interface

207

User
interface

209

User
interface
Paper
feeding

210

219

User
interface

220

User
interface

221

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Auto Shut Off Mode timer
ALL
Refer to
SYS Timer to turn OFF the
setting (Auto Shut Off
content
power or to enter the
Mode/Sleep Mode)
<0-20>
Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been
used
(Refer to 08-601)
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.
11: 80min.
12: 90min.
13: 100min.
14: 110min.
15: 120min.
16: 150min.
17: 180min.
18: 210min.
19: 240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
The models except
e-STUDIO200L:
EUR: 7 UC: 9
JPN: 0
Others: 9
e-STUDIO200L:
EUR: 7 UC: 6
JPN: 0
Others: 6
Highlighting display on
ALL
0
SYS 0: Black letter on white
LCD
<0-1>
background
1: White letter on black
background
Default setting of filing forALL
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
mat when E-mailing
<0-1>
1: PDF
Paper size (A6-R) feeding/
PRT
148/105
M
widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Default setting of filing forSCN
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
mat when storing files
<0-3>
1: PDF
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Language 1
power-ON
UC: 0
1: Language 2
JPN: 5
2: Language 3
<0-6>
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Language selection in UI
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Language 1
data at Web power ON
UC: 0
1: Language 2
JPN: 5
2: Language 3
<0-6>
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
10

1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 87
05/11

Code
224
225

Classification
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding

226

Paper
feeding

227

Paper
feeding

228

Paper
feeding

229

Paper
feeding

230

Paper
feeding

231

Paper
feeding

232

Paper
feeding

233

Paper
feeding

234

Paper
feeding

235

Paper
feeding

236

Paper
feeding

237

Paper
feeding

238

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Paper size for bypass feed PPC
UNDEF
SYS Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
Paper size for upper
ALL
EUR: A4
M
Press the button on the
drawer
UC: LT
LCD to select the size.
JPN: A4
Paper size for lower
ALL
EUR: A3
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
drawer
UC: LD
JPN: A3
M
Press the button on the
Paper size for PFP upper
ALL EUR:
LCD to select the size.
drawer
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
Paper size for PFP lower
ALL
EUR: A4
M
Press the button on the
drawer
UC: LG
LCD to select the size.
JPN: B4
Paper size (A3) feeding/
ALL
420/297
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (A4-R) feeding/
ALL
297/210
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (A5-R) feeding/
ALL
210/148
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (B4) feeding/
ALL
364/257
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (B5-R) feeding/
ALL
257/182
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (LT-R) feeding/
ALL
279/216
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (LD) feeding/
ALL
432/279
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (LG) feeding/
ALL
356/216
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (ST-R) feeding/
ALL
216/140
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (COMPUTER)
ALL
356/257
M
feeding/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
9
9
9
9

9
10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 88

Code

Classification

239

Paper
feeding

240

Paper
feeding

241

Paper
feeding

242

Paper
feeding

243

Paper
feeding

244

Paper
feeding

245

Paper
feeding

247

Paper
feeding

248

Paper
feeding

249

Paper
feeding

250

Maintenance

251

Maintenance

252

Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Paper size (FOLIO) feedALL
330/210
M
10
ing/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (13 LG) feedALL
330/216
M
10
ing/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (8.5X8.5)
ALL
216/216
M
10
feeding/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (Non-standard)
ALL
432/279
SYS
10
feeding/widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Memory 1
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
10
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 1].
Paper size (8K) feeding/
ALL
390/270
M
10
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (16K-R) feedALL
270/195
M
10
ing/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Memory 2
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
10
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 2].
Memory 3
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
10
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 3].
Memory 4
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
10
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 4].
11
SYS A telephone number
Service technician teleALL
0
can be entered up to 32
phone number
<32 digdigits. Use the [Monitor/
its>
Pause] button to enter a
hyphen (-).
1
Setting value of PM
ALL
Refer to
M
<Default>
counter
content
e-STUDIO200L
<8 digits>
UC, EUR: 64,000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO 230
UC, EUR: 74,000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO 280
UC, EUR: 90,000
JPN: 0
Current value of PM
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
1
counter Display/0 clearing
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 89

Code
253
254

Classification
Maintenance
Paper
feeding

255

Paper
feeding

256

Paper
feeding

257

Counter

258

Maintenance

259

Network

260

Network

263

User
interface

264

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Error history display
ALL
SYS Displaying of the latest
2
20 errors data
1
LT <-> A4/LD <-> A3
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether the data is
<0-1>
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
1
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
M
0: Automatic
<0-4>
1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
M
Press the button on the
9
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
EUR: A4
LCD to select the size.
UC: LT
JPN: A4
Counter copy
ALL
1) Electrical counter
<1-2>
Backup counter
2) Backup counter
Electrical counter
(P. 2-151 "Fig. 2-4")
1
FSMS acceptance
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether the FSMS
<0-2>
connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (USB normal connection)
2: Accepted (USB
forcible connection)
Storage period trial and pri- PRT
14
SYS 0: No limits
1
vate
<0-30>
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
1
Web data retention period
SCN
10
SYS When a certain period
<3 digits>
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
Administrator's password
ALL
123456
The password can be
11
(Maximum 10 digits)
<10
entered in alphabets
digits>
and figures (A-Z, a-z, 09) within 10 digits.
File retention period
SCN
30
SYS 0: No limits
1
<0-999>
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 90

Code

Classification

265

Network

266

Network

267

Electronic Filing

270

Electronic Filing

271

General

272

Scanning

273

Scanning

274

FAX

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Maximum data capacity at
SCN
30
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
E-mailing
<2-30>
Maximum data capacity at
ALL
30
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
Internet FAX
<2-30>
ALL
0
SYS Sets the file retention
Full guarantee of docu<0-1>
level when editing the
ments in Electronic Filing
files in the Electronic
when HDD is full
Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained Retains the source
file until CutDoc/
SaveDoc command
is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the execution of command
when 1 is set.
Default value for user box
ALL
0
SYS Sets the data retention
retention period
<0-999>
period when creating a
user box.
0: Not deleted
1 to 999: Retention
period (Unit: Day)
Warning display of the
ALL
90
SYS Sets the percentage of
HDD capacity to be filled
<0-100>
the HDD capacity filled
which warning is displayed
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
Notification setting of EALL
3
SYS Sets the days left the
mail saving time limit
<0-99>
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
Default setting of partial
ALL
0
SYS Sets the default value
size when transmitting E<0-6>
for the partial size of Email
mail to be transmitted
when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 64
2: 128
3: 256
4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
Default setting of page by
FAX
0
SYS Sets the default value
page when transmitting
<0-4>
for the page by page of
Internet FAX
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creating a template.
0: Not divide 1: 128
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 91

Code

Classification

276

User
interface

281

User
interface

283

User
interface

284

User
interface
User
interface

285

286

User
interface

288

General

290

Network

291

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Default setting for density
SCN
0
SYS 0: Automatic density
adjustment
<0-11>
1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual density)
Default setting of resolution SCN
1
SYS 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi
<0-4>
2: 300 dpi 3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
Default setting of original
SCN
0
SYS 0: Text
mode
<0-2>
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
Default setting of scanning SCN
0
SYS 0: Single 1: Book
mode
<0-2>
2: Tablet
Default setting of rotation
SCN
0
SYS 0: 0 degree
angle of original
<0-3>
1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
Default setting of original
SCN
0
SYS 0: Automatic
paper size
<0-22>
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
8: LG
9: B4
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13LG
16: 8.5 x 8.5
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed
20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
Searching interval of deletALL
12
SYS Sets the search intering expired flies
<1-24>
val of expired files.
Deletes if expired file is
found.
(Unit: Hour)
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid
Raw printing job
PRT
EUR: 6
SYS 0: LD
1: LG
(Paper size)
UC: 2
2: LT
3: COMP
JPN: 6
4: ST
5: A3
<0 -13>
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13LG
13: 8.5 x 8.5

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 92

Code

Classification

292

Network

293

Network

294

Network

295

Network

296

Network

297

Network

298

Network

299

Network

300

User
interface
User
interface

302

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Plain paper
(Paper type)
<0-4>
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Portrait
(Paper direction)
<0-1>
1: Landscape
Raw printing job (Staple)
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Inner tray
(receiving tray)
<0-5>
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Not used
4: Job Separator
upper tray
5: Job Separator lower
tray
* The settings 4 and 5
are effective only
when the Job Separator (MJ-5004) is
installed.
SYS Sets the number of
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
form lines from 5 to
(Number of form lines)
<500128. (A hundredfold of
12800>
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
1000
SYS Sets the font pitch from
(PCL font pitch)
<440.44 to 99.99. (A hun9999>
dredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
SYS Sets the font size from
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
4 to 999.75. (A hun(PCL font size)
<400dredfold of the font size
99975>
is defined as the setting
value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL font num(PCL font number)
<0-79>
ber.
Maximum number of copy
PPC
0
SYS 0: 999
1: 99
volume (MAX9)
<0-2>
2: 9
Original counter display
ALL
EUR: 2
SYS Sets whether the origiUC: 0
nal counter is disJPN: 0
played or not.
<0,2>
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1
1
1

1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 93

Code
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
PPC
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the copier
in copier func- A5
function for each paper
tion
size according to the
A6
setting for the count
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the printer
in printer func- A5
function for each paper
tion
size according to the
A6
setting for the count
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 94

Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages at the list print
at list print
mode for each paper
A5
mode
size according to the
A6
setting for the count
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX funcin FAX function for each paper size
A5
tion
according to the setting
A6
for the count setting of
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD

Procedure
4

LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 95

Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
A3
PPC
0
SYS Counts the scanning
Number of
<8 digits>
pages in the copier
scanning
A4
function for each paper
pages in
A5
size according to the
copier funcA6
setting for the count
tion
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
SCN
0
SYS Counts the scanning
Number of
<8 digits>
pages in the scanning
scanning
A4
function for each paper
pages in
A5
size according to the
scanning
A6
setting for the count
function
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 96

Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the scanning
scanning
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX funcA4
pages in FAX A5
tion for each paper size
function
according to the setting
A6
for the count setting of
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD

Number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
function

LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

FAX

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

0
<8 digits>

SYS

Counts the transmitted


pages in the FAX function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
paper (08-353).

Procedure
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 97

Code

Classification

316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0

Counter

Counter

320-1

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the received
received
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX funcA4
pages in FAX A5
tion for each paper size
function
according to the setting
A6
for the count setting of
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Large

PPC

0
<8 digits>

SYS

Counter

Small

PPC

0
<8 digits>

SYS

320-2

Counter

Total

PPC

0
<8 digits>

SYS

321-0

Counter

Large
Display of
number of
output pages
in printer function

PRT

0
<8 digits>

SYS

321-1

Counter

Small

PRT

0
<8 digits>

SYS

321-2

Counter

Total

PRT

0
<8 digits>

SYS

Display of
number of
output pages
in copier function

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Counts the number of


output pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
output pages in the
Printer Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.

Procedure
4

14

14

14

14

14

14

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 98

Code

Classification

322-0

Counter

322-1

Counter

322-2

Counter

323-0

Counter

323-1

Counter

323-2

Counter

327-0

Counter

327-1

Counter

327-2

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
14
Large
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
output pages at the List
number of
Print Mode Function
output pages
according to its size
at list print
(large/small).
mode
Large:
Number of output
Small
PRT
0
SYS
14
pages of large-sized
<8 digits>
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
Total
PRT
0
SYS
14
set as large-sized
<8 digits>
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Large
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
output pages in the FAX
number of
Function according to
output pages
its size (large/small).
in FAX funcLarge:
tion
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
PRT
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
PRT
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Display of
Large
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
number of
<8 digits>
scanning pages in the
scanning
Copier Function
pages in
according to its size
copier func(large/small).
tion
Large:
Number of output
Small
PPC
0
SYS
14
pages of large-sized
<8 digits>
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
Total
PPC
0
SYS
14
set as large-sized
<8 digits>
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 99

Code

Classification

328-0

Counter

328-1

Counter

328-2

Counter

329-0

Counter

329-1

Counter

329-2

Counter

330-0

Counter

330-1

Counter

330-2

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
14
Large
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
scanning pages in the
number of
FAX Function according
scanning
to its size (large/small).
pages in FAX
Large:
function
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Large
SCN
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
scanning pages in the
number of
Scanning Function
scanning
according to its size
pages in
(large/small).
scanning
Large:
function
Number of output
Small
SCN
0
SYS
14
pages of large-sized
<8 digits>
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
Total
SCN
0
SYS
14
set as large-sized
<8 digits>
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Display of
Large
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
number of
<8 digits>
transmitted pages in the
transmitted
FAX Function according
pages in FAX
to its size (large/small).
function
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 100
05/05

Code
331

Classification
User
interface

332-0

Counter

332-1

Counter

332-2

Counter

335-0

Counter

335-1

Counter

335-2

Counter

337

Paper
feeding

338

Paper
feeding

339

Paper
feeding

340

Paper
feeding

341

Paper
feeding

345

Counter

346

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS Sets the screen to be
<0-3>
displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recovered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
14
Large
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
received pages in the
number of
FAX Function according
received
to its size (large/small).
pages in FAX
Large:
function
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Display of
Large
ALL
0
SYS Displays the total num14
total number
<8 digits>
ber of pages in the
of pages
Small
ALL
0
SYS copier/printer/scanning/
14
FAX functions.
<8 digits>
Total
ALL
0
SYS
14
<8 digits>
Paper size (#10-R)
ALL
241/105
M
10
feeding/widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Paper size (DL-R)
ALL
220/110
M
10
feeding/widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Paper size (Envelope:
ALL
191/98
M
10
Monarch-R)
<148feeding/widthwise direction
432/98297>
Paper size (Envelope:
ALL
235/120
M
10
CHO-3-R)
<148feeding/widthwise direction
432/105297>
Paper size (Envelope:
ALL
235/105
M
10
YOU-4-R)
<148feeding/widthwise direction
432/105297>
Count setting of envelope
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Count setting of largeALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
sized paper (PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 101
05/05

Code

Classification

347

Counter

348

Counter

349

Counter

352

Counter

353

Counter

356

Counter

357

Counter

358

Counter

359

Counter

360

Counter

370

Counter

372

Counter

374

Counter

381

Counter

390

Counter

391

Counter

392

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Definition setting of largeALL
1
M
0: A3/LD
1
sized paper (PM)
<0-1>
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
Count setting of thick paper
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Count setting of OHP film
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
M
0: Counted as 1
1
Count setting of largeALL
JPN: 0
sized paper
OTHER:
1: Counted as 2
(Fee charging system
1
2: Counted as 1
counter)
<0-2>
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
1
Definition setting of largeALL
0
M
0: A3/LD
<0-1>
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
sized paper
(Fee charging system
FOLIO/COMP/8K
counter)
2
Counter for upper drawer
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from upper
drawer
Counter for lower drawer
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from lower
drawer
2
Counter for bypass feeding ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
<8 digits>
sheets fed from bypass
feed
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
<8 digits>
sheets fed from LCF
2
Counter for PFP upper
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
drawer feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
Counter for PFP lower
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
drawer feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
<8 digits>
output pages of duplex
printing.
Counter for RADF
ALL
0
SYS Counts the number of
2
<8 digits>
originals fed from RADF
1
Setting for counter installed
ALL
1
M
Selects the job to count
externally
<0-7>
up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
Number of errors in HDD
PPC
0
SYS The number of error is
2
(Copier)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
2
Number of errors in HDD
FAX
0
SYS The number of error is
(FAX)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
Number of errors in HDD
SCN
0
SYS The number of error is
2
(Scanning)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 102
04/09

Code

Classification

393

Counter

398

Laser

399

Laser

400

Fuser

404-0

Fuser

404-1
404-2
404-3
405-0

Fuser

405-1
405-2
405-3
407

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of errors in HDD
PRT
0
SYS The number of error is
(Printer)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
Number of polygonal motor
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
rotational speed switching
<8 digits>
time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rotation and standby rotation.
0
M
Accumulates the time
Accumulated time of polyg- ALL
<8 digits>
the polygonal motor has
onal motor at normal rotarotated at normal rotation
tion.
Fuser unit error status
ALL
0
M
0: No error
counter
<0-19>
1: C410 (Once)
2: C410 (consecutively
occurred)
3: 4: C430
5: C440 6: C450
7: C440 8: C450
9: C440 10: C470
11: C470 12: C480
13: C490 14: C470
15: C480 16: C490
17: C470 18: C480
19: C490
The first
ALL
1
M
This code is valid only
Temperature
drop setting in drop
<0-10>
when 20 is set to 08ready status
886.
The secALL
1
M
(Center therSetting value x -5C:
ond drop
<0-10>
mistor)
from 0C to -50C
The third
ALL
1
M
drop
<0-10>
The fourth
ALL
1
M
drop
<0-10>
The first
ALL
4
M
Temperature
<0-10>
drop setting in drop
ready status
The secALL
4
M
(Side therond drop
<0-10>
mistor)
The third
ALL
4
M
drop
<0-10>
The fourth
ALL
4
M
drop
<0-10>
Fuser roller temperature in
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
ready status
<0-12>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor)
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
2
2

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 103
07/04

Code

Classification

409

Fuser

410

Fuser

411

Fuser

412

Fuser

413

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature at
ALL
0
M
0: OFF
1: 40C
energy saver mode
<0-13>
2: 50C 3: 60C
(Center thermistor)
4: 70C 5: 80C
6: 90C 7: 100C
8: 110C 9: 120C
10: 130C
11: 140C
12: 150C
13: 160C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Plain
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
Fuser roller temperature on
<0-12>
2: 150C 3: 155C
standby
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Center thermistor)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 3)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 1)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 104
04/09

Code
414

Classification
Developer

417

Fuser

424-0

Fuser

424-1
424-2

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Toner density life correcALL
0
M
0: Unchanged (Default)
tion switching
<0-7>
1: Approx. 0.3 wt%
higher
2: Approx. 0.6 wt%
higher
3: Approx. 0.9 wt%
higher
4: Approx. 0.2 wt%
lower
5: Approx. 0.4 wt%
lower
6: Approx. 0.6 wt%
lower
7: Approx. 0.9 wt%
lower
ALL
10
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
Pre-running time for first
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
printing
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
(Thick paper 3)
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
The first
ALL
15
M
This code is valid only
Temperature
<2-60>
when 20 is set to 08drop switching drop
886.
time setting in The secALL
15
M
Setting value x 1 min.:
ready status
ond drop
<2-60>
from 2 to 60 min. later
(Center therThe third
ALL
15
M
mistor)
drop
<2-60>

424-3
425-0

Fuser

425-1
425-2

Temperature
drop switching
time setting in
ready status
(Side thermistor)

425-3
433-0

433-1

Fuser

Temperature
control lower
limit
(Plain paper/
at ordinary
temperature)

The fourth
drop
The first
drop
The second drop
The third
drop
The fourth
drop
Center
thermistor

ALL

Side thermistor

ALL

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

4
4
4

15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
7
<0-12>

5
<0-12>

0: 130C 1: 135C
2: 140C 3: 145C
4: 150C 5: 155C
6: 160C 7: 165C
8: 170C 9: 175C
10: 180C
11: 185C
12: 120C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 105
04/09

Code

Classification

437

Fuser

438

Fuser

439

Fuser

440

Fuser

441

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor /Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 2)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/OHP
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
film)
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
10
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
Pre-running time for first
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
printing
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
(Thick paper 2)
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Plain paper)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Thick paper 1)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 106
05/05

Code

Classification

448

Fuser

450

Fuser

451

Fuser

452

Fuser

453

Fuser

455

Image
processing

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature in
ALL
0
M
0: OFF
1: 40C
Energy Saving Mode
<0-13>
2: 50C 3: 60C
(Side thermistor)
4: 70C 5: 80C
6: 90C 7: 100C
8: 110C 9: 120C
10: 130C
11: 140C
12: 150C
13: 160C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Plain
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
Fuser roller temperature
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
during printing
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Side thermistor/Thick
6: 170C 7: 175C
paper 1)
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 2)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/OHP film)
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Toner supply amount corALL
0
M
Corrects the supply
rection/Toner motor control
<0-5>
amount of the fresh
toner (driving period of
the toner motor) into the
developer unit.
0: x1.0
1: x0.75
2: x0.5
3: x0.3
4: x2.0
5: x1.5

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 107

Code

Classification

462

RADF

463-0

Paper
feeding

463-1
464-0

Paper
feeding

464-1
465-0

Paper
feeding

465-1
466-0

Paper
feeding

466-1
467-0

Paper
feeding

467-1
468-0

Paper
feeding

468-1
471

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Setting for switchback
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
operation to copy mixed<0-1>
detecting the original
sized original on RADF
length by transporting
without scanning in
reverse when finding
A4-R/FOLIO paper.
0: Invalid- Judges as
A4-R without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Valid- Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO size by
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
* The original is transported in reverse
with no scanning
when detecting LTLG size-paper in LT,
regardless of this
setting.
ALL
5
M
Sets the number of
4
Feeding retry Plain
paper
<0-5>
times of the feeding
number setretry from the upper
ting
Others
ALL
5
M
4
drawer.
(upper
<0-5>
drawer)
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
Sets the number of
4
number setpaper
<0-5>
times of the feeding
ting (lower
retry from the lower
Others
ALL
5
M
4
drawer)
drawer.
<0-5>
Feeding retry
number setting
(PFP upper
drawer)
Feeding retry
number setting
(PFP lower
drawer)
Feeding retry
number setting
(bypass feed)
Feeding retry
number setting
(LCF)

Plain
paper
Others
Plain
paper
Others
Plain
paper
Others
Plain
paper
Others

Paper size (Postcard)


feeding/widthwise direction

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
148/100
<148432/100297>

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.

10

M
M
M
M
M
M

Postcard is supported only for JPN


model.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 108

Code

Classification

477

General

478

Laser

479

Laser

480

Paper
feeding

481

Paper
feeding

482

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
2
Machine identification
ALL
Refer to
M
<Default value>
information
content
Lower drawer refer<0-1>
ence: 0
Upper drawer reference: 1
Judged number of polygoALL
0
M
Displays the error
1
nal motor rotation error
<0-1>
[CA10] when the set
(Normal rotation)
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times 1: 12 times
1
Judged number of polygoALL
0
M
0: Waiting time for
nal motor rotation error
<0-1>
polygonal motor
(At acceleration/decelerarotation overshoottion)
ing 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 2.2 sec.
1
Default setting of paper
PPC
0
SYS 0: A4/LT 1: LCF
source
<0-5>
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
1
Automatic change of paper PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
source
<0-2>
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direction and size: ex. A4
to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. 1 is
applied when the
staple/hole-punch is
specified.)
Feeding retry setting
ALL
0
M
0: ON
1
<0-1>
1: OFF

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 109

Code

Classification

483

Laser

484

Laser

485

Laser

486

Laser

488

Laser

489

Laser

490

Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Pre-running rotation of
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
polygonal motor
<0-2>
switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the original is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the original is set manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using
RADF only)
Polygonal motor rotational
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
status switching at the Auto
<0-1>
switching the polygonal
Clear Mode
motor from the normal
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid 1: Invalid
Rotational status of polygo- ALL
JPN: 1
SYS Sets the rotational stanal motor on standby
Others: 0
tus of polygonal motor
<0-1>
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at
08-490.)
1: Stopped
Timing of auto-clearing of
ALL
0
SYS Switches the polygonal
polygonal motor pre-run<0-2>
motor to the standby
ning rotation
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the prerunning. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effective when 0 or 2
is set at 08-483.
Setting of polygonal motor
ALL
0
M
Set the type of polygotype
<0-3>
nal motor.
0: 2-clock type
1: 3-clock type
2: 4-clock type
3: 4-clock type
Polygonal motor rotation
ALL
5
M
0: 38,090.55 rpm
number on standby
<0-5>
1: 35,000 rpm
2: 30,000 rpm
3: 25,000 rpm
4: 20,000 rpm
5: 10,000 rpm
Polygonal motor rotation in
ALL
0
M
0: Stopped
the energy saving mode
<0-1>
1: 10,000 rpm

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 110
04/09

Code

Classification

491

Transfer

492

Transfer

493

Transfer

502

Image

503
508

User
interface
Image

509

Image

515

Fuser

516

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Transfer charger bias corALL
149
M
Corrects the transfer
rection (H) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Transfer charger bias corALL
139
M
Corrects the transfer
rection (C) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the center area
of paper at duplexing.
Transfer charger bias corALL
128
M
Corrects the transfer
rection (L) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the trailing
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Error diffusion and dither
PPC
1
SYS Sets the image reprosetting at photo mode
<0-1>
duction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
Default setting of density
PPC
0
SYS 0: Automatic
adjustment
<0-1>
1: Manual (Center)
Custom Mode setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: Not used
<0-3>
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo is
set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set as
a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
Error diffusion and dither
PPC
1
SYS Switches the image
setting at a photo mode
<0-1>
processing method
(Custom Mode)
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
Temperature setting of
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
warming-up
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Center thermistor)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
Temperature setting of
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
warming-up
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Side thermistor)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1

1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 111

Code

Classification

518

Fuser

520

Fuser

521

Fuser

523

Fuser

525-0

Fuser

525-1
525-2
525-3

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 3)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Enve4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
lope)
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
Fuser roller temperature
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
during printing
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Side thermistor/Envelope)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
10
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
Pre-running time for first
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
printing
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
(Envelope)
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Temperature
The first
ALL
20
M
This code is valid only
drop switching drop
<0-200>
when 20 is set to 08time setting
535.
The secALL
38
M
during printing ond drop
Setting value x 5 sec.:
<0-200>
(Center therfrom 0 to 1,000 sec.
The third
ALL
75
M
mistor)
later
drop
<0-200>
The fourth
ALL
75
M
drop
<0-200>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

4
4
4
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 112
05/05

Code

Classification

526

Fuser

527-0

Fuser

527-1
527-2
527-3
535

Fuser

536-0

Fuser

536-1
536-2
536-3
537-0
537-1
537-2
537-3

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.
printing (OHP film)
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
The first
ALL
20
M
This code is valid only
Temperature
drop switching drop
<0-200>
when 20 is set to 08time setting
535.
The secALL
30
M
during printing ond drop
Setting value x 5 sec.:
<0-200>
(Side therfrom 0 to 1,000 sec.
The third
ALL
48
M
later
mistor)
drop
<0-200>
The fourth
drop
Temperature drop control
setting during printing
(Temperature/Time)

The first
drop
The second drop
The third
drop
The fourth
drop
Temperature
The first
drop setting
drop
during printing The sec(Side therond drop
mistor)
The third
drop
The fourth
drop

Temperature
drop setting
during printing
(Center thermistor)

ALL
ALL

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

75
<0-200>
2
<0-20>

1
<0-10>
2
<0-10>
3
<0-10>
3
<0-10>
1
<0-10>
2
<0-10>
3
<0-10>
5
<0-10>

M
M

Procedure
1

4
4
4
4

0: None
1: Pattern 1
2: Pattern 2
3: Pattern 3
4: Pattern 4
5: Pattern 5
6: Pattern 6
7: Pattern 7
8: Pattern 8
9: Pattern 9
10: Pattern 10
11: Pattern 11
12: Pattern 12
13: Pattern 13
14: Pattern 14
15: Pattern 15
16: Pattern 16
17: Pattern 17
18: Pattern 18
19: Pattern 19
20: Manual adjustment
This code is valid only
when 20 is set to 08535.
Setting value x -5C:
from 0C to -50C

4
4
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 113
05/05

Code

Classification

550

Image

601

User
interface
User
interface

602

603

User
interface

604

User
interface

605

User
interface

607

User
interface

610

User
interface
User
interface

611

612

General

613

User
interface

614

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Default setting of original
PPC
0
SYS 0: Text/Photo
1
mode
<0-3>
1: Photo 2: Text
3: Custom Mode
Setting for the Energy Sav- ALL
0
SYS 0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1
ing Mode
<0-1>
1: Sleep Mode
Screen setting for Auto
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
1
UC: 1
power Save Mode and
Auto Shut OFF Mode
JPN: 1
<0-1>
Setting for automatic
PPC
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
duplexing mode
<0-3>
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection
1
Default setting for APS/
PPC
0
SYS 0: APS (Automatic
AMS
<0-2>
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
Centering printing of priPPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
mary/secondary direction
<0-1>
at AMS
1
Default setting of RADF
PPC
0
SYS 0: Continuous feeding
mode
<0-1>
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
Key touch sound of control
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
panel
<0-1>
1: ON
Book type original priority
PPC
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
1
<0-1>
page
1: Right page to left
page
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not summer time
1
<0-1>
1: Summer time
Paper size selection for
PPC EUR:
SYS Press the button on the
9
[OTHER] button
FOLIO
LCD to select the size.
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
1
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
6
SYS Sets the period of time
<1-50>
when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or parallel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
-50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 114
06/01

Code
615

617
618

619

620
621
622
623
624
625

627
628
629
633

634
636

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
General Size information of main
ALL
SYS Displays the sizes of
memory and page memory
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each memory is properly recognized.
User
Print setting without
ALL
0
SYS 0: Printed
interface department code
<0-1>
1: Not printed
User
Default setting when mixed PPC
0
SYS 0: Scanned as all in
interface size originals are set on
<0-1>
same size
RADF
1: Scanned as each
original size
Paper
Time lag before Auto Job
ALL
4
SYS Sets the time taken to
feeding Start of bypass feeding
<0-10>
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5 sec.
User
Department management
PPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (Copier)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
FAX
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (FAX)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
PRT
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (Printer)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
SCN
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (Scanner)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
PRT
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (List print)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Blank copying prevention
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
interface mode during RADF jam<0-1>
1: ON (Start printing
ming
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
User
Rotation printing at the
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not rotating
interface non-sorting
<0-1>
1: Rotating
User
Direction priority of original PPC
0
SYS 0: Automatic
interface image
<0-1>
1: Portrait
User
Department management
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting
<0-1>
1: Valid
Data
Releasing F200 service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not used
overwrite call
<0-2>
1: Board installed
kit
(GP-1050)
2: Service call
User
Inner receiving tray priority
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal
interface at Non-sort Mode
<0-1>
1: Inner receiving tray
PPC
0
SYS 0: ON
User
Width setting for image
<0-1>
1: OFF
interface shift copying (linkage of
front side and back side)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
2

2
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 115
05/05

Code

Classification

638

General

640

User
interface

641

User
interface

642

User
interface

645

User
interface

646

User
interface

647

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Time differences
ALL
EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
UC: 40
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
JPN: 6
4: +10.0h 5: +9.5h
<0-47>
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25: -0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h
45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h
47: -11.5h
Date display format
ALL
EUR: 1
SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD.
UC: 2
1: DD.MM.YYYY
JPN: 0
2: MM.DD.YYYY
<0-2>
Automatic Sorting Mode
PPC
2
SYS 0: Invalid 1: STAPLE
setting (RADF)
<0-4>
2: SORT 3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Default setting of Sorter
PPC
0
SYS 0: NON-SORT
Mode
<0-4>
1: STAPLE
2: SORT 3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
SYS Sets the reproduction
ratio in editing copy
<0-10>
ratio for the X in 1
printing (including magazine sort) to the
Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio.
0: 90%
1: 91%
2: 92%
3: 93%
4: 94%
5: 95%
6: 96%
7: 97%
8: 98%
9: 99%
10: 100%
Image position in editing
PPC
0
SYS Sets the page pasted
<0-1>
position for X in 1 to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: Cornering
1: Centering
Rotation of paper direction
ALL
1
SYS 0: Rotation OFF
for BOX printing
<0-1>
1: Rotation ON

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 116
05/11

Code
648

Classification
User
interface

649

User
interface

650

User
interface
User
interface

651

652
653
657
658

User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface

659

User
interface

660

Network

661

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Returning finisher tray
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
1
when printing is finished
<0-1>
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
1
<0-1>
page
1: Right page to left
page
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating PPC
0
SYS 0: Horizontal
1
order setting
<0-1>
1: Vertical
1
Printing format setting for
PPC
2
SYS Hyphen
Time stamp and Page
<0-3>
(with page number)
Number
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
Cascade operation setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
1
<0-1>
Cascade operation setting
PRT
0
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
1
<0-1>
Direction priority for date
PPC
0
SYS 0: Short edge
1
and time stamp printing
<0-1>
1: Long edge
1
Auto Job Start setting for
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether or not
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
1
Auto Job start setting for
PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Auto-forwarding setting of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
received FAX
<0-1>
1: Valid
Auto-forwarding setting of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
received E-mail
<0-1>
1: Valid

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 117
04/09

Code

Classification

662

General

666

General

667

General

670

General

671
672

User
interface
General

673

General

678

General

679

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Clearing of SMS partition
ALL
SYS Clears SMS partition.
3
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
/SHR partition clearing
ALL
SYS Initializes the Elec3
tronic Filing.
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
SYS Initializes the shared
3
folder.
HDD diagnostic menu disALL
SYS Display the HDD infor2
play
mation
Size indicator
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
<0-1>
1: Valid
3
Initialization of department
SYS Initializing of the departmanagement information
ment management
information
* Key in the code and
press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the
initialization. If the
area storing the
department management information is destroyed for
some reason, Enter
Department Code
is displayed on the
control panel even if
the department
management function is not set on. In
this case, initialize
the area with this
code. This area is
normally initialized
at the factory.
1
Trial period setting
PRT/
254
SYS Sets the trial period
SCN
<1-60>
from 1 to 60 days. This
setting is effective only
when the default value
is 254. Once the
default value is set, this
value is only used for a
reference.
1
Setting of banner advertisALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not dising display
<0-1>
playing the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is displayed alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Banner advertising display
ALL
SYS Maximum 27 letters
11
1
(one-byte character)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 118

Code

Classification

680

General

681

General

682
683

User
interface
General

684
685

General
General

686

General

689

FAX

690

General

691

General

692

Maintenance

693

General

694

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Banner advertising display
ALL
SYS Maximum 27 letters
2
(one-byte character)
Display of [BANNER MESALL
0
SYS 0: Not displayed
SAGE] button
<0-1>
1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679) and Banner advertising display 2 (08-680) on
the control panel.
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
Duplex printing setting
ALL
1
SYS When the duplex printwhen coin controller is
<0-1>
ing is short paid with a
used
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is considered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this setting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
Rebuilding all databases
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases.
Rebuilding all databases
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases
related to address book
related to the Address
Book.
Rebuilding all databases
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases
related to log
related to the log.
Adaptation of paper source
FAX
0
SYS 0: Not subjected for
priority selection
<0-1>
APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS 2: Normal formatting
<2>
HDD type display
ALL
SYS 0: Not formatted
<0-2>
1: Not used
2: Normal format
Performing panel calibraALL
SYS Performs the calibration
tion
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Initialization of NIC inforALL
SYS Returns the value to the
mation
factory shipping default
value.
Performing HDD testing
ALL
SYS Checks the bad sector.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
11
1

1
1

3
3
3
1

7
7
1

3
3

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 119

Code

Classification

695

General

696

Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding

697

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Notifying condition of trial
PRT/
3
SYS Sets when the end of
period end
SCN
<0-59>
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
Installation of scrambler
ALL
0
0: Not installed
board (Option)
<0-1>
1: Installed
Paper type priority

PPC

1
<1-2>

SYS

698

Scrambler
board

Entering the key code for


scrambler board

ALL

699

Scrambler
board
FAX

Erasing all data in HDD

ALL

Destination setting for FAX

FAX

EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>

SYS

702

Maintenance

Remote-controlled service
function

ALL

2
<0-2>

SYS

703

Maintenance

Remote-controlled service
HTTP server
URL setting

ALL

SYS

701

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Sets the paper type priority during copying.


1: Plain paper
2: Thick paper 1
Start up this code and
have the user enter the
key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code cannot be set again on
security grounds.
This setting is effective
only when the scrambler board is installed.
0: Japan
1: Asia
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany 6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
0: Valid (Remote-controlled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
Maximum 256 Bytes

Procedure
1

2
1

3
1

11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 120
04/09

Code
707

710

711
715
716
717
718

719
720

721

723
726
727

728
729
730
731

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
11
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL https://
nance
HTTP initially-registered
device.
server
mfpURL setting
support.
com:443/
device/
firstregist.
ashx
ALL
24
SYS Sets the time interval to
1
Mainte- Short time interval setting
nance
of recovery from Emer<1-48>
recover from the Emer(Remote) gency Mode
gency Mode to the Normal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
ALL
60
SYS Unit: Minute
1
Mainte- Short time interval setting
of Emergency Mode
<30-360>
nance
(Remote)
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
1230
SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
1
nance
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Prohibited
1
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
<0-1>
1: Accepted
nance
Writing data of self-diagnostic code
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
3
SYS Unit: Minute
1
nance
response waiting time
<1-30>
(Timeout)
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
1
nance
initial registration
<0-2>
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
SYS Maximum 10 letters
11
nance
tentative password
Mainte- Status of remote-conALL
0
SYS 0: Not registered
2
nance
trolled service initial regis<0-1>
1: Registered
tration
(Display only)
Mainte- Service center call function ALL
2
SYS 0: OFF
1
nance
<0-2>
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
Mainte- Service center call
ALL
SYS Maximum 256 letters
11
nance
HTTP server URL setting
Mainte- HTTP proxy setting
ALL
1
SYS 0: Valid
1
nance
<0-1>
1: Invalid
Mainte- HTTP proxy IP address
ALL
SYS 000.000.000.00011
nance
setting
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Mainte- HTTP proxy port number
ALL
0
SYS
1
nance
setting
<065535>
Mainte- HTTP proxy ID setting
ALL
SYS Maximum 30 letters
11
nance
Mainte- HTTP proxy password setALL
SYS Maximum 30 letters
11
nance
ting
Mainte- HTTP proxy panel display
ALL
1
SYS 0: Valid
1
nance
<0-1>
1: Invalid

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 121
04/09

Code

Classification

732

Maintenance
(Remote)

733

Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)

734
738
739
740
741
742
743
744

745

Maintenance
(Remote)

746

Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)

747
748
758
759
760

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Automatic ordering funcALL
3
SYS 0: Ordered by FAX
tion of supplies
<0-3>
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 32 digits
tion of supplies
Enter hyphen with the
FAX number
[Monitor/Pause] button
ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
Automatic ordering funcList: 256 digits
tion of supplies
E-mail address
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 50 letters
tion of supplies
User's name
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 32 digits
tion of supplies
Enter hyphen with the
User's telephone number
[Monitor/Pause] button
ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
Automatic ordering funcList: 256 digits
tion of supplies
User's E-mail address
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 100 letters
tion of supplies
User's address
ALL
0
SYS Maximum 5 digits
Automatic ordering func<5 digits>
tion of supplies
Service number
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 50 letters
tion of supplies
Service technician's name
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 32 digits
tion of supplies
Enter hyphen with the
Service technician's tele[Monitor/Pause] button
phone number
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
tion of supplies
List: 256 digits
Service technician's E-mail
address
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 50 letters
tion of supplies
Supplier's name
ALL
SYS Maximum 100 letters
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Supplier's address
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 128 letters
tion of supplies
Notes
Information about supplies
ALL
SYS Maximum 20 digits
Part number of toner cartridge
ALL
1
SYS
Information about supplies
<1-99>
Order quantity of toner cartridge
Information about supplies
ALL
1
SYS
Condition number of toner
<1-99>
cartridge

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11

11

11
11
11
11
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 122
07/11

Code
765

767

768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
Mainte- Automatic ordering supALL
2
SYS 0: Valid (FAX/Internet
nance
plies
<0-2>
FAX)
(Remote) Display
1: Valid (FAX/Internet
FAX/HTTP)
2: Invalid
Mainte- Service Notification setting
ALL
0
SYS Enables to set up to 3
nance
<0-2>
E-mail addresses to be
(Remote)
sent.(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
SYS Maximum 192 letters
Mainte- Destination E-mail address ALL
nance
(Remote)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Mainte- Total counter information
transmission setting
<0-1>
1: Valid
nance
(Remote)
Mainte- Total counter transmission
ALL
1
SYS 1 to 31
nance
date setting
<1-31>
(Remote)
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Mainte- PM counter notification set- ALL
ting
<0-1>
1: Valid
nance
(Remote)
Mainte- Dealer's name
ALL
SYS Maximum 100 letters
nance
Needed at initial registration
Mainte- Login name
ALL
SYS Maximum 20 letters
nance
Needed at initial registration
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not displayed
Mainte- Display setting of [Service
Notification] button
<0-1>
1: displayed
nance
(Remote)
Mainte- Sending error contents of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
nance
equipment
<0-1>
1: Valid
(Remote)
Mainte- Setting total counter transALL
SYS
nance
mission interval
(Remote) (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
Mainte- Destination E-mail address
2
nance
(Remote)
Mainte- Destination E-mail address
ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
nance
3
(Remote)
Mainte- Notification format selecALL
0
SYS 0: Text
nance
tion
<0-1>
1: Text + XML data
(Remote)
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
<0-31>
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
nance
polling day selection
month
Day-1
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
nance
polling day selection
<0-31>
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
Day-2
month
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
nance
polling day selection
<0-31>
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
Day-3
month

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1

11
1
1
1
11
11
1
1
1
11
11
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 123
04/09

Code

Classification

783

Maintenance

784

Maintenance

785

Maintenance

786

Maintenance

787

Maintenance

788

Maintenance

789

Maintenance

790

Maintenance

794

Maintenance
Maintenance

796
797
798

Maintenance
General

799

General

800-0

Fuser

800-1

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
polling day selection
<0-31>
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
Day-4
month
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Remote-controlled service
<0-1>
1: Valid
polling day selection
Sunday
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection
<0-1>
1: Valid
Monday
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
<0-1>
1: Valid
Tuesday
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Remote-controlled service
<0-1>
1: Valid
polling day selection
Wednesday
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection
<0-1>
1: Valid
Thursday
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Remote-controlled service
<0-1>
1: Valid
polling day selection
Friday
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection
<0-1>
1: Valid
Saturday
Information of supplies set- ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
ting of toner cartridge
<0-1>
1: Valid
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
lengthened interval polling
<0-1>
1: Valid
(End of month)
Firmware download
ALL
0
SYS 0: Accepted
<0-1>
1: Prohibited
Notifying address of trial
PRT/
3
SYS Sets where the end of
period end
SCN
<0-3>
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF 1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/
SYS [CANCEL]: Cancel
SCN
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the Forcible end
of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
Temperature
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
limit
4: 150C
5: 155C
(OHP film)
6: 160C
7: 165C
8: 170C
9: 175C
Side
ALL
6
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 124
05/05

Code

Classification

801-0

Fuser

801-1

802-0

Fuser

802-1

803-0

Fuser

803-1

804-0

Fuser

804-1

805

Charger

806

Charger

807

Charger

808

Charger

809

Charger

826

Charger

830

Transfer

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
control lower
4: 150C
5: 155C
limit
6: 160C
7: 165C
(Thick paper
8: 170C
9: 175C
1)
Side
ALL
6
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
limit
4: 150C
5: 155C
6: 160C
7: 165C
(Thick paper
2)
8: 170C
9: 175C
Side
ALL
9
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
control lower
4: 150C
5: 155C
limit
6: 160C
7: 165C
(Thick paper
8: 170C
9: 175C
3)
Side
ALL
10
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Temperature
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
limit
4: 150C
5: 155C
(Envelope)
6: 160C
7: 165C
8: 170C
9: 175C
Side
ALL
10
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Main charger bias correcPRT
98
M
Corrects the value of
tion
<0-255>
the main charger bias
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
adjustment (05-210).
Main charger bias correcPRT
98
M
tion
<0-255>
(Toner Saving Mode/OHP
film)
PPC
98
M
Main charger bias correc<0-255>
tion
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
Main charger bias correcPPC
98
M
tion
<0-255>
(Text/OHP film)
Main charger bias correcPPC
98
M
tion
<0-255>
(Photo/OHP film)
PRT
128
M
Main charger bias correc<0-255>
tion
(Toner saving mode)
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (C)
<0-255>
the transfer transformer DC output
adjustment (05-221).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
4

1
1

1
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 125
05/05

Code

Classification

831

Separation

833

Developer

834

Developer

835

Developer

836

Developer

837

Developer

838

Image
processing
Image
processing

839

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Separation transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (C)
<0-255>
the separation transformer DC output
adjustment (05-234).
Developer bias DC correcPRT
108
M
Corrects the value of
tion
<0-255>
the developer bias
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
adjustment (05-205).
Developer bias DC correcPRT
108
M
tion
<0-255>
(Toner Saving Mode/OHP
film)
PPC
108
M
Developer bias DC correc<0-255>
tion
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
Developer bias DC correcPPC
108
M
tion
<0-255>
(Text/OHP film)
Developer bias DC correcPPC
108
M
tion
<0-255>
(Photo/OHP film)
Switching of recycled toner
ALL
0
M
0: Switched
saving control
<0-1>
1: Not switched
Correction by temperature/
humidity

ALL

0
<0-3>

Power source setting for


destination

ALL

PRT

SAD: 1
Others: 0
<0-1>
128
<0-255>

PRT

128
<0-255>

849

General

859

Developer

860

Developer

Developer bias DC correction


(Toner saving mode)
Developer bias DC correction (Normal)

861

Developer

Developer bias DC correction (Text/Photo)

PPC

128
<0-255>

862

Developer

Developer bias DC correction (Text)

PPC

128
<0-255>

863

Developer

Developer bias DC correction (Photo)

PPC

128
<0-255>

864

Charger

Main charger bias correction (Normal)

PRT

128
<0-255>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Sets the correction by


temperature/humidity.
0: All valid
1: All invalid
2: Valid only in autotoner sensor
3: All valid except
transfer and separation
0: Other than SAD
1: SAD
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).

Procedure
1

1
1

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 126
05/05

Code

Classification

865

Charger

866

Charger

867

Charger

868

Transfer

869

Transfer

870

Separation

871

Separation

872

Laser

873

Laser

875

Laser

876

Laser

877

Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Text/Photo)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Text)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Photo)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (H)
<0-255>
the transfer transformer DC output
adjustment (05-220).
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (L)
<0-255>
the transfer transformer DC output
adjustment (05-222).
Separation transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (H)
<0-255>
the separation transformer DC output
adjustment (05-233).
Separation transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (L)
<0-255>
the separation transformer DC output
adjustment (05-235).
Laser power correction
PRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Normal)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Text/Photo)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Toner saving mode)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Text)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Photo)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 127
05/05

Code

Classification

886

Fuser

896-0

Fuser

896-1

900

Version

903
905
907
908
915
916
920

Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version

921
922

Version
Version

923

Version

924

Version

925

Version

926

Version

927

Version

928

Version

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Temperature drop control
ALL
2
M
0: None
setting in ready status
<0-20>
1: Pattern 1
(Temperature/Time)
2: Pattern 2
3: Pattern 3
4: Pattern 4
5: Pattern 5
6: Pattern 6
7: Pattern 7
8: Pattern 8
9: Pattern 9
10: Pattern 10
11: Pattern 11
12: Pattern 12
13: Pattern 13
14: Pattern 14
15: Pattern 15
16: Pattern 16
17: Pattern 17
18: Pattern 18
19: Pattern 19
20: Manual adjustment
Temperature
Center
ALL
7
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
4: 150C
5: 155C
limit
(Plain paper/
6: 160C
7: 165C
8: 170C
9: 175C
Low tempera- Side
ALL
5
M
10: 180C
ture)
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
System firmware ROM ver- ALL
JPN: T371SY0JXXX
sion
UC: T371SY0UXXX
EUR: T371SY0EXXX
Others: T371SY0XXXX
Engine ROM version
ALL
371M-XXX
Scanner ROM version
ALL
371S-XXX
RADF ROM version
ALL
DF-XXXX
Finisher ROM version
ALL
SDL-XX FIN-XX
Fax board ROM version
FAX
F562-XXX
NIC board ROM version
ALL
X.XXX
FROM basic section softALL
VX.XX/X.XX
ware version
FROM internal program
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
UI data fixed section verALL
VXXX.XXX X
sion
UI data common section
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
version
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 1 in HDD
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 2 in HDD
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 3 in HDD
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 4 in HDD
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 5 in HDD

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 128
05/05

Code
929
930
931
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
944

945
947

948

949

950

953
954

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 6 in HDD
Version Version of UI data in
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
FROM displayed at powerON
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 7 in HDD
Version Web data whole version
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 1
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 2
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 3
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 4
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 5
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 6
Version HD version
ALL
JPN: T371HD0JXXX
2
UC: T371HD0UXXX
EUR: T371HD0EXXX
Others: T371HD0XXXX
Network Two-way setting of
ALL
1
UTY 1: Valid
12
RawPort 9100
<1-2>
2: Invalid
General Initialization after software
ALL
Perform this code when
3
version upgrade
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
General Mode setting by pressing
ALL
0
SYS Sets the mode to enter
1
[Energy Saver] button for a
<0-1>
when the [Energy
while
Saver] button is
pressed for a while.
0: Sleep Mode
1: Auto Shut Off Mode
General Automatic interruption
ALL
0
SYS Sets the number of
1
page setting during printing
<0-100>
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
1
ElecStart-up method of ElecALL
0
SYS Sets the start-up
tronic Fil- tronic Filing
<0-2>
method of the Elecing
tronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up (Not
recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
User
Access code entry for
ALL
0
SYS 0: Renewed automati1
interface Electronic Filing printing
<0-1>
cally
1: Enter every time
1
User
Clearing timing for files and
ALL
1
SYS 0: Immediately after
interface Electronic Filing Agent
<0-1>
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 129
05/05

Code
969
970
973

975

976

977
978

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
User
Error sound
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
interface
<0-1>
1: ON
User
Sound setting when
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
interface switching to Energy Saving
<0-1>
1: ON
Mode
Network PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL line feed
1
<0-3>
code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
1
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether pause or
General Job handling when print<0-1>
stop the printing job
ing is short paid with coin
when it is short paid
controller
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
ElecEquipment name setting to
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
1
tronic Fil- a folder when saving files
<0-1>
adding the equipment
ing
name to the folder
when saving files.
0: Not add
1: Add
ALL
0
SYS 0: ISO8859-1
1
Network Switching of extended
<0-1>
1: ISO8859-2
ASCII code in catFs filesystem
1
Network Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: AUTO
(Paper feeding drawer)
<0-5>
1: Upper drawer
2: Lower drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
5: LCF

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 130
05/05

Code

Classification

979

Network

980

981

985

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0:
(PCL symbol set)
<0-39>
1:
2:
3:
4:

ElecElectronic Filing data


tronic Fil- retention period when NIC
ing
board is not installed
(Public Box)
ElecElectronic Filing data
tronic Fil- retention period when NIC
ing
board is not installed
(User Box)
ElecPrint mode setting of mixed
tronic Fil- input source of Electronic
ing
Filing

Contents

Procedure

Roman-8
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
PC-8,Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850,Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura International
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
23: ISO 6: ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
29: ISO 69: French
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
0: Retention OFF
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days

ALL

0
<0-999>

SYS

ALL

0
<0-999>

SYS

0: Retention OFF
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Image quality priority mode


1: Function priority
mode

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 131

Code

Classification

986

General

988

Paper
feeding

995

Version

999

1002

Maintenance
Maintenance
Network

1003

Network

1004

Network

1005

Network

1006

Network

1007

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Copy function setting
PPC
0
SYS Sets the copy function
<0-1>
to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Setting of paper size
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not switched
switching to 13 LG
<0-2>
1: LG 13LG
2: FOLIO 13LG
SYS This code can be also
Equipment number (serial
ALL
0
keyed in from the
number) display
<10 digadjustment mode (05its>
976).
10 digits
FSMS total counter
ALL
0
SYS Refers to values of total
<8 digits>
counter
Reset of NIC board
ALL
3
NIC 1: Cold
2: Warm
<1-3>
3: Not reset
Selection of NIC board sta- ALL
1
NIC 1: Not printed out
tus information
<1-2>
when the equipment
is restarted
2: Printed out when
the equipment is
restarted
Speed setting of Ethernet
ALL
3
NIC 1: 10 MBPS
<1-3>
2: 100 MBPS
3: Automatic
NIC Web password
ALL
NIC Writing only (Current
setting is not displayed.)
Maximum 31 letters
Availability of IP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Address Mode
ALL
2
NIC 1: Fixed IP address
<1-5>
2: Dynamic IP address
3: Dynamic IP address
without AutoIP
4: Dynamic IP address
without BOOTP
5: Dynamic IP address
without DHCP
Domain name
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters

1008

Network

IP address

ALL

NIC

1009

Network

Subnet mask

ALL

NIC

1010

Network

Gateway

ALL

NIC

1011

Network

Availability of IPX

ALL

1
<1-2>

NIC

1001

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available

Procedure
1

1
11

1
12
12

12
12

12
12

12
12

12

12

12

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 132
05/05

Code

Classification

1012

Network

1013

Network

1014

Network

1015

Network

1016

Network

1017

Network

1018

Network

1019

Network

1020

Network

1021

Network

1023
1024

Network
Network

1025

Network

1026

Network

1027

Network

1028
1029
1030

Network
Network
Network

1031

Network

1032

Network

1033

Network

1034

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Network frame type
ALL
1
NIC 1: Automatic
<1-5>
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
*
NIC Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of DNS
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
IP address to DNS server
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Primary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
IP address to DNS server
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Secondary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
NIC 1: Invalid
<1-5>
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
Availability of SLP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
NetBios name
ALL
UTY Maximum 15 letters
Name of WINS server or IP
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
address (Primary)
Name of WINS server or IP
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
address (Secondary)
Availability of Bindery
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of NDS
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Directory service context
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
Directory service tree
ALL
NIC Maximum 47 letters
Availability of HTTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Port number to NIC HTTP
ALL
80
NIC
server
<165535>
SYS
Port number to system
ALL
8080
HTTP server
<165535>
Availability of NIC HTTP
ALL
2
NIC 1: Available
client
<1-2>
2: Not available
UTY
TCP port number to ConALL
80
troller HTTP client
<165535>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12

2
12
12
12
12
12
12

12

12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 133
05/05

Code

Classification

1035

Network

1037

Network

1038

Network

1039

Network

1040

Network

1041

Network

1042

Network

1043

Network

1044

Network

1045

Network

1046

Network

1047

Network

1048

Network

1049

Network

1050
1051

Network
Network

1052

Network

1053

Network

1054

Network

1055

Network

1056

Network

1057
1058

Network
Network

1059

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
IP address to HTTP server
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Primary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
SMTP server
NIC
TCP port number of SMTP
ALL
25
client
<165535>
Availability of SMTP server ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
UTY
TCP port number of SMTP
ALL
25
server
<165535>
E-mail box name to SMTP
ALL
UTY Maximum 192 letters
server
Availability of Offramp
ALL
2
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Offramp security
ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
POP3 server
Types of POP3 server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Automatic
<1-3>
2: POP3
3: APOP
Login name to POP3
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters
server
Login password to POP3
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters
E-mail reception interval
ALL
5
NIC
(Unit: Minute)
<0-4096>
TCP port number of POP3
ALL
110
NIC
client
<165535>
Availability of FTP client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 letters
FTP server
UTY
TCP port number of FTP
ALL
21
client
<165535>
Data port number of FTP
ALL
0
UTY
client
<065535>
Login name to FTP server
ALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
Login password to FTP
ALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
server
Availability of FTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
11
11
12

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 134
05/05

Code

Classification

1060

Network

1061
1062

Network
Network

1063

Network

1065
1066

Network
Network

1067

Network

1068

Network

1069

Network

1070

Network

1073

Network

1074

Network

1075

Network

1076

Network

1077
1078

Network
Network

1079

Network

1080

Network

1081
1082
1083
1084

Network
Network
Network
Network

1085

Network

1086

Network

1087

Network

1088

Network

1089

Network

1090

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
TCP port number of FTP
ALL
21
UTY
server
<165535>
Login name to FTP client
ALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
Login password to FTP cliALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
ent
MIB function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Setting of read Community
ALL
public
NIC Maximum 31 letters
Setting of read/Write ComALL
private
NIC Maximum 31 letters
munity
Authentication TRAP funcALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
tion
<1-2>
2: Invalid
ALERTS TRAP function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
TRAP destination IP
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Community setting of
ALL
public
NIC Maximum 31 letters
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
9100
<165535>
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
515
<165535>
LPD queue name
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
Availability of IPP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Availability of IPP port
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
number 80
<1-2>
2: Invalid
TCP port number of IPP
ALL
631
NIC
<165535>
IPP printer name
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
IPP printer location
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
IPP printer information
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
IPP printer information
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
(more)
Installer of IPP printer
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
driver
IPP printer Make and
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
Model
IPP printer information
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
(more) MFGR
IPP message from operaALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
tor
Availability of FTP print
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Printer user name of FTP
ALL
print
NIC Maximum 31 letters

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 135
05/05

Code

Classification

1091

Network

1092

Network

1093

Network

1094

Network

1095

Network

1096

Network

1097

Network

1098

Network

1099

Network

1100

Network

1101

Network

1102

Network

1103

Network

1104

Network

1105

Network

1112

Network

1114

Network

1117

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Printer user password of
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
FTP
TCP port number to FTP
ALL
21
NIC
print server
<165535>
Login name to Novell print
ALL
NIC Maximum 47 letters
server
Login password to Novell
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
print server
Name of SearchRoot
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
server
Scan rate setting of print
ALL
5
NIC Unit: Second
queue
<1-255>
Page number limitation for
ALL
5
UTY
printing text of received E<1-99>
mail
MDN return mail setting
ALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
when receiving E-mail
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Trap destination of IPX
ALL
UTY Maximum 24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
Method of SMTP server
ALL
5
NIC 1: Plain
authentication
<1-5>
2: Login
3: Cram-MD5
4: Digest MD5
5: Disable
Login name for SMTP
ALL
NIC Maximum 64 letters
server authentication
Login password for SMTP
ALL
NIC Maximum 64 letters
server authentication
Rendezvous setting
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Link local host name
ALL MFP_seri NIC Maximum 127 letters
al
Service name setting
ALL
Refer to
NIC Maximum 63 letters
content
<Default value>
e-STUDIO230:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO230
e-STUDIO280:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO280
Host name
ALL MFP_seri NIC Maximum 63 letters
al
Sending mail text of InterALL
1
SYS 0: Invalid (Not sending
netFAX
<0-1>
the mail text)
1: Valid (Sending the
mail text)
SMB time-out period
ALL
300
SYS Unit: Second
<1-9999>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

12
12
12
12
12

12
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 136

Code

Classification

1120

Network

1124

Network

1126

Counter

1130

User
interface

1131

User
interface

1132

General

1133

Paper
feeding

1135

Paper
feeding

1136

Network

1137

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Backup/Restore of NIC
ALL
0
SYS 0: Read (Reads all of
setting information
<0-1>
the setting information in NIC and create a file NAM1B
(no extension) in
USB)
1: Write (Writes all of
the setting information read from a file
NAM1B (no extension) in USB)
Workgroup name
ALL
workUTY Maximum 15 letters
12
group
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
Validity of interrupt copy<0-1>
1: Valid
ing when external counters
are installed
Job Build Function
ALL
1
SYS Sets the Job Build
1
<0-1>
Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Maximum number of time
ALL
1000
SYS Sets the maximum
job build performed
<5-1000>
number of time a job
build has been performed.
5-1000: 5 to 1000 times
1
Default screen selection of
ALL
1
SYS Selects the default
the User Function menu
<0-1>
screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER
1
Feeding direction setting of
ALL
0
SYS Sets the feeding direcenvelope
<0-1>
tion of envelopes.
0: Envelope flap comes
on its trailing edge
(front side of the
equipment)
1: Envelope flap comes
on its leading edge
(rear side of the
equipment)
Default setting of drawers
PRT
1
SYS 1: LCF
1
(Printer/BOX)
<1-5>
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
ALL
8
SYS
1
Number of lines simulta<0-16>
neously connectable when
using SMB
Memory partition size
ALL
12
SYS 8-20 M bytes
1
when using Samba
<8-20>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 137
05/11

Code
1138

1139
1140

1145

1372

1376
1378

1380

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Network LDAP search method setALL
0
SYS Sets the search method
ting
<0-3>
when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
Network LDAP authentication setALL
0
SYS 0: Not authenticated
1
ting
<0-1>
1: Authenticated
1
User
Restriction of the template
ALL
0
SYS Selects the restriction of
interface function with the adminis<0-1>
the template function
trator privilege
usage setting.
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
Mainte- Counter notification
ALL
SYS Maximum 32 digits
11
nance
Remote FAX setting
Enter hyphen with the
(Remote)
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
1
Counter Heater and energizing time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
accumulating counter Dis<8 digits>
control time accumuplay/0 clearing
lated (when power of
the equipment is ON)
but does not count at
the Sleep Mode. When
the counter value of the
fuser roller is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
the PM support mode.
Counter Toner cartridge drive
ALL
0
M
Counts the rotation
1
counter
<8 digits>
number of the toner
cartridge.
1
Counter Counter for period of time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
fuser unit is at ready tem<8 digits>
control time accumuperature
lated (when the equipment is at ready status).
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
also reset in sync at the
PM support mode.
1
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
Counter Counter for period of time
<8 digits>
control time accumufuser unit is at printing temlated (during printing).
perature
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
also reset in sync at the
PM support mode.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 138

Code

Classification

1382

Counter

1385

Image
processing

1386

Image
processing

1387

Image
processing

1388

Image
processing

1390

Paper
feeding

1391

Paper
feeding

1392

Paper
feeding

1393

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Counter for period of time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
fuser unit is at energy sav<8 digits>
control time accumuing temperature/Counter
lated (when the equipreset
ment is in the Energy
Saving Mode).
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
also reset in sync at the
PM support mode.
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 1)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at the PM support
mode.
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 2)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 3)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(OHP film)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(upper drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(lower drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(PFP upper drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(PFP lower drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 139
05/05

Code
1394

1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1410
1411

1422

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
1
feeding (bypass feed)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
1
feeding (LCF)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
1
ALL
0
M
When the number of
Paper
Feeding retry counter
<8 digits>
feeding retry (08-1390
feeding upper limit value
to 08-1395) exceeds
(Upper drawer)
the setting value, the
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
1
feeding retry will not be
feeding upper limit value
<8 digits>
performed subse(Lower drawer)
quently. In case 0 is
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
1
set as a setting value,
feeding upper limit value
<8 digits>
however, the feeding
(PFP upper drawer)
retry continues regardALL
0
M
1
Paper
Feeding retry counter
less of the counter set<8 digits>
feeding upper limit value
ting value.
(PFP lower drawer)
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
1
feeding upper limit value
<8 digits>
(Bypass feed)
ALL
0
M
1
Paper
Feeding retry counter
<8 digits>
feeding upper limit value
(LCF)
Counter Counter for period of toner
ALL
0
M
Counts up the period of
1
cartridge rotation time
<8 digits>
rotation time of the
toner cartridge.
1
Counter Counter for envelope
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON.
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
1
Data
HDD data overwriting type
ALL
3
SYS HDD data is cleared by
overwrite setting
<0-4>
overwriting the type of
kit
value set in this code.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1050
is installed.)
0: "00" overwriting only
1: "FF" overwriting
only
2: Random number
overwriting only
3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
ON)
4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
OFF)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 140
05/05

Code
1424

Classification
Data
overwrite
kit

1426

Data
overwrite
kit

1427

Data
overwrite
kit

1428

Data
overwrite
kit

1432

Network

1433

Network

1434

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
HDD data clearing type
ALL
3
SYS HDD data is cleared by
setting (forcible clearing)
<0-4>
overwriting the type of
value set in this code.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1050
is installed.)
0: "00" overwriting only
1: "FF" overwriting
only
2: Random number
overwriting only
3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
ON)
4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
OFF)
3
Forcible HDD data clearing ALL
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
3
Forcible NVRAM data all
ALL
When this code is perclearing
formed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
3
Forcible SRAM backup
ALL
When this code is perdata all clearing
formed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
1
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal mode
<0-1>
1: Mode for Private
Print
1
"Disable e-Filing" function
ALL
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no
<0-1>
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
1
"Disable local file save"
ALL
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no
function
<0-1>
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 141
05/05

Code

Classification

1484

Network

1485

Network

1486

Network

1487

Network

1488

Network

1489

Network

1491

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Authentication method of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disable
"Scan to Email
<0-2>
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
Setting whether use of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
1
Internet FAX is permitted
<0-1>
1: Permitted
or not when it is given an
authentication
Server setting for LDAP
ALL
0
SYS
2
user authentication
<04294967
295>
1
"From" address assignALL
0
SYS 0: "User name" + @ +
ment method when it is
<0-2>
"Domain name"
given an authentication
1: LDAP search
2: Use the address
registered in "From"
field of E-mail setting
ID setting of LDAP server
ALL
0
SYS
2
for "From" address assign<0ment
4294967
295>
Setting for "From" address
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
1
edit at "Scan to Email
<0-1>
1: Permitted
E-mail domain name
ALL
SYS 96+2 (delimiter) charac11
ter
ASCII sequence only

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 142

<<Pixel counter related code>> (Chap. 2.2.9)

Code
1500

Classification
Pixel
counter

1501

Pixel
counter

1502

Pixel
counter

1503

Pixel
counter

1504

Pixel
counter

1505

Pixel
counter

1506

Pixel
counter

1507

Pixel
counter

1508

Pixel
counter

1509

Pixel
counter

1510

Pixel
counter

1514

Pixel
counter

1518

Pixel
counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Standard paper size setting ALL
EUR: 0
SYS Selects the standard
1
UC: 1
paper size to convert it
JPN: 0
into the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1: LT
3
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
SYS Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
Service technician referALL
SYS Clears all information
3
ence counter clearing
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Clears all information
3
counter clearing
related to the toner cartridge reference pixel
counter.
1
Pixel counter display setALL
1
SYS Selects whether or not
ting
<0-1>
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
1
Displayed reference setALL
0
SYS Selects the reference
ting
<0-1>
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference
1: Toner cartridge reference
Toner empty determination
ALL
0
SYS Selects the counter to
1
counter setting
<0-1>
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
1
ALL
800
SYS Sets the number of outThreshold setting for toner
<0-999>
put pages to determine
empty determination
toner empty. This set(Output pages)
ting is valid when 0 is
set at 08-1506.
Threshold setting for toner
ALL
35100
SYS Sets the pixel count to
1
empty determination
<0determine the toner
(Pixel count)
60000>
empty status.
This setting is valid
when "1" is set at 081506.
ALL
0
SYS Becomes 1 when 082
Pixel counter clear flag/
<0-1>
1502 is performed.
Service technician reference
Service technician referALL
SYS Displays the date on
2
ence cleared date
which 08-1502 was performed.
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Displays the date on
2
cleared date
which 08-1503 was performed.
2
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Displays the date on
count started date
which 08-1503 was performed.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 143
05/12

Code

Classification

1548

Pixel
counter

1550

Pixel
counter

1551

Pixel
counter

1553

Pixel
counter

1555

Pixel
counter

1556

Pixel
counter

1566

Pixel
counter

1592

Pixel
counter

1593

Pixel
counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of output pages
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Toner cartridge reference)
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Toner cartridge reference)
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Toner cartridge reference)
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Toner cartridge replaceALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of
ment counter
time of the toner cartridge replacement.
Average pixel count
PPC
0
SYS Displays the average
(Service technician refer<0pixel count in the copy
ence)
10000>
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
SYS Displays the average
PRT
0
Average pixel count
pixel count in the printer
<0(Service technician referfunction and service
10000>
ence)
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
2

2
2

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 144

Code
1594

Classification
Pixel
counter

1595

Pixel
counter

1606

Pixel
counter

1607

Pixel
counter

1608

Pixel
counter

1613

Pixel
counter

1619

Pixel
counter

1624

Pixel
counter

1625

Pixel
counter

1634

Pixel
counter

1639

Pixel
counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
2
Average pixel count
FAX
0
SYS Displays the average
(Service technician refer<0pixel count in the FAX
ence)
10000>
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PPC/
0
SYS Displays the average
2
(Service technician referPRT/
<0pixel count in the copy/
ence)
FAX
10000>
printer/FAX function
and service technician
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
PPC
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
Latest pixel count
(Service technician refer<0count in the copy funcence)
10000>
tion and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
(Service technician refer<0count in the printer
ence)
10000>
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Latest pixel count
FAX
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
(Service technician refer<0count in the FAX funcence)
10000>
tion and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
SYS Displays the average
Average pixel count
PPC
0
pixel count in the copy
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0function and toner car10000>
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Average pixel count
PRT
0
SYS Displays the average
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0pixel count in the printer
10000>
function, and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PPC/
0
SYS Displays the average
2
(Toner cartridge reference) PRT/
<0pixel count in the copy/
FAX
10000>
printer/FAX function
and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
2
SYS Displays the average
Average pixel count
FAX
0
pixel count in the FAX
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0function and toner car10000>
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Latest pixel count
FAX
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
2
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0count in the FAX func10000>
tion and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Latest pixel count
PPC
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
2
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0count in the copy func10000>
tion and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 145

Code

Classification

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO200L/230/280>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0count in the printer
10000>
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel count
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
distribution
5.1-10%
PPC <8 digits> SYS are divided into 10
10.1-15%
PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of
output pages in each
15.1-20%
PPC <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In
20.1-25%
PPC <8 digits> SYS this code, the distribu25.1-30%
PPC <8 digits> SYS tions in the copy func30.1-40%
PPC <8 digits> SYS tion are displayed.
40.1-60%
PPC <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page]

1640

Pixel
counter

1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9

Pixel
counter

1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9

Pixel
counter

Pixel count
distribution

1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9

Pixel
counter

Pixel count
distribution

60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%

Procedure
2

14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

PPC
PPC

<8 digits>
<8 digits>

SYS
SYS

PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT

<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The pixel count data


are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed.
[Unit: page]

14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX

<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The pixel count data


are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed.
[Unit: page]

14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 146

<<PM support mode related code>>


The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
When 0 is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to 0.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 147
05/12

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits
1150-0 to 8

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151

Drum cleaning blade

1158-0 to 8

1159

Drum separation finger

1172-0 to 8

1173

Main charger grid

1174-0 to 8

1175

Needle electrode

1182-0 to 8

1183

Ozone filter

1198-0 to 8

1199

Developer material

1200-0 to 8

1201

Transfer charger wire

1214-0 to 8

1215

Separation charger wire

1224-0 to 8

1225

Fuser roller

1246-0 to 8

1247

Pressure roller

1250-0 to 8

1251

Items
Photoconductive drum

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1172
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1214
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1224
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1246
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1250
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 148
05/12

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Cleaning roller

1266-0 to 8

1267

Fuser roller separation


finger

1268-0 to 8

1269

Pickup roller (RADF)

1282-0,1,2,8

1283

Feed roller (RADF)

1284-0,1,2,8

1285

Separation roller
(RADF)

1286-0,1,2,8

1287

Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)

1290-0,1,2,8

1291

Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)

1292-0,1,2,8

1293

Pickup roller (LCF)

1294-0,1,2,8

1295

Feed roller
(Upper drawer)

1298-0,1,2,8

1299

Feed roller
(Lower drawer)

1300-0,1,2,8

1301

Feed roller (LCF)

1302-0,1,2,8

1303

Separation roller
(Upper drawer)

1306-0,1,2,8

1307

Separation roller
(Lower drawer)

1308-0,1,2,8

1309

Items

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1266
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1268
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1282
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1284
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1286
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1290
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1292
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1294
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1298
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1300
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1302
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1306
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1308
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 149
05/12

Items

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Separation roller (LCF)

1310-0,1,2,8

1311

Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1312-0,1,2,8

1313

Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1314-0,1,2,8

1315

Separation roller
(Bypass unit)

1316-0,1,2,8

1317

Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1320-0,1,2,8

1321

Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1322-0,1,2,8

1323

Feed roller
(Bypass unit)

1324-0,1,2,8

1325

Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1328-0,1,2,8

1329

Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1330-0,1,2,8

1331

Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)

1332-0,1,2,8

1333

Recovery blade

1336-0 to 8

1337

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1310
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1312
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1314
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1316
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1320
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1322
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1324
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1328
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1330
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1332
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1336
(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 150
05/12

<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>


(1)
(2)

Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in the code 257 with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.

Fig. 2-4

(3)

Key in the value 1 or 2 with the digital key and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)

Key in 1 to copy the value of the total


counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).

(A)

(B)

Fig. 2-5

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 151
05/12

Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup


counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).

(A)

(B)

Fig. 2-6

(4)

Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.

Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 152
05/12

2.2.8

Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)

The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).

Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed

[START]

[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub-code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Press [HELP] to enter -.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 153
07/11

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Setting)

[ENTER]
or
(HDD formatting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[Select icon]

Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(1st setting)

[START]

[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[Digital key]
(2nd setting)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

*1. Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter -, when entering telephone number.


*2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub-code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Adjustment value
cannot be changed

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 154
05/12

Notes:
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283: In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the
dataof each code is stored is indicated. M stands
for the LGC board, SYS, NIC and UTY stands
for the SYS board.

Code

Classification

200

General

201

General

202

User
interface

203

General

204

User
interface

205

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
5
Date and time setting
ALL
Year/month/date/day/
<13 dighour/minute/second
its>
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
Day - 0 is for
Sunday. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday
from 1 to 6.
1
Destination selection
ALL
EUR: 0
M
0: EUR
UC: 1
1: UC
JPN: 2
2: JPN
<0-2>
1
Counter installed externally ALL
0
M
0: No external counter
<0-3>
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
(This value is valid
only when 2 is set
to 08-201.)
3: Key copy counter
1
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
M
0: For factory ship<0-1>
ment
1: For line
* Field: 0 must be
selected
1
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
SYS Timer to return the
<0-10>
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:Set number x 15
sec.
1
SYS Timer to automatically
Auto power save mode
ALL
EUR: 11
switch to the Auto
timer setting
UC: 11
power save mode when
JPN: 6
the equipment has not
Others:
been used
11
0: Invalid
6: 3min.
<0, 6-15>
7: 4min.
8: 5min.
9: 7min.
10: 10min.
11: 15min.
12: 20min.
13: 30min.
14: 45min.
15: 60min.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 155
07/11

Code

Classification

206

User
interface

207

User
interface

209

User
interface

210

Paper
feeding

213

User
interface
User
interface

219

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Auto Shut Off Mode timer
ALL
Refer to
SYS Timer to turn OFF the
setting (Auto Shut Off
content
power or to enter the
Mode/Sleep Mode)
<0-20>
Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been
used
(Refer to 08-601)
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.
11: 80min.
12: 90min.
13: 100min.
14: 110min.
15: 120min.
16: 150min.
17: 180min.
18: 210min.
19: 240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO232/233/282/
283:
EUR: 7 UC: 9
JPN: 0
Others: 9
e-STUDIO202L/203L: 6
Highlighting display on
ALL
0
SYS 0: Black letter on white
1
LCD
<0-1>
background
1: White letter on black
background
1
Default setting of filing forALL
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
mat when E-mailing
<0-6>
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
5: XPS (Multi)
6: XPS (Single)
Paper size (A6-R) feeding/
PRT
148/105
M
10
widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Display of [REVERSE
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not displayed
1
ORDER] button
<0-1>
1: Displayed
1
Default setting of filing forSCN
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
mat when storing files
<0-6>
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
5: XPS (Multi)
6: XPS (Single)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 156
07/11

Code
220

Classification
User
interface

221

User
interface

224

Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding

225
226

Paper
feeding

227

Paper
feeding

228

Paper
feeding

229

Paper
feeding

230

Paper
feeding

231

Paper
feeding

232

Paper
feeding

233

Paper
feeding

234

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Language 1
power-ON
UC: 0
1: Language 2
JPN: 5
2: Language 3
<0-6>
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Language selection in UI
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Language 1
data at Web power ON
UC: 0
1: Language 2
JPN: 5
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
<0-6>
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Paper size for bypass feed PPC
UNDEF
SYS Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
Paper size for upper
ALL
EUR: A4
M
Press the button on the
drawer
UC: LT
LCD to select the size.
JPN: A4
M
Press the button on the
Paper size for lower
ALL
EUR: A3
LCD to select the size.
drawer
UC: LD
JPN: A3
Paper size for PFP upper
ALL EUR:
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
drawer
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
Paper size for PFP lower
ALL
EUR: A4
M
Press the button on the
drawer
UC: LG
LCD to select the size.
JPN: B4
Paper size (A3) feeding/
ALL
420/297
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (A4-R) feeding/
ALL
297/210
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (A5-R) feeding/
ALL
210/148
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (B4) feeding/
ALL
364/257
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (B5-R) feeding/
ALL
257/182
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (LT-R) feeding/
ALL
279/216
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1

9
9
9
9

9
10

10

10

10

10

10

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 157
05/11

Code

Classification

235

Paper
feeding

236

Paper
feeding

237

Paper
feeding

238

Paper
feeding

239

Paper
feeding

240

Paper
feeding

241

Paper
feeding

242

Paper
feeding

243

Paper
feeding

244

Paper
feeding

245

Paper
feeding

247

Paper
feeding

248

Paper
feeding

249

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
value>
Paper size (LD) feeding/
ALL
432/279
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (LG) feeding/
ALL
356/216
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (ST-R) feeding/
ALL
216/140
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (COMPUTER)
ALL
356/257
M
feeding/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (FOLIO) feedALL
330/210
M
ing/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (13 LG) feedALL
330/216
M
ing/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (8.5X8.5)
ALL
216/216
M
feeding/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (Non-standard)
ALL
432/279
SYS
feeding/widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Memory 1
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 1].
Paper size (8K) feeding/
ALL
390/270
M
widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Paper size (16K-R) feedALL
270/195
M
ing/widthwise direction
<182432/140297>
Memory 2
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 2].
Memory 3
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 3].
Memory 4
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type)
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
[MEMORY 4].

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 158
05/11

Code
250

Classification
Maintenance

251

Maintenance

252

Maintenance

253

Maintenance
Paper
feeding

254

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
11
Service technician teleALL
0
SYS A telephone number
phone number
<32 digcan be entered up to 32
its>
digits. Use the [Monitor/
Pause] button to enter a
hyphen (-).
1
Setting value of PM
ALL
Refer to
M
<Default>
counter
content
e-STUDIO200L
<8 digits>
UC, EUR: 64,000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO 230
UC, EUR: 74,000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO 280
UC, EUR: 90,000
JPN: 0
Current value of PM
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
1
counter Display/0 clearing
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON.
Error history display
ALL
SYS Displaying of the latest
2
20 errors data
1
LT <-> A4/LD <-> A3
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether the data is
<0-1>
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 159
05/11

Code

Classification

255

Paper
feeding

256

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
M
Sets the installation sta<0-4,
tus of the PFP or LCF,
16-20,
and also disables its
32-36>
functions and the lower
drawer of the equipment.
When "0" is set at 08477, specify the value
from 1 to 4 or 16 to 20,
and when "1" is set at
08-477, specify the
value only from 32 to
36.
0: Auto
When only the upper
drawer is installed as
the paper feeder of the
equipment.
1: PFP upper-drawer
type installed
2: PFP upper-drawer
and lower-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Disables PFP or
LCF
When the upper and
lower drawers are
installed as the paper
feeder of the equipment.
16: PFP and LCF not
installed
17: PFP upper-drawer
type installed
18: PFP upper-drawer
and lower-drawer
type installed
19: LCF installed
20: Disables functions
of PFP or LCF
Disables the lower
drawer when the upper
and lower drawers are
installed as the paper
feeder of the equipment.
32: PFP and LCF not
installed
33: PFP upper-drawer
type installed
34: PFP upper-drawer
and lower-drawer
type installed
35: LCF installed
36: Disables functions
of PFP or LCF
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
EUR: A4
M
Press the button on the
9
UC: LT
LCD to select the size.
JPN: A4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 160
05/11

Code

Classification

257

Counter

258

Maintenance

259

Network

260

Network

263

User
interface

264

Network

265

Network

266

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
dure
value>
Counter copy
ALL
1) Electrical counter
<1-2>
Backup counter
(NVRAM SRAM)
2) Backup counter
Electrical counter
(SRAM NVRAM)
(P. 2-260 "Fig. 2-7")
1
FSMS acceptance
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether the FSMS
<0-2>
connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (USB normal connection)
2: Accepted (USB
forcible connection)
1
Storage period trial and pri- PRT
14
SYS 0: No limits
vate
<0-35>
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
31: 1hour
32: 2hours
33: 4hours
34: 8hours
35: 12hours
1
Web data retention period
SCN
10
SYS When a certain period
<3 digits>
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
The password can be
11
Administrator's password
ALL
123456
entered in alphabets
(Maximum 10 digits)
<10
and figures (A-Z, a-z, 0digits>
9) within 10 digits.
File retention period
SCN
30
SYS 0: No limits
1
<0-999>
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
Maximum data capacity at
SCN
30
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
1
E-mailing
<2-30>
Maximum data capacity at
ALL
30
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
1
Internet FAX
<2-30>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 161
07/11

Code
267

270

271

272

273

274

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
ElecFull guarantee of docuALL
1
SYS Sets the file retention
tronic
ments in Electronic Filing
<0-1>
level when editing the
Filing
when HDD is full
files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained Retains the source
file until CutDoc/
SaveDoc command
is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the execution of command
when 1 is set.
Default value for user box
ALL
0
SYS Sets the data retention
Elec<0-999>
period when creating a
tronic Fil- retention period
user box.
ing
0: Not deleted
1 to 999: Retention
period (Unit: Day)
General Warning notification of the
ALL
90
SYS Sets the percentage of
File Share and e-Filling
<0-100>
HDD partition filled
partitions are filled
when warning notification is sent.
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
* Related code 08288
Scanning Notification setting of EALL
3
SYS Sets the days left the
mail saving time limit
<0-99>
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
Scanning Default setting of partial
ALL
0
SYS Sets the default value
size when transmitting E<0-6>
for the partial size of Email
mail to be transmitted
when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 64
2: 128
3: 256
4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
FAX
Default setting of page by
FAX
0
SYS Sets the default value
page when transmitting
<0-4>
for the page by page of
Internet FAX
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creating a template.
0: Not divide 1: 128
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 162
07/11

Code
276

Classification
User
interface

281

User
interface

283

User
interface

284

User
interface
User
interface

285

286

User
interface

288

General

290

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Default setting for density
SCN
0
SYS 0: Automatic density
adjustment
<0-11>
1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual density)
Default setting of resolution SCN
1
SYS 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi
<0-4>
2: 300 dpi 3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
Default setting of original
SCN
0
SYS 0: Text
mode
<0-3>
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
3: Gray scale
Default setting of scanning SCN
0
SYS 0: Single 1: Book
mode
<0-2>
2: Tablet
Default setting of rotation
SCN
0
SYS 0: 0 degree
angle of original
<0-3>
1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
Default setting of original
SCN
0
SYS 0: Automatic
paper size
<0-22>
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
8: LG
9: B4
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13LG
16: 8.5 x 8.5
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed
20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
Searching interval of deletALL
12
SYS Sets the search intering expired flies and check<1-24>
val of deleting expired
ing capacity of HDD
files and checking
partitions
capacity of HDD partition.
(Unit: Hour)
* Related code 08271
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1

1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 163
07/11

Code

Classification

291

Network

292

Network

293

Network

294

Network

295

Network

296

Network

297

Network

298

Network

299

Network

300

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
EUR: 6
SYS 0: LD
1: LG
(Paper size)
UC: 2
2: LT
3: COMP
JPN: 6
4: ST
5: A3
<0 -13>
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13LG
13: 8.5 x 8.5
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Plain paper
(Paper type)
<0-5>
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
5: Tab paper
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Portrait
(Paper direction)
<0-1>
1: Landscape
Raw printing job (Staple)
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Inner tray
(receiving tray)
<0-5>
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Not used
4: Job Separator
upper tray
5: Job Separator lower
tray
* The settings 4 and 5
are effective only
when the Job Separator (MJ-5004) is
installed.
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
SYS Sets the number of
(Number of form lines)
<500form lines from 5 to
12800>
128. (A hundredfold of
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
1000
SYS Sets the font pitch from
(PCL font pitch)
<440.44 to 99.99. (A hun9999>
dredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
SYS Sets the font size from
(PCL font size)
<4004 to 999.75. (A hun99975>
dredfold of the font size
is defined as the setting
value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL font num(PCL font number)
<0-79>
ber.
Maximum number of copy
PPC
0
SYS 0: 999
1: 99
volume (MAX9)
<0-2>
2: 9

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1
1

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 164
07/11

Code
302

305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16

Classification
User
interface

Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Original counter display
ALL
EUR: 2
SYS Sets whether the origiUC: 0
nal counter is disJPN: 0
played or not.
<0,2,4>
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
4: Displayed (Doublesized original is
counted as 2.)
A3
PPC
0
SYS Counts the output
Number of
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the copier
in copier func- A5
function for each paper
tion
size according to the
A6
setting for the count
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the printer
in printer func- A5
function for each paper
tion
size according to the
A6
setting for the count
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 165
07/11

Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages at the list print
at list print
mode for each paper
A5
mode
size according to the
A6
setting for the count
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the output
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX funcin FAX function for each paper size
A5
tion
according to the setting
A6
for the count setting of
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD

Procedure
4

LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 166
07/08

Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
A3
PPC
0
SYS Counts the scanning
Number of
<8 digits>
pages in the copier
scanning
A4
function for each paper
pages in
A5
size according to the
copier funcA6
setting for the count
tion
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
SCN
0
SYS Counts the scanning
Number of
<8 digits>
pages in the scanning
scanning
A4
function for each paper
pages in
A5
size according to the
scanning
A6
setting for the count
function
B4
setting of large-sized
B5
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
FOLIO
large-sized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 167
05/11

Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16

Classification
Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the scanning
scanning
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX funcA4
pages in FAX A5
tion for each paper size
function
according to the setting
A6
for the count setting of
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD

Number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
function

LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

FAX

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

0
<8 digits>

SYS

Counts the transmitted


pages in the FAX function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
paper (08-353).

Procedure
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 168
07/11

Code

Classification

316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0

Counter

Counter

320-1

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the received
received
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX funcA4
pages in FAX A5
tion for each paper size
function
according to the setting
A6
for the count setting of
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Large

PPC

0
<8 digits>

SYS

Counter

Small

PPC

0
<8 digits>

SYS

320-2

Counter

Total

PPC

0
<8 digits>

SYS

321-0

Counter

Large
Display of
number of
output pages
in printer function

PRT

0
<8 digits>

SYS

321-1

Counter

Small

PRT

0
<8 digits>

SYS

321-2

Counter

Total

PRT

0
<8 digits>

SYS

Display of
number of
output pages
in copier function

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Counts the number of


output pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
output pages in the
Printer Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.

Procedure
4

14

14

14

14

14

14

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 169
07/11

Code

Classification

322-0

Counter

322-1

Counter

322-2

Counter

323-0

Counter

323-1

Counter

323-2

Counter

327-0

Counter

327-1

Counter

327-2

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
14
Large
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
output pages at the List
number of
Print Mode Function
output pages
according to its size
at list print
(large/small).
mode
Large:
Number of output
Small
PRT
0
SYS
14
pages of large-sized
<8 digits>
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
Total
PRT
0
SYS
14
set as large-sized
<8 digits>
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Large
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
output pages in the FAX
number of
Function according to
output pages
its size (large/small).
in FAX funcLarge:
tion
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
PRT
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
PRT
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Display of
Large
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
number of
<8 digits>
scanning pages in the
scanning
Copier Function
pages in
according to its size
copier func(large/small).
tion
Large:
Number of output
Small
PPC
0
SYS
14
pages of large-sized
<8 digits>
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
Total
PPC
0
SYS
14
set as large-sized
<8 digits>
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 170
07/11

Code

Classification

328-0

Counter

328-1

Counter

328-2

Counter

329-0

Counter

329-1

Counter

329-2

Counter

330-0

Counter

330-1

Counter

330-2

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
14
Large
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
scanning pages in the
number of
FAX Function according
scanning
to its size (large/small).
pages in FAX
Large:
function
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Large
SCN
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
scanning pages in the
number of
Scanning Function
scanning
according to its size
pages in
(large/small).
scanning
Large:
function
Number of output
Small
SCN
0
SYS
14
pages of large-sized
<8 digits>
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
Total
SCN
0
SYS
14
set as large-sized
<8 digits>
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
Display of
Large
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
number of
<8 digits>
transmitted pages in the
transmitted
FAX Function according
pages in FAX
to its size (large/small).
function
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 171
07/11

Code

Classification

331

User
interface

332-0

Counter

332-1

Counter

332-2

Counter

335-0

Counter

335-1

Counter

335-2

Counter

337

Paper
feeding

338

Paper
feeding

339

Paper
feeding

340

Paper
feeding

341

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS Sets the screen to be
<0-5>
displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recovered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
4: Job Status
5: Template
14
Large
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
number of
<8 digits>
received pages in the
received
FAX Function according
pages in FAX
to its size (large/small).
function
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
Small
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper defined at 08<8 digits>
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
Total
FAX
0
SYS
14
paper
<8 digits>
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Large
ALL
0
SYS Displays the total num14
Display of
<8 digits>
ber of pages in the
total number
of pages
Small
ALL
0
SYS copier/printer/scanning/
14
FAX functions.
<8 digits>
Total
ALL
0
SYS
14
<8 digits>
Paper size (#10-R)
ALL
241/105
M
10
feeding/widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
Paper size (DL-R)
ALL
220/110
M
10
feeding/widthwise direction
<148432/105297>
ALL
191/98
M
10
Paper size (Envelope:
<148Monarch-R)
432/98feeding/widthwise direction
297>
ALL
235/120
M
10
Paper size (Envelope:
<148CHO-3-R)
432/105feeding/widthwise direction
297>
ALL
235/105
M
10
Paper size (Envelope:
<148YOU-4-R)
432/105feeding/widthwise direction
297>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 172
07/11

Code
342

Classification
User
interface

345

Counter

346

Counter

347

Counter

348

Counter

349

Counter

352

Counter

353

Counter

356

Counter

357

Counter

358

Counter

359

Counter

360

Counter

370

Counter

372

Counter

374

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
dure
value>
1
Displaying number of origi- PPC
0
SYS This setting is whether
nal pages placed on origi<0-1>
the number of pages of
nal glass
originals placed on the
original glass is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Count setting of envelope
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Count setting of largeALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
sized paper (PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
1
Definition setting of largeALL
1
M
0: A3/LD
sized paper (PM)
<0-1>
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
Count setting of thick paper
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Count setting of OHP film
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
1
Count setting of largeALL
JPN: 0
M
0: Counted as 1
sized paper
OTHER:
1: Counted as 2
(Fee charging system
1
2: Counted as 1
counter)
<0-2>
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
Definition setting of largeALL
0
M
0: A3/LD
1
sized paper
<0-1>
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
(Fee charging system
FOLIO/COMP/8K
counter)
Counter for upper drawer
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from upper
drawer
2
Counter for lower drawer
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from lower
drawer
Counter for bypass feeding ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
<8 digits>
sheets fed from bypass
feed
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
<8 digits>
sheets fed from LCF
Counter for PFP upper
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
drawer feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
Counter for PFP lower
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
2
drawer feeding
<8 digits>
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
2
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
<8 digits>
output pages of duplex
printing.
Counter for RADF
ALL
0
SYS Counts the number of
2
<8 digits>
originals fed from RADF

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 173
07/11

Code

Classification

381

Counter

390

Counter

391

Counter

392

Counter

393

Counter

398

Laser

399

Laser

400

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Setting for counter installed
ALL
1
M
Selects the job to count
externally
<0-7>
up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
Number of errors in HDD
PPC
0
SYS The number of error is
(Copier)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
Number of errors in HDD
FAX
0
SYS The number of error is
(FAX)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
Number of errors in HDD
SCN
0
SYS The number of error is
(Scanning)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
Number of errors in HDD
PRT
0
SYS The number of error is
(Printer)
<8 digits>
reset at HDD formatting.
Number of polygonal motor
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
rotational speed switching
<8 digits>
time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rotation and standby rotation.
Accumulated time of polyg- ALL
0
M
Accumulates the time
onal motor at normal rota<8 digits>
the polygonal motor has
tion
rotated at normal rotation.
Fuser unit error status
ALL
0
M
0: No error
counter
<0-19>
1: C410 (Once)
2: C410 (consecutively
occurred)
3: 4: C430
5: C440 6: C450
7: C440 8: C450
9: C440 10: C470
11: C470 12: C480
13: C490 14: C470
15: C480 16: C490
17: C470 18: C480
19: C490

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2
2
2
2
2

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 174
07/11

Code

Classification

404-0

Fuser

404-1
404-2
404-3
405-0

Fuser

405-1
405-2
405-3

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
The first
ALL
1
M
This code is valid only
Temperature
<0-10>
when 20 is set to 08drop setting in drop
886.
ready status
The secALL
1
M
Setting value x -5C:
(Center therond drop
<0-10>
from 0C to -50C
mistor)
The third
ALL
1
M

drop
The fourth
drop
Temperature
The first
drop setting in drop
ready status
The sec(Side therond drop
mistor)
The third
drop
The fourth
drop
Fuser roller temperature in
ready status
(Side thermistor)

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

<0-10>
1
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
8
<0-12>

4
4
4

407

Fuser

409

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature at


energy saver mode
(Center thermistor)

ALL

0
<0-13>

410

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature


during printing
(Center thermistor/Plain
paper)

ALL

8
<0-14>

411

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature on


standby
(Center thermistor)

ALL

8
<0-12>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure

0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
0: OFF
1: 40C
2: 50C 3: 60C
4: 70C 5: 80C
6: 90C 7: 100C
8: 110C 9: 120C
10: 130C
11: 140C
12: 150C
13: 160C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 175
07/11

Code

Classification

412

Fuser

413

Fuser

414

Developer

417

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 3)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
paper 1)
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Toner density life correcALL
0
M
0: Unchanged (Default)
tion switching
<0-7>
1: Approx. 0.3 wt%
higher
2: Approx. 0.6 wt%
higher
3: Approx. 0.9 wt%
higher
4: Approx. 0.2 wt%
lower
5: Approx. 0.4 wt%
lower
6: Approx. 0.6 wt%
lower
7: Approx. 0.9 wt%
lower
Pre-running time for first
ALL
10
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Thick paper 3)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 176
07/11

Code

Classification

424-0

Fuser

424-1
424-2

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Temperature
The first
ALL
15
M
This code is valid only
drop switching drop
<2-60>
when 20 is set to 08time setting in The sec886.
ALL
15
M
ready status
Setting value x 1 min.:
ond drop
<2-60>
(Center therfrom 2 to 60 min. later
The third
ALL
15
M
mistor)
drop
<2-60>

424-3
425-0

Fuser

425-1
425-2

Temperature
drop switching
time setting in
ready status
(Side thermistor)

425-3
433-0

Fuser

433-1

Temperature
control lower
limit
(Plain paper/
at ordinary
temperature)

The fourth
drop
The first
drop
The second drop
The third
drop
The fourth
drop
Center
thermistor

ALL

Side thermistor

Procedure
4
4
4

15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
15
<2-60>
7
<0-12>

ALL

5
<0-12>

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

437

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature


during printing
(Center thermistor /Thick
paper 2)

ALL

8
<0-14>

438

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature


during printing
(Center thermistor/OHP
film)

ALL

8
<0-14>

439

Fuser

Pre-running time for first


printing
(Thick paper 2)

ALL

10
<0-15>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

0: 130C 1: 135C
2: 140C 3: 145C
4: 150C 5: 155C
6: 160C 7: 165C
8: 170C 9: 175C
10: 180C
11: 185C
12: 120C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 177
07/11

Code

Classification

440

Fuser

441

Fuser

448

Fuser

449
450

Paper
feeding
Fuser

451

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Plain paper)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Thick paper 1)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Fuser roller temperature in
ALL
0
M
0: OFF
1: 40C
Energy Saving Mode
<0-13>
2: 50C 3: 60C
(Side thermistor)
4: 70C 5: 80C
6: 90C 7: 100C
8: 110C 9: 120C
10: 130C
11: 140C
12: 150C
13: 160C
Incorrect paper size jam
ALL
0
M
0: Enabled
detection switching
<0-1>
1: Disabled
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Plain
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 1)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 178
07/11

Code

Classification

452

Fuser

453

Fuser

455

Image
processing

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 2)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
8
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/OHP film)
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Toner supply amount corALL
0
M
Corrects the supply
rection/Toner motor control
<0-5>
amount of the fresh
toner (driving period of
the toner motor) into the
developer unit.
0: x1.0
1: x0.75
2: x0.5
3: x0.3
4: x2.0
5: x1.5

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 179
07/11

Code

Classification

462

RADF

463-0

Paper
feeding

463-1

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Setting for switchback
ALL
0
M
This setting is whether
operation in mixed-size
<0-2>
the original length is
copying using RADF
detected or not by
transporting without
scanning in reverse
when A4-R/FOLIO
paper or LT-R/LG paper
is detected in a mixedsize copying.
0: Disabled AMS:
A series - Judges as
A4-R without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by its length
without transporting
in reverse with no
scanning.
APS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO without
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Enable 1
AMS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO by transporting without scanning
in reverse to detect
its length.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by transporting
without scanning in
reverse to detect its
length.
APS:
The same as that of
APS in 0: Disabled.
2: Enable 2
AMS/APS:
The same as that of
AMS in 1: Enable 1.
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
Sets the number of
number setpaper
<0-5>
times of the feeding
ting
retry from the upper
Others
ALL
5
M
(upper
drawer.
<0-5>
drawer)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

4
4

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 180
07/11

Code
464-0

Classification
Paper
feeding

464-1
465-0

Paper
feeding

465-1
466-0

Paper
feeding

466-1
467-0

Paper
feeding

467-1
468-0

Paper
feeding

468-1

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
value>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
Sets the number of
number setpaper
<0-5>
times of the feeding
ting (lower
retry from the lower
Others
ALL
5
M
drawer)
drawer.
<0-5>
Feeding retry
number setting
(PFP upper
drawer)
Feeding retry
number setting
(PFP lower
drawer)
Feeding retry
number setting
(bypass feed)
Feeding retry
number setting
(LCF)

Plain
paper
Others
Plain
paper
Others
Plain
paper
Others
Plain
paper
Others

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
148/100
<148432/100297>
Refer to
content
<0-1>
0
<0-1>

4
4

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.

Sets the number of


times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.

Postcard is supported only for JPN


model.

10

<Default value>
Lower drawer model: 0
Upper drawer model: 1
Displays the error
[CA10] when the set
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times 1: 12 times
0: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 2.2 sec.
0: A4/LT 1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer

M
M
M
M
M
M

471

Paper
feeding

Paper size (Postcard)


feeding/widthwise direction

ALL

477

General

Machine identification
information

ALL

478

Laser

Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error


(Normal rotation)

ALL

479

Laser

Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error


(At acceleration/deceleration)

ALL

0
<0-1>

480

Paper
feeding

Default setting of paper


source

PPC

0
<0-5>

SYS

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 181
07/11

Code

Classification

481

Paper
feeding

482
483

Paper
feeding
Laser

484

Laser

485

Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Automatic change of paper PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
source
<0-2>
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direction and size: ex. A4
to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. 1 is
applied when the
staple/hole-punch is
specified.)
Feeding retry setting
ALL
0
M
0: ON
1
<0-1>
1: OFF
1
Pre-running rotation of
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
polygonal motor
<0-2>
switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the original is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the original is set manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using
RADF only)
1
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
Polygonal motor rotational
<0-1>
switching the polygonal
status switching at the Auto
motor from the normal
Clear Mode
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid 1: Invalid
1
Rotational status of polygo- ALL
1
SYS Sets the rotational stanal motor on standby
<0-1>
tus of polygonal motor
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at
08-490.)
1: Stopped

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 182
07/11

Code

Classification

486

Laser

488

Laser

489

Laser

490

Laser

491

Transfer

492

Transfer

493

Transfer

502

Image

503

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Timing of auto-clearing of
ALL
0
SYS Switches the polygonal
polygonal motor pre-run<0-2>
motor to the standby
ning rotation
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the prerunning. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effective when 0 or 2
is set at 08-483.
Setting of polygonal motor
ALL
0
M
Set the type of polygotype
<0-3>
nal motor.
0: 2-clock type
1: 3-clock type
2: 4-clock type
3: 4-clock type
Polygonal motor rotation
ALL
5
M
0: 38,090.55 rpm
number on standby
<0-5>
1: 35,000 rpm
2: 30,000 rpm
3: 25,000 rpm
4: 20,000 rpm
5: 10,000 rpm
Polygonal motor rotation in
ALL
0
M
0: Stopped
the energy saving mode
<0-1>
1: 10,000 rpm
Transfer charger bias corALL
149
M
Corrects the transfer
rection (H) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Transfer charger bias corALL
139
M
Corrects the transfer
rection (C) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the center area
of paper at duplexing.
Transfer charger bias corALL
128
M
Corrects the transfer
rection (L) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the trailing
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Error diffusion and dither
PPC
1
SYS Sets the image reprosetting at photo mode
<0-1>
duction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
Default setting of density
PPC
0
SYS 0: Automatic
adjustment
<0-1>
1: Manual (Center)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 183
07/11

Code

Classification

508

Image

509

Image

515

Fuser

516

Fuser

518

Fuser

520

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Custom Mode setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: Not used
<0-3>
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo is
set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set as
a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
Error diffusion and dither
PPC
1
SYS Switches the image
setting at a photo mode
<0-1>
processing method
(Custom Mode)
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
Temperature setting of
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
warming-up
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Center thermistor)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Temperature setting of
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
warming-up
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor)
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Thick
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 3)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/Enve4: 160C 5: 165C
lope)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 184
07/11

Code

Classification

521

Fuser

523

Fuser

525-0

Fuser

525-1
525-2
525-3
526

Fuser

527-0

Fuser

527-1
527-2
527-3

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Fuser roller temperature
ALL
9
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Side thermistor/Envelope)
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Pre-running time for first
ALL
10
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Envelope)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
The first
ALL
20
M
This code is valid only
Temperature
drop switching drop
<0-200>
when 20 is set to 08535.
time setting
The secALL
38
M
during printing ond drop
Setting value x 5 sec.:
<0-200>
from 0 to 1,000 sec.
(Center therThe third
ALL
75
M
later
mistor)
drop
<0-200>
The fourth
ALL
75
M
drop
<0-200>
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.
printing (OHP film)
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
The first
ALL
20
M
This code is valid only
Temperature
<0-200>
when 20 is set to 08drop switching drop
535.
time setting
The secALL
30
M
Setting value x 5 sec.:
during printing ond drop
<0-200>
from 0 to 1,000 sec.
(Side therThe third
ALL
48
M
later
mistor)
drop
<0-200>
The fourth
ALL
75
M
drop
<0-200>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

4
4
4
4
1

4
4
4
4

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 185
07/11

Code

Classification

535

Fuser

536-0

Fuser

536-1
536-2
536-3
537-0

Fuser

537-1
537-2
537-3

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Temperature drop control
ALL
2
M
0: None
setting during printing
<0-20>
1: Pattern 1
(Temperature/Time)
2: Pattern 2
3: Pattern 3
4: Pattern 4
5: Pattern 5
6: Pattern 6
7: Pattern 7
8: Pattern 8
9: Pattern 9
10: Pattern 10
11: Pattern 11
12: Pattern 12
13: Pattern 13
14: Pattern 14
15: Pattern 15
16: Pattern 16
17: Pattern 17
18: Pattern 18
19: Pattern 19
20: Manual adjustment
Temperature
The first
ALL
1
M
This code is valid only
drop setting
drop
<0-10>
when 20 is set to 08535.
during printing The secALL
2
M
(Center therSetting value x -5C:
ond drop
<0-10>
from 0C to -50C
mistor)
The third
ALL
3
M

drop
The fourth
drop
The first
Temperature
drop
drop setting
during printing The sec(Side therond drop
mistor)
The third
drop
The fourth
drop
Default setting of original
mode

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

550

Image

601

User
interface
User
interface

Setting for the Energy Saving Mode


Screen setting for Auto
power Save Mode and
Auto Shut OFF Mode

ALL

User
interface

Setting for automatic


duplexing mode

PPC

602

603

PPC

ALL

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

<0-10>
3
<0-10>
1
<0-10>
2
<0-10>
3
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
0
<0-3>

0
<0-1>
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 1
<0-1>
0
<0-3>

Procedure
1

4
4
4

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

0: Text/Photo
1: Photo 2: Text
3: Custom Mode
0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1: Sleep Mode
0: OFF
1: ON

0: Invalid
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 186
07/11

Code
604

Classification
User
interface

605

User
interface

607

User
interface

610

User
interface
User
interface

611

612

General

613

User
interface

614

Network

615

General

617

User
interface

618

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Default setting for APS/
PPC
0
SYS 0: APS (Automatic
1
AMS
<0-2>
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
PPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
Centering printing of pri<0-1>
mary/secondary direction
at AMS
Default setting of RADF
PPC
0
SYS 0: Continuous feeding
1
mode
<0-1>
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
Key touch sound of control
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
panel
<0-1>
1: ON
Book type original priority
PPC
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
1
<0-1>
page
1: Right page to left
page
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not summer time
1
<0-1>
1: Summer time
Paper size selection for
PPC EUR:
SYS Press the button on the
9
[OTHER] button
FOLIO
LCD to select the size.
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
1
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
6
SYS Sets the period of time
<1-50>
when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or parallel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
-50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)
Size information of main
ALL
SYS Displays the sizes of
2
memory and page memory
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each memory is properly recognized.
Print setting without
ALL
1
SYS 0: Printed
1
department code
<0-2>
1: Not printed (pooled
in the invalid queue)
2: Deleted forcibly
0
SYS 0: Scanned as all in
1
Default setting when mixed PPC
<0-1>
same size
size originals are set on
1: Scanned as each
RADF
original size

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 187
07/11

Code
619

620
621
622
623
624
625

627
628
629
633

634
636

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
Paper
Time lag before Auto Job
ALL
4
SYS Sets the time taken to
feeding Start of bypass feeding
<0-10>
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5 sec.
User
Department management
PPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (Copier)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
FAX
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (FAX)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
PRT
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (Printer)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
SCN
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (Scanner)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Department management
PRT
1
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (List print)
<0-1>
1: Valid
User
Blank copying prevention
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
interface mode during RADF jam<0-1>
1: ON (Start printing
ming
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
User
Rotation printing at the
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not rotating
interface non-sorting
<0-1>
1: Rotating
User
Direction priority of original PPC
0
SYS 0: Automatic
interface image
<0-1>
1: Portrait
User
Department management
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting
<0-1>
1: Valid
Data
Releasing F200 service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not used
overwrite call
<0-2>
1: Board installed
kit
(GP-1060)
2: Service call
User
Inner receiving tray priority
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal
interface at Non-sort Mode
<0-1>
1: Inner receiving tray
PPC
0
SYS 0: ON
User
Width setting for image
<0-1>
1: OFF
interface shift copying (linkage of
front side and back side)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 188
07/11

Code

Classification

638

General

640

User
interface

641

User
interface

642

User
interface

645

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Time differences
ALL
EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
UC: 40
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
JPN: 6
4: +10.0h 5: +9.5h
<0-47>
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25: -0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h
45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h
47: -11.5h
Date display format
ALL
EUR: 1
SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD.
UC: 2
1: DD.MM.YYYY
JPN: 0
2: MM.DD.YYYY
<0-2>
Automatic Sorting Mode
PPC
2
SYS 0: Invalid 1: STAPLE
setting (RADF)
<0-4>
2: SORT 3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Default setting of Sorter
PPC
0
SYS 0: NON-SORT
Mode
<0-4>
1: STAPLE
2: SORT 3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
SYS Sets the reproduction
ratio in editing copy
<0-10>
ratio for the X in 1
printing (including magazine sort) to the
Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio.
0: 90%
1: 91%
2: 92%
3: 93%
4: 94%
5: 95%
6: 96%
7: 97%
8: 98%
9: 99%
10: 100%

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 189
07/11

Code

Classification

646

User
interface

648

User
interface

649

User
interface

650

User
interface
User
interface

651

652
653
657
658

User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
dure
value>
1
Image position in editing
PPC
2
SYS Sets the page pasted
<0-3>
position for X in 1 to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Cornering
1: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Cornering
2: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Centering
3: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Centering
1
Returning finisher tray
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
when printing is finished
<0-1>
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
1
<0-1>
page
1: Right page to left
page
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating PPC
0
SYS 0: Horizontal
1
order setting
<0-1>
1: Vertical
Printing format setting for
PPC
2
SYS Hyphen
1
Time stamp and Page
<0-3>
(with page number)
Number
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
Cascade operation setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
1
<0-1>
Cascade operation setting
PRT
0
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
1
<0-1>
Direction priority for date
PPC
0
SYS 0: Short edge
1
and time stamp printing
<0-1>
1: Long edge
1
Auto Job Start setting for
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether or not
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 190
07/11

Code
659

Classification
User
interface

660

Network

661

Network

662

General

666

General

667

General

670

General

671
672

User
interface
General

673

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Auto Job start setting for
PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Auto-forwarding setting of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
received FAX
<0-1>
1: Valid
Auto-forwarding setting of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
received E-mail
<0-1>
1: Valid
Clearing of SMS partition
ALL
SYS Clears SMS partition.
3
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
/SHR partition clearing
ALL
SYS Initializes the Elec3
tronic Filing.
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
SYS Initializes the shared
3
folder.
HDD diagnostic menu disALL
SYS Display the HDD infor2
play
mation
Size indicator
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
<0-1>
1: Valid
3
Initialization of department
SYS Initializing of the departmanagement information
ment management
information
* Key in the code and
press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the
initialization. If the
area storing the
department management information is destroyed for
some reason, Enter
Department Code
is displayed on the
control panel even if
the department
management function is not set on. In
this case, initialize
the area with this
code. This area is
normally initialized
at the factory.
1
Trial period setting
PRT/
254
SYS Sets the trial period
SCN
<1-60>
from 1 to 60 days. This
setting is effective only
when the default value
is 254. Once the
default value is set, this
value is only used for a
reference.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 191
07/11

Code

Classification

678

General

679

General

680

General

681

General

682
683

User
interface
General

684
685

General
General

686

General

689

FAX

690

General

691

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Setting of banner advertisALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not dising display
<0-1>
playing the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is displayed alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Banner advertising display
ALL
SYS Maximum 27 letters
11
1
(one-byte character)
Banner advertising display
ALL
SYS Maximum 27 letters
11
2
(one-byte character)
1
Display of [BANNER MESALL
0
SYS 0: Not displayed
SAGE] button
<0-1>
1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679) and Banner advertising display 2 (08-680) on
the control panel.
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1
<0-1>
1: Valid
1
Duplex printing setting
ALL
1
SYS When the duplex printwhen coin controller is
<0-1>
ing is short paid with a
used
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is considered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this setting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
Rebuilding all databases
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases.
3
Rebuilding all databases
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases
3
related to address book
related to the Address
Book.
Rebuilding all databases
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases
3
related to log
related to the log.
Adaptation of paper source
FAX
0
SYS 0: Not subjected for
1
priority selection
<0-1>
APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS 2: Normal formatting
7
<2>
HDD type display
ALL
SYS 0: Not formatted
7
<0-2>
1: Not used
2: Normal format

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 192
07/11

Code
692

Classification
Maintenance

693

General

694
695

General
General

696

Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding

697

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Performing panel calibraALL
SYS Performs the calibration
tion
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Initialization of NIC inforALL
SYS Returns the value to the
mation
factory shipping default
value.
Performing HDD testing
ALL
SYS Checks the bad sector.
Notifying condition of trial
PRT/
3
SYS Sets when the end of
period end
SCN
<0-59>
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
Installation of scrambler
ALL
0
0: Not installed
board (Option)
<0-1>
1: Installed
Paper type priority

PPC

1
<1-2>

SYS

698

Scrambler
board

Entering the key code for


scrambler board

ALL

699

Scrambler
board
FAX

Erasing all data in HDD

ALL

Destination setting for FAX

FAX

EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>

SYS

701

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Sets the paper type priority during copying.


1: Plain paper
2: Thick paper 1
Start up this code and
have the user enter the
key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code cannot be set again on
security grounds.
This setting is effective
only when the scrambler board is installed.
0: Japan
1: Asia
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany 6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan

Procedure
1

3
3
1

2
1

3
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 193
07/11

Code
702

703
704-0

704-1

707

710

711
715
716
717
718

719
720

721

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
2
SYS 0: Valid (Remote-con1
nance
function
<0-2>
trolled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
11
nance
HTTP server
URL setting
User
Interruption of Copying
ALL
1
SYS 0: Continues printing
4
interface stapling oper<0-1>
by switching sort
ation (no stasetting
ple)
1: Interrupts printing
ALL
1
SYS 0: Continues printing
4
Printing /
<0-1>
by switching sort
BOX printsetting
ing
1: Interrupts printing
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
11
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL https://
nance
HTTP initially-registered
device.
server
mfpURL setting
support.
com:443/
device/
firstregist.
ashx
1
ALL
24
SYS Sets the time interval to
Mainte- Short time interval setting
<1-48>
recover from the Emerof recovery from Emernance
gency Mode to the Nor(Remote) gency Mode
mal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
Mainte- Short time interval setting
ALL
60
SYS Unit: Minute
1
nance
of Emergency Mode
<30-360>
(Remote)
ALL
1230
SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
1
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: Prohibited
1
nance
Writing data of self-diag<0-1>
1: Accepted
nostic code
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
3
SYS Unit: Minute
1
nance
response waiting time
<1-30>
(Timeout)
1
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
nance
initial registration
<0-3>
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
3: Satellite communiction starts
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
SYS Maximum 10 letters
11
nance
tentative password
Mainte- Status of remote-conALL
0
SYS 0: Not registered
2
nance
trolled service initial regis<0-1>
1: Registered
tration
(Display only)
1
Mainte- Service center call function ALL
2
SYS 0: OFF
nance
<0-2>
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 194
07/11

Code
723
726
727

Classification
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance

728

Maintenance

729

Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)

730
731
732

733
734
738
739
740
741
742
743
744

745

746

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Service center call
ALL
SYS Maximum 256 letters
HTTP server URL setting
HTTP proxy setting
ALL
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid
HTTP proxy IP address
ALL
SYS 000.000.000.000setting
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
SYS
HTTP proxy port number
ALL
0
setting
<065535>
HTTP proxy ID setting
ALL
SYS Maximum 30 letters
HTTP proxy password setting
HTTP proxy panel display
Automatic ordering function of supplies

Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)

Automatic ordering function of supplies


FAX number
Automatic ordering function of supplies
E-mail address
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's name
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's telephone number
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's E-mail address
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's address
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service number
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service technician's name
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service technician's telephone number
Mainte- Automatic ordering funcnance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Service technician's E-mail
address
Mainte- Automatic ordering funcnance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Supplier's name

Procedure
11
1
11

1
11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 30 letters

11

ALL

1
<0-1>
3
<0-3>

SYS

0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

Maximum 50 letters

11

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits

ALL

SYS

Maximum 100 letters

11

ALL

0
<5 digits>

SYS

Maximum 5 digits

11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 50 letters

11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button

11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 192 letters


List: 256 digits

11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 50 letters

11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

11
11

11

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 195
07/11

Code
747
748
758
759
760
765

Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)

767

Maintenance
(Remote)

768

Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance

769
770
771
772
773

Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS Maximum 100 letters
tion of supplies
Supplier's address
ALL
SYS Maximum 128 letters
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Notes
ALL
SYS Maximum 20 digits
Information about supplies
Part number of toner cartridge
Information about supplies
ALL
1
SYS
Order quantity of toner car<1-99>
tridge
ALL
1
SYS
Information about supplies
<1-99>
Condition number of toner
cartridge
Automatic ordering supALL
EUR: 2
SYS 0: Valid (FAX/Internet
plies
UC: 0
FAX)
Display
JPN: 2
1: Valid (FAX/Internet
<0-2>
FAX/HTTP)
2: Invalid
Service Notification setting
ALL
0
SYS Enables to set up to 3
<0-2>
E-mail addresses to be
sent.(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
Destination E-mail address ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters

11
11
1
1
1

11

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

Total counter transmission


date setting

ALL

0
<0-31>

SYS

0 to 31

PM counter notification setting

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

Dealer's name

ALL

SYS

11

Login name

ALL

SYS

EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>

SYS

Maximum 100 letters


Needed at initial registration
Maximum 20 letters
Needed at initial registration
0: Not displayed
1: displayed
0: Invalid
1: Valid

Mainte- Display setting of [Service


nance
Notification] button
(Remote)

ALL

775

Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)

Sending error contents of


equipment

ALL

Setting total counter transmission interval


(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Destination E-mail address
2

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

777

11

Total counter information


transmission setting

774

776

Procedure

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

SYS

11
1

1
Maximum 192 letters

11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 196
07/11

Code
778
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
794
796
797
798

Classification

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Destination E-mail address
ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
3

Maintenance
(Remote)
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Day-1
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Day-2
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Day-3
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Day-4
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Sunday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Monday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Tuesday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Wednesday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Thursday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Friday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
polling day selection
Saturday
Mainte- Information of supplies setnance
ting of toner cartridge
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance
lengthened interval polling
(End of month)
Mainte- Firmware download
nance
General Notifying address of trial
period end

Procedure
11

0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: Invalid
1: Valid

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid

ALL

0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid

0
<0-1>
3
<0-3>

SYS

0: Accepted
1: Prohibited
Sets where the end of
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF 1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center

ALL

0
<0-31>

SYS

ALL

0
<0-31>

SYS

ALL

0
<0-31>

SYS

ALL

0
<0-31>

SYS

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

ALL

0
<0-1>

ALL

ALL
ALL
PRT/
SCN

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

SYS

SYS

1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 197
07/11

Code

Classification

799

General

800-0

Fuser

800-1

801-0

Fuser

801-1

802-0

Fuser

802-1

803-0

Fuser

803-1

804-0

804-1

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/
SYS [CANCEL]: Cancel
SCN
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the Forcible end
of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
limit
4: 150C
5: 155C
(OHP film)
6: 160C
7: 165C
8: 170C
9: 175C
Side
ALL
6
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
control lower
4: 150C
5: 155C
limit
6: 160C
7: 165C
(Thick paper
8: 170C
9: 175C
1)
Side
ALL
6
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
control lower
4: 150C
5: 155C
limit
6: 160C
7: 165C
(Thick paper
8: 170C
9: 175C
2)
Side
ALL
9
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
Temperature
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
control lower
4: 150C
5: 155C
limit
6: 160C
7: 165C
(Thick paper
8: 170C
9: 175C
3)
Side
ALL
10
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
Temperature
Center
ALL
8
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
limit
4: 150C
5: 155C
(Envelope)
6: 160C
7: 165C
8: 170C
9: 175C
Side
ALL
10
M
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
3

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 198
07/11

Code

Classification

805

Charger

806

Charger

807

Charger

808

Charger

809

Charger

826

Charger

830

Transfer

831

Separation

833

Developer

834

Developer

835

Developer

836

Developer

837

Developer

838

Image
processing
Image
processing

839

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Main charger bias correcPRT
98
M
Corrects the value of
tion
<0-255>
the main charger bias
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
adjustment (05-210).
Main charger bias correcPRT
98
M
tion
<0-255>
(Toner Saving Mode/OHP
film)
PPC
98
M
Main charger bias correc<0-255>
tion
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
Main charger bias correcPPC
98
M
tion
<0-255>
(Text/OHP film)
Main charger bias correcPPC
98
M
tion
<0-255>
(Photo/OHP film)
PRT
128
M
Main charger bias correc<0-255>
tion
(Toner saving mode)
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (C)
<0-255>
the transfer transformer DC output
adjustment (05-221).
Separation transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (C)
<0-255>
the separation transformer DC output
adjustment (05-234).
Developer bias DC correcPRT
108
M
Corrects the value of
tion
<0-255>
the developer bias
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
adjustment (05-205).
Developer bias DC correcPRT
108
M
tion
<0-255>
(Toner Saving Mode/OHP
film)
PPC
108
M
Developer bias DC correc<0-255>
tion
(Text/Photo/OHP film)
Developer bias DC correcPPC
108
M
tion
<0-255>
(Text/OHP film)
Developer bias DC correcPPC
108
M
tion
<0-255>
(Photo/OHP film)
Switching of recycled toner
ALL
0
M
0: Switched
saving control
<0-1>
1: Not switched
Correction by temperature/
humidity

ALL

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

0
<0-3>

Sets the correction by


temperature/humidity.
0: All valid
1: All invalid
2: Valid only in autotoner sensor
3: All valid except
transfer and separation

Procedure
1
1

1
1
1
1
1

1
1

1
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 199
07/11

Code

Classification

849

General

859

Developer

860

Developer

861

Developer

862

Developer

863

Developer

864

Charger

865

Charger

866

Charger

867

Charger

868

Transfer

869

Transfer

870

Separation

871

Separation

872

Laser

873

Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Power source setting for
ALL
SAD: 1
M
0: Other than SAD
destination
Others: 0
1: SAD
<0-1>
PRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
Developer bias DC correc<0-255>
the developer bias
tion
adjustment (05-205).
(Toner saving mode)
Developer bias DC correcPRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Normal)
<0-255>
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Developer bias DC correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Text/Photo)
<0-255>
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Developer bias DC correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Text)
<0-255>
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Developer bias DC correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Photo)
<0-255>
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Main charger bias correcPRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Normal)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Text/Photo)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Text)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
tion (Photo)
<0-255>
the main charger bias
adjustment
(05-210).
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (H)
<0-255>
the transfer transformer DC output
adjustment (05-220).
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (L)
<0-255>
the transfer transformer DC output
adjustment (05-222).
Separation transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (H)
<0-255>
the separation transformer DC output
adjustment (05-233).
Separation transformer DC
ALL
128
M
Corrects the value of
correction (L)
<0-255>
the separation transformer DC output
adjustment (05-235).
Laser power correction
PRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Normal)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Text/Photo)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 200
07/11

Code

Classification

875

Laser

876

Laser

877

Laser

886

Fuser

896-0

Fuser

896-1

900

Version

903
905
907
908
915
920

Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version

921
922

Version
Version

923

Version

924

Version

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Laser power correction
PRT
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Toner saving mode)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Text)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Laser power correction
PPC
128
M
Corrects the value of
(Photo)
<0-255>
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Temperature drop control
ALL
2
M
0: None
setting in ready status
<0-20>
1: Pattern 1
(Temperature/Time)
2: Pattern 2
3: Pattern 3
4: Pattern 4
5: Pattern 5
6: Pattern 6
7: Pattern 7
8: Pattern 8
9: Pattern 9
10: Pattern 10
11: Pattern 11
12: Pattern 12
13: Pattern 13
14: Pattern 14
15: Pattern 15
16: Pattern 16
17: Pattern 17
18: Pattern 18
19: Pattern 19
20: Manual adjustment
Temperature
Center
ALL
7
M
0: 130C
1: 135C
control lower
themistor
<0-12>
2: 140C
3: 145C
limit
4: 150C
5: 155C
(Plain paper/
6: 160C
7: 165C
Low tempera- Side
8: 170C
9: 175C
ALL
5
M
ture)
10: 180C
themistor
<0-12>
11: 185C
12: 120C
System firmware ROM ver- ALL
JPN: T377SY0JXXX
sion
UC: T377SY0UXXX
EUR: T377SY0EXXX
Others: T377SY0XXXX
Engine ROM version
ALL
377M-XXX
Scanner ROM version
ALL
377S-XXX
RADF ROM version
ALL
DF-XXXX
Finisher ROM version
ALL
SDL-XX FIN-XX
Fax board ROM version
FAX
F562-XXX
FROM basic section softALL
VX.XX/X.XX
ware version
FROM internal program
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
UI data fixed section verALL
VXXX.XXX X
sion
UI data common section
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
version
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 1 in HDD

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 201
07/11

Code
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
944

945
947

949

950

953

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 2 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 3 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 4 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 5 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 6 in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at powerON
Version Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
guage 7 in HDD
Version Web data whole version
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 1
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 2
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 3
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 4
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 5
Version Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2
Version: Language 6
Version HD version
ALL
JPN: T377HD0JXXX
2
UC: T377HD0UXXX
EUR: T377HD0EXXX
Others: T377HD0XXXX
Network Two-way setting of
ALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
12
RawPort 9100
<1-2>
2: Invalid
General Initialization after software
ALL
Perform this code when
3
version upgrade
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
General Automatic interruption
ALL
0
SYS Sets the number of
1
page setting during printing
<0-100>
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
1
Start-up method of ElecALL
0
SYS Sets the start-up
Elec<0-2>
method of the Electronic Fil- tronic Filing
tronic Filing.
ing
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up (Not
recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
User
Access code entry for
ALL
0
SYS 0: Renewed automati1
interface Electronic Filing printing
<0-1>
cally
1: Enter every time

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 202
07/11

Code
954

969
970
972
973

975

976

977
978

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
1
User
Clearing timing for files and
ALL
1
SYS 0: Immediately after
interface Electronic Filing Agent
<0-1>
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
User
Error sound
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
interface
<0-1>
1: ON
SYS 0: OFF
1
ALL
JPN: 0
User
Sound setting when
1: ON
Other: 1
interface switching to Energy Saving
<0-1>
Mode
User
Enables/disables the disALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1
<0-1>
1: Enabled
interface play that the toner is nearly
empty
Network PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL line feed
1
<0-3>
code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
1
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether pause or
General Job handling when print<0-1>
stop the printing job
ing is short paid with coin
when it is short paid
controller
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
1
ElecEquipment name and user
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
tronic Fil- name setting to a folder
<0-2>
adding the equipment
ing
when saving files
name and user name to
the folder when saving
files.
0: Not add
1: Add the equipment
name
2: Add the user name
ALL
0
SYS 0: ISO8859-1
1
Network Switching of extended
<0-1>
1: ISO8859-2
ASCII code in catFs filesystem
Network Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: AUTO
1
(Paper feeding drawer)
<0-5>
1: Upper drawer
2: Lower drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
5: LCF

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 203
07/11

Code
979

980

981

983
985

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Network Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Roman-8
(PCL symbol set)
<0-39>
1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
4: PC-8,Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850,Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura International
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
23: ISO 6: ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
29: ISO 69: French
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
ElecElectronic Filing data
ALL
0
SYS 0: Retention OFF
1
tronic Fil- retention period when NIC
<0-999>
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
ing
board is not installed
(Public Box)
ElecElectronic Filing data
ALL
0
SYS 0: Retention OFF
1
tronic Fil- retention period when NIC
<0-999>
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
ing
board is not installed
(User Box)
User
JOB STATUS initial screen
ALL
0
SYS 0: Print
1
interface setting
<0-1>
1: Private
ALL
0
SYS 0: Image quality prior1
Print mode setting of mixed
Elec<0-1>
ity mode
tronic Fil- input source of Electronic
1: Function priority
Filing
ing
mode

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 204
07/11

Code

Classification

986

General

988

Paper
feeding

995

Version

999
1002

Maintenance
Network

1003

Network

1006

Network

1007

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Copy function setting
PPC
0
SYS Sets the copy function
<0-1>
to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Setting of paper size
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not switched
switching to 13 LG
<0-2>
1: LG 13LG
2: FOLIO 13LG
SYS This code can be also
Equipment number (serial
ALL
0
keyed in from the
number) display
<10 digadjustment mode (05its>
976).
10 digits
FSMS total counter
ALL
0
SYS Refers to values of total
<8 digits>
counter
Selection of NIC board sta- ALL
1
NIC 1: Not printed out
tus information
<1-2>
when the equipment
is restarted
2: Printed out when
the equipment is
restarted
Communication speed and
ALL
1
NIC 1: Auto
settings of Ethernet
<1-5>
2: 10MBPS Half
Duplex
3: 10MBPS Full
Duplex
4: 100MBPS Half
Duplex
5: 100MBPS Full
Duplex
Address Mode
ALL
2
NIC 1: Fixed IP address
<1-3>
2: Dynamic IP address
(DHCP)
3: Dynamic IP address
(DHCP) without
AutoIP
Domain name
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters

1008

Network

IP address

ALL

NIC

1009

Network

Subnet mask

ALL

NIC

1010

Network

Gateway

ALL

NIC

1011

Network

Availability of IPX

ALL

NIC

1012

Network

Network frame type

ALL

1
<1-2>
1
<1-5>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

NIC

000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Automatic
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3SNAP
5: IEEE802.2

Procedure
1

1
11

1
12

12

12

12
12

12

12

12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 205
07/11

Code

Classification

1013

Network

1014

Network

1015

Network

1016

Network

1017

Network

1018

Network

1019

Network

1020

Network

1023

Network

1024

Network

1025

Network

1026

Network

1027

Network

1028
1029
1030

Network
Network
Network

1031

Network

1032

Network

1037

Network

1038

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
*
NIC Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of DNS
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
IP address to DNS server
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Primary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
IP address to DNS server
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Secondary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
NIC 1: Invalid
<1-5>
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
NetBios name
ALL
MFP_
UTY Maximum 15 letters
serial
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial
Name of WINS server or IP
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Name of WINS server or IP
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Availability of Bindery
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of NDS
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Directory service context
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
Directory service tree
ALL
NIC Maximum 47 letters
Availability of HTTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Port number to NIC HTTP
ALL
80
NIC
server
<165535>
SYS
Port number to system
ALL
8080
HTTP server
<165535>
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
SMTP server

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12
12
12
12
12
12

12

12

12

12

12

12
12
12
12
12
12
1
12
12

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 206
07/11

Code

Classification

1039

Network

1040

Network

1041

Network

1042

Network

1043

Network

1044

Network

1045

Network

1046

Network

1047

Network

1048

Network

1049

Network

1050
1051

Network
Network

1052

Network

1055

Network

1057
1058

Network
Network

1059

Network

1060

Network

1061
1062

Network
Network

1063

Network

1065
1066

Network
Network

1067

Network

1068

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
TCP port number of SMTP
ALL
25
NIC
client
<165535>
Availability of SMTP server ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
TCP port number of SMTP
ALL
25
UTY
server
<165535>
E-mail box name to SMTP
ALL
UTY Maximum 192 letters
server
Availability of Offramp
ALL
2
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Offramp security
ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
POP3 server
Types of POP3 server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Automatic
<1-3>
2: POP3
3: APOP
Login name to POP3
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters
server
Login password to POP3
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters
E-mail reception interval
ALL
5
NIC
(Unit: Minute)
<0-4096>
NIC
TCP port number of POP3
ALL
110
client
<165535>
TCP port number of FTP
ALL
21
UTY
client
<165535>
Login name to FTP server
ALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
Login password to FTP
ALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
server
Availability of FTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
UTY
TCP port number of FTP
ALL
21
server
<165535>
Login name to FTP client
ALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
Login password to FTP cliALL
SYS Maximum 31 letters
ent
MIB function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Setting of read Community
ALL
public
NIC Maximum 31 letters
Setting of read/Write ComALL
private
NIC Maximum 31 letters
munity
Authentication TRAP funcALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
tion
<1-2>
2: Invalid
ALERTS TRAP function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
11
11
12
12
11
11
12
12
12
12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 207
07/11

Code

Classification

1069

Network

1070

Network

1073

Network

1074

Network

1075

Network

1076

Network

1077
1078

Network
Network

1079

Network

1080

Network

1081

Network

1082
1083
1084

Network
Network
Network

1085

Network

1086

Network

1087

Network

1088

Network

1089

Network

1090
1091

Network
Network

1092

Network

1093

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
TRAP destination IP
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Community setting of
ALL
public
NIC Maximum 31 letters
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
9100
<165535>
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
515
<165535>
LPD queue name
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
Availability of IPP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Availability of IPP port
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
number 80
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of IPP
ALL
631
<165535>
IPP printer name
ALL
MFP_
NIC Maximum 127 letters
serial
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial
IPP printer location
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
IPP printer information
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
IPP printer information
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
(more)
Installer of IPP printer
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
driver
IPP printer Make and
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
Model
IPP printer information
ALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
(more) MFGR
IPP message from operaALL
NIC Maximum 127 letters
tor
Availability of FTP print
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Printer user name of FTP
ALL
print
NIC Maximum 31 letters
Printer user password of
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
FTP
TCP port number to FTP
ALL
21
NIC
print server
<165535>
Login name to Novell print
ALL
MFP_
NIC Maximum 47 letters
server
serial
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 208
07/11

Code

Classification

1094

Network

1095

Network

1096

Network

1097

Network

1098

Network

1099

Network

1100

Network

1101

Network

1102

Network

1103

Network

1104

Network

1105

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Login password to Novell
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
print server
Name of SearchRoot
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters
server
Scan rate setting of print
ALL
5
NIC Unit: Second
queue
<1-255>
Page number limitation for
ALL
5
UTY
printing text of received E<1-99>
mail
MDN return mail setting
ALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
when receiving E-mail
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Trap destination of IPX
ALL
UTY Maximum 24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
Method of SMTP server
ALL
5
NIC 1: Disable
authentication
<1-7,10>
2: Plain
3: Login
4: Cram-MD5
5: Digest MD5
6: Kerberos
7: NTLM
10: Auto
Login name for SMTP
ALL
NIC Maximum 64 letters
server authentication
Login password for SMTP
ALL
NIC Maximum 64 letters
server authentication
Rendezvous setting
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Link local host name
ALL
MFP_
NIC Maximum 127 letters
serial
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial
Service name setting
ALL
Refer to
NIC Maximum 63 letters
content
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial
<Default value>
e-STUDIO202L:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO202L_serial
e-STUDIO203L:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO203L_serial
e-STUDIO232:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO232_serial
e-STUDIO233:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO233_serial
e-STUDIO282:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO282_serial
e-STUDIO283:
TOSHIBA eSTUDIO283_serial

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

12
12
12
12

12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 209
07/11

Code

Classification

1112

Network

1113

Network

1114

Network

1117

Network

1118
1119

General
Network

1121

Network

1122

Network

1123

Network

1124

Network

1125

General

1126

Counter

1128

Network

1129

Network

1130

User
interface

1131

User
interface

1132

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
12
Host name
ALL MFP_seri NIC Maximum 63 letters
al
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial
Windows domain No.1 of
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
12
user authentication
Sending mail text of InterALL
1
SYS 0: Invalid (Not sending
1
netFAX
<0-1>
the mail text)
1: Valid (Sending the
mail text)
SMB time-out period
ALL
300
SYS Unit: Second
1
<1-9999>
Clearing of TAT partition
ALL
SYS
3
Initialization of NIC inforALL
Initializes only the infor3
mation
mation of the Network
setting items.
PDC (Primary Domain
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
12
Controller) name
BDC (Backup Domain
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
12
Controller) name
NT domain ON/OFF setALL
4
UTY 3: ON (Domain
12
ting
<3-4>
selected)
4: OFF (Work group
selected)
Workgroup name
ALL
workUTY Maximum 15 letters
12
group
Data writing of address
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
book data import
<0-1>
1: Valid
(overwriting method)
Validity of interrupt copyALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
ing when external counters
<0-1>
1: Valid
are installed
NetwareUserAuthTree
ALL
UTY Maximum 47 letters
12
Name1
NetwareUserAuthContext
ALL
UTY Maximum 127 letters
12
Name1
Job Build Function
ALL
1
SYS Sets the Job Build
1
<0-1>
Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Maximum number of time
ALL
2000
SYS Sets the maximum
1
job build performed
<5-2000>
number of time a job
build has been performed.
5-2000: 5 to 2000 times
1
Default screen selection of
ALL
1
SYS Selects the default
the User Function menu
<0-1>
screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 210
07/11

Code
1133

1134
1135

1138

1139
1140

1141

1143
1144
1145

1148
1149

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cation
able
tion
value>
Paper
Feeding direction setting of
ALL
0
SYS Sets the feeding direcfeeding envelope
<0-1>
tion of envelopes.
0: Envelope flap comes
on its trailing edge
(front side of the
equipment)
1: Envelope flap comes
on its leading edge
(rear side of the
equipment)
Network NetwareUserAuthTree
ALL
UTY Maximum 47 letters
Name2
Paper
Default setting of drawers
PRT
1
SYS 1: LCF
feeding (Printer/BOX)
<1-5>
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
Network LDAP search method setALL
0
SYS Sets the search method
ting
<0-3>
when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
Network LDAP authentication setALL
0
SYS 0: Not authenticated
ting
<0-1>
1: Authenticated
ALL
0
SYS Selects the restriction of
User
Restriction of the template
<0-1>
the template function
interface function with the adminisusage setting.
trator privilege
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
Network Display of MAC address
ALL
SYS (**:**:**:**:**:**)
The address is displayed as above (6-byte
data is divided by a
colon at every 2 bytes).
Network NetwareUserAuthContext
ALL
UTY Maximum 127 letters
Name2
Network NetwareUserAuthTree
ALL
UTY Maximum 47 letters
Name3
ALL
SYS Maximum 32 digits
Mainte- Counter notification
Remote FAX setting
Enter hyphen with the
nance
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
(Remote)
button.
Network NetwareUserAuthContext
ALL
UTY Maximum 127 letters
Name3
General Enhanced bold for PCL6
ALL
0
SYS 0:OFF
<0-1>
1:ON

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

12
1

1
1

12
12
11

12
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 211
07/11

Code

Classification

1372

Counter

1376

Counter

1378

Counter

1380

Counter

1382

Counter

1385

Image
processing

1386

Image
processing

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Heater and energizing time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
accumulating counter Dis<8 digits>
control time accumuplay/0 clearing
lated (when power of
the equipment is ON)
but does not count at
the Sleep Mode. When
the counter value of the
fuser roller is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
the PM support mode.
Toner cartridge drive
ALL
0
M
Counts the rotation
1
counter
<8 digits>
number of the toner
cartridge.
1
Counter for period of time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
fuser unit is at ready tem<8 digits>
control time accumuperature
lated (when the equipment is at ready status).
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
also reset in sync at the
PM support mode.
Counter for period of time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
1
fuser unit is at printing tem<8 digits>
control time accumuperature
lated (during printing).
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
also reset in sync at the
PM support mode.
1
Counter for period of time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
fuser unit is at energy sav<8 digits>
control time accumuing temperature/Counter
lated (when the equipreset
ment is in the Energy
Saving Mode).
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
also reset in sync at the
PM support mode.
1
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 1)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at the PM support
mode.
1
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 2)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 212
07/11

Code
1387

Classification
Image
processing

1388

Image
processing

1390

Paper
feeding

1391

Paper
feeding

1392

Paper
feeding

1393

Paper
feeding

1394

Paper
feeding

1395

Paper
feeding

1396

Paper
feeding

1397

Paper
feeding

1398

Paper
feeding

1399

Paper
feeding

1400

Paper
feeding

1401

Paper
feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 3)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(OHP film)
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(upper drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(lower drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(PFP upper drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(PFP lower drawer)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(bypass feed)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
(LCF)
<8 digits>
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
When the number of
upper limit value
<8 digits>
feeding retry (08-1390
(Upper drawer)
to 08-1395) exceeds
the setting value, the
ALL
0
M
Feeding retry counter
feeding retry will not be
<8 digits>
upper limit value
performed subse(Lower drawer)
quently. In case 0 is
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
set as a setting value,
upper limit value
<8 digits>
however, the feeding
(PFP upper drawer)
retry continues regardFeeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
less of the counter setupper limit value
<8 digits>
ting value.
(PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0
M
Feeding retry counter
<8 digits>
upper limit value
(Bypass feed)
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
upper limit value
<8 digits>
(LCF)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 213
07/11

Code

Classification

1410

Counter

1411

Counter

1422

Data
overwrite
kit

1424

Data
overwrite
kit

1426

Data
overwrite
kit

1427

Data
overwrite
kit

1428

Data
overwrite
kit

1429

User
interface

1430

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Counter for period of toner
ALL
0
M
Counts up the period of
1
cartridge rotation time
<8 digits>
rotation time of the
toner cartridge.
1
Counter for envelope
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
<8 digits>
registration sensor is
ON.
When the counter value
of the fuser roller is
reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
1
HDD data overwriting type
ALL
0
SYS Select the type of the
setting
<0-2>
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
1
HDD data clearing type
ALL
0
SYS Select the type of the
setting (forcible clearing)
<0-2>
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
3
Forcible HDD data clearing ALL
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
3
Forcible NVRAM data all
ALL
When this code is perclearing
formed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
3
Forcible SRAM backup
ALL
When this code is perdata all clearing
formed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
Margin width
ALL
Front: 7/
SYS This setting is not
10
(Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
Back: 7
reflected in "Right",
<2-100/even if the value less
100-100>
than 2 is set for "Back".
Margin width
ALL
14
SYS
1
(Bookbinding margin)
<2-30>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 214
07/11

Code

Classification

1431

Network

1432

Network

1435

Network

1436

Network

1437

Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding

1438

1439

Paper
feeding

1440

Network

1441

Network

1442

Network

1444

Network

1445

Network

1446

Network

1447

Network

1448

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ACC
ALL
1
SYS 0: ACC prohibited
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE)
<0-2>
1: Only in the same
for Printer/Box printing
paper direction
2: In both same direction and different
directions
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal mode
<0-1>
1: Mode for Private
Print
"Disable private and proof
ALL
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no
print save" function
<0-1>
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
"Disable fax save" function
ALL
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no
<0-1>
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted
Hole punch on tab paper
ALL
0
SYS 0: No hole punch
<0-1>
1: Hole punch
Automatic feed setting of
ALL
1
SYS 0: Disabled
tab paper and insertion
<0-1>
1: Enabled
sheet
(Remote)
Automatic feed setting of
ALL
1
SYS 0: Disabled
tab paper and insertion
<0-1>
1: Enabled
sheet
(Local)
IP Conflict Detect
ALL
1
OFF/ON
<1-2>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
SNTP Enable
ALL
2
OFF/ON
<1-2>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
SNTP Polling rate
ALL
24
Data obtaining interval
<1-168>
(Unit: Hour)
Primary SNTP Address
ALL
SNTP server IP
Address (Primary)
Secondary SNTP Address
ALL
SNTP server IP
Address (Secondary)
Port number to SNTP
ALL
123
<165535>
IPP administrator name
ALL
This should be an
account which can control all IPP jobs.
IPP administrator passALL
This should be the
word
password of an account
which can control all
IPP jobs.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

2
1
1

1
1

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 215
07/11

Code

Classification

1449

Network

1450

Network

1451

Network

1464

Network

1470

General

1471

General

1472

General

1473

General

1474

General

1476

Network

1477

Network

1478

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
IPP authentication method
ALL
1
1: Disabled
<1-4>
2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
User name for IPP authenALL
This should be the
tication
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
Password for IPP authentiALL
This should be the
cation
password of the
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
Samba server ON/OFF
ALL
1
NIC 1: Samba enabled
setting
<1-4>
2: Samba disabled
3: Print Share disabled
4: File Share disabled
Device authentication func- ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
tion setting
<0-1>
1: ON
User authentication
ALL
0
SYS 0: Local
method
<0-5>
1: NTLM (NT Domain)
2: LDAP
3: Kerberos (Active
Directory)
4: Netware
User data management
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
automatic registration func<0-1>
1: Enabled
tion setting
User data management
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
limitation setting
<0-1>
1: Enabled
User data management
ALL
0
SYS 0-9,999,999:
limitation
<7 digits>
0-9,999,999 sheets
Setting by number of printouts
Restriction on Address
ALL
0
SYS Some restrictions can
book operation by adminis<0-1>
be given on the admintrator
istrator for operating the
Address book.
0: No restriction
1: Can be operated
only under the
administrator's
authorization
Restriction on "To" ("cc")
ALL
0
SYS 0: No restriction
address
<0-3>
1: Can be set from
both of the Address
book and LDAP
server
2: Can be set only
from the Address
book
3: Can be set only
from the LDAP
server
Display of paper size setALL
JPN: 0
SYS 0: Not displayed
ting by installation operaUC: 1
1: Displayed
tion of drawers
EUR: 0
<0-1>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12

12

12

12

1
1

1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 216
07/11

Code

Classification

1479

User
interface

1481

General

1482

General

1483

General

1484

Network

1485

Network

1487

Network

1489

Network

1491

Network

1492

Paper
feeding

1494

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Default setting of sharpALL
5
SYS 1: -4 2: -3
1
ness
<1-9>
3: -2 4: -1
5: 0 6: +1
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4
User data management
ALL
All the user data in the
3
clearing
database and backup
files can be deleted.
1
User data department
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
management
<0-1>
1: Valid
* When this code is
set to 1 (Valid), the
department management setting
(08-629) should be
1 (Valid).
User data recovery
ALL
The data in the data3
base is overwritten with
the data in the backup
file.
1
Authentication method of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disable
"Scan to Email
<0-2>
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
Setting whether use of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
1
Internet FAX is permitted
<0-1>
1: Permitted
or not when it is given an
authentication
1
"From" address assignALL
0
SYS 0: "User name" + @ +
ment method when it is
<0-2>
"Domain name"
given an authentication
1: LDAP search
2: Use the address
registered in "From"
field of E-mail setting
Setting for "From" address
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
1
edit at "Scan to Email
<0-1>
1: Permitted
E-mail domain name
ALL
SYS 96+2 (delimiter) charac11
ter
ASCII sequence only
Detection method of 13"
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1
LG for single-size docu<0-1>
1: Enabled
ment
Limitation check method
ALL
0
SYS 0: Checked at every
2
<0-1>
page printed
1: Checked at every
job printed

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 217
07/11

Code

Classification

1495

Maintenance

1496

General

1497

Network

1498

FAX

1530-0

Counter

1530-1

1530-2
1530-3
1530-4
1530-7

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
12
Service call checking
ALL
6
0: No checking period
period setting
<0-12>
specified (= Calls
service technician
immediately)
0: 10 minutes
1: 30 minutes
3: 1 hour
4: 6 hours
5: 12 hours
6: 24 hours
7: 48 hours
8: 7 days
9: 1 month
10: 1 year
11: 5 years
12: Not limited (= Calls
service technician if
such error has
occurred in the past
even once or more)
1
Operation setting for User
ALL
1
SYS 0 : Disables operation
authentication/registration
<0-1>
setting for User
authentication/registration
1 : Enables operation
setting for User
authentication/registration
e-Filing Access Mode (for
ALL
0
SYS 0: Mode 1
1
Client)
<0-2>
1: Mode 2
2: Mode 3
Inbound FAX function
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
(Forwarding by TSI)
<0-1>
(Function disabled)
1: ON
(Function enabled)
Number of
1-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
output pages Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages.
printing
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
2-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages using
Duplex
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
printing
SORT].
4
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
2-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [2IN1] or
Simplex
[MAGAZINE SORT].
printing
4-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
4-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [4IN1].
printing
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages.
Simplex
printing

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 218
07/11

Code

Classification

1533-0

Counter

1533-1

1533-2
1533-3
1533-4
1533-5
1533-6
1533-7
1535-0

Counter

1535-7

1660
1661
1662
1663

1664
1665
1666

Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
1-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages.
of the printer
printing
or BOX
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
2-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages using
Duplex
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
printing
SORT].
* When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
2-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [2IN1] or
printing
[MAGAZINE SORT].
4-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [4IN1].
Simplex
printing
N-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using [N
printing
IN1].
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
N-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [N IN1].
Simplex
printing
1-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Simplex
<8 digits>
output pages .
printing
1-UP /
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
Number of
<8 digits>
sheets in the default
output pages Duplex
printing
settings.
of the FAX
printing
FAX
0
SYS
1-UP /
(1-UP /
<8 digits>
Simplex
Duplex printprinting
ing)
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: OFF
2: ON
Radio ON/OFF setting
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
Maximum 32 letters
SSID
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Infrastructure
Network type
<1-2>
2: Ad-Hoc
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
4
1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK
Security
<1-7>
3: WEP 4: NONE
5: WPA 6: WPA2
7: WPA2PSK
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: TKIP 2: AES
Encryption system
<1-3>
3: Dynamic WEP
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: 100% 2: 50%
Transmission output power
<1-5>
3: 25%
4: 12.5%
5: min
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Auto
2: Manual
Transmission rate
<1-2>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

12
12
12
12

12
12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 219
07/11

Code

Classification

1667

Wireless
LAN

1668

Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN

1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679

Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN

1681

Wireless
LAN

1682

Wireless
LAN

1684

Wireless
LAN

1685

Wireless
LAN

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
value>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: 1
2: 2
Transmission rate value
<1-12>
3: 5.5
4: 11
5: 6
6: 9
7: 12
8: 18
9: 24
10: 36
11: 48
12: 54
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Auto
2: Manual
Operation channel
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Operation channel value
<1-11>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: 64
2: 128
WEP bit number
<1-3>
3: 152
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
2
1: Hex
2: ASCII
WEP key entry system
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
Maximum 32 letters
WEP key value
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
Maximum 64 letters
WPA-PSK passphrase
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Off
2: Max
Sleep mode setting
<1-3>
3: Normal
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Long 2: Short
Slot-time limitation
<1-2>
ALL
5
Wireless LAN driver
<0-1000>
Number of times of software retry
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Long 2: Longshort
Preamble
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: All
2: 11b
Operation mode
<1-3>
3: 11g
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
This setting is whether
Wireless LAN setting
<1-3>
the wireless LAN connection is enabled or
disabled.
1: Unset 2: Enabled
3: Disabled
ALL
This should be the path
Wireless LAN supplicant
name in full where the
Path name for client certificlient certificate is
cate
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
This should be the path
Path name for secret key
name in full where the
of client certificate
client certificate is
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
This should be the path
Path name for CA self-cername in full where the
tificate
CA self-certificate is
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
This should be the user
EAP user name
name when the EAPTLS is used.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

12

12

12

12

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 220
07/11

Code

Classification

1686

Wireless
LAN

1689

Wireless
LAN

1690

Wireless
LAN

1691

Wireless
LAN

1692

Wireless
LAN

1693

Wireless
LAN

1696

Wireless
LAN

1697

Wireless
LAN

1699

Wireless
LAN

1700

Wireless
LAN

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
This should be the user
12
EAP user name
name when the PEAP
is used.
This should be the time12
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
30
out interval between
Authentication interval
<30EAP responses.
65535>
30: 30 seconds
12
The EAP authenticaWireless LAN supplicant
ALL
60
tion will start after havHolding interval
<60ing been waited in this
65535>
period when an EAP
failure was received.
60: 60 seconds
12
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
3
When an EAPOL-Start
EAPOL-Start
<1packet has been sent
Number of times of packet
65535>
and the request ID canretry
not be received, this
EAPOL-Start packet will
be re-sent for the number of times set in this
code.
3: 3 times
12
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
2
This setting is whether
Session resume
<1-2>
the pre-master key
should be updated or
not upon a TLS renegotiation.
1: Session is resumed
2: Session is not
resumed
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1398
This is a MAC frame
12
MAC Frame size
<1-1398>
size used in the wireless LAN connection.
The data is fragmented
into this size.
1398: 1398 bytes
12
ALL
/dev/
This should be the
Wireless LAN supplicant
urandom
device file name which
Device file setting for
can obtain a seed to iniobtaining random number
tialize the WEP PRNG
for xsupplicant.
(Maximum 255 letters)
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
This should be the path
12
CRL directory designation
name of the directory in
full where the CRL file
is located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
12
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
This setting is for the
EAP authentication type
<1-3>
EAP authentication
type which xsupplicant
can authenticate.
1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP
3: EAP-TLS and PEAP
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
This should be an
12
CN name
authentication server
name (basically a
domain name in full).
(Maximum 255 letters)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 221
07/11

Code
1701
1704

Classification
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN

1705

Wireless
LAN

1706

Wireless
LAN

1707

Wireless
LAN

1708

User
interface

1709

Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth

1710
1711
1712
1713

1714

Bluetooth

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
1: NO
2: YES
CN name check
<1-2>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
0
The update interval of a
Update interval of PTK
<0-720>
secret key across AP
(Pairwise Transient Key)
(Access Point) and STA
(Station) can be set.
This interval is for
updating the secret key
from STA.
0: Not updated
1-720: 1-720 minutes of
interval
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
The Ack bit and request
Strict packet check
<1-2>
bit of EAPOL-Key is
checked.
1: Not checked
2: Checked
ALL
1
A higher priority is given
Wireless LAN supplicant
<1-2>
to the xsupplicant task
Priority change at 4-way
when a 4-way handhandshake
shake is started.
1: Priority not changed
2: Priority changed
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
The encryption capabilSecurity level
<1-3>
ity output in TLS clientHello message can be
selected.
1: LOW 2: MIDDLE
3: HIGH
Selectable security level
ALL
1
These are the security
(EAP-TLS)
<1-3>
level which can be
selected from the user
interface. This setting is
not applied in case of
PEAP. ("LOW" and
"MIDDLE" is mandatory for PEAP)
1: LOW + MIDDLE +
HIGH
2: MIDDLE + HIGH
3: HIGH
Bluetooth
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not installed
Installation status of option
<0-1>
1: Installed
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
ON/OFF setting
<0-1>
1: ON
Bluetooth
ALL
MFP
SYS Maximum 32 letters
Device name
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Not allowed
Discovery
<0-1>
1: Allowed
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Security function
Security
<0-1>
OFF
1: Security function
ON
Bluetooth
ALL
0000
SYS Maximum 8 digits
PIN
(8-digit sequence)
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12
12

12

12

12

12

1
1
11
1
1

11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 222
07/11

Code
1715

Classification
Bluetooth

1716

Bluetooth

1717

Bluetooth

1719

Bluetooth

1720

Network

1721

Network

1722

Network

1723

Network

1724

Network

1725

Network

1726

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Not encrypted
Data encryption
<0-1>
1: Encrypted
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
Bluetooth
ALL
6
SYS Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
1
HCRP reception time-out
<1-50>
period
ALL
6
SYS Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
1
Bluetooth
HCRP transmission time<1-50>
out period
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Fit page
1
BIP Paper type
<0-3>
1: 1/2 size
2: 1/4 size
3: 1/8 size
12
ALL
IP filter minimum area 1
IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter
255.255.255.255
(Minimum area 1)
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil1
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 1)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP fil12
ALL
IP filter minimum area 2
ter I
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 2)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil2
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 2)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter minimum area 3
12
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 3)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil3
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 3)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter minimum area 4
12
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 4)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 223
07/11

Code

Classification

1727

Network

1728

Network

1729

Network

1730

Network

1731

Network

1732

Network

1733

Network

1734

Network

1735

Network

1736

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter maximum area
12
ter
4
(Maximum area 4)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter minimum area 5
IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter
255.255.255.255
(Minimum area 5)
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
IP filter maximum area
12
IP address range for IP filter
5
(Maximum area 5)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter minimum area 6
IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter
255.255.255.255
(Minimum area 6)
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil6
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 6)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter minimum area 7
12
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 7)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil7
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 7)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter minimum area 8
12
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 8)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
12
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil8
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 8)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter minimum area 9
12
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 9)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 224
07/11

Code

Classification

1737

Network

1738

Network

1739

Network

1740

Network

1741

Network

1742

Network

1743

Network

1744

Network

1745

Network

1746

Network

1747

Network

1748

Network

1749

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter maximum area
ter
9
(Maximum area 9)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
IP filter minimum area
IP address range for IP fil10
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 10)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
IP filter maximum area
ter
10
(Maximum area 10)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
SSL setting
ALL
2
1: Enabled
HTTP server OFF/ON set<1-2>
2: Disabled
ting
SSL setting
ALL
10443
SSL HTTP server port
HTTP server port number
<1number
65535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
1: Enabled
IPP server OFF/ON setting
<1-2>
2: Disabled
SSL setting
ALL
443
SSL IPP server port
IPP server port number
<1number
65535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
OFF/ON
SSL ftp server OFF/ON
<1-2>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to FTP
SSL setting
ALL
990
Server
SSL ftp server Port
<165535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
OFF/ON
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
<1-3>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
3: Use imported
certificate
Port number to LDAP
SSL setting
ALL
636
Server
SSL LDAP Client Port
<165535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
OFF/ON
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
<1-3>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
3: Use imported
certificate
Port number to POP3
SSL setting
ALL
995
Server
SSL POP3 Client Port
<165535>

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12

2
12

12

12
12
12
12
12
12
12

12
12

12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 225
07/11

Code

Classification

1750

Network

1751

Network

1755

Network

1756

Network

1757

Network

1759

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
12
SSL setting
ALL
2
2: Invalid
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON
<2-6>
3: Accept all certificates of SMTP with
TLS (STARTTLS)
server
4: Accept all certificates of SMTPS
(SMTP OverSSL)
server
5: Use imported certificates of SMTP with
TLS (STARTTLS)
server
6: Use imported certificates of SMTPS
(SMTP OverSSL)
server
SSL setting
ALL
465
Port number to SMTP
12
SSL SMTP Client Port
<1Server
65535>
12
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
Domain Name Server
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
option (6)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
12
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
Name Server option
(44) = Primary and Secondary Wins NAME
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
12
Enabling server's IP
ALL
1
The Host Name Venaddress acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
dor Extension option
(12)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
12
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
SMTP Server Option
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
(69) Simple Mail Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 226
07/11

Code

Classification

1760

Network

1762

Network

1764

Wireless
LAN

1765

Wireless
LAN

1766

Wireless
LAN

1767

Network

1768

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
able
tion
value>
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
POP3 Server Option
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
(70) Post Office Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
SNTP Server Option
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
(42)
NTP Server Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
ALL
Maximum 255 letters
Wireless LAN supplicant
Control sequence setting
of "Cipher Suite"
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
Maximum 63 letters
Path name for user certificate
ALL
Maximum 63 letters
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name entered for CA
self-certificate
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
SYS DNS domain name
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
Option (15) DNS
domain name of the client
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
Previous IP address
ALL
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12

12

12
12
12
12

12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 227
07/11

Code

Classification

1772

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
5
Card reading device setALL
0
SYS To enable the e-Bridge
ting
<8 digits>
ID Gate, a card reading
device should be set in
the order of
"ABYYZZZZ". (Enter
the corresponding values to "A", "B", "YY"
and "ZZZZ".)
- AB:Special setting
- A :Debugging NIC
0: Not used
1: Used
- B :Interface
0: USB connection
1: N/A
- YY: Authentication
00: No authentication using a noncontact IC card
02: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2003)
03: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2005)
04: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2004)
- ZZZZ: Sub-code
0000: No authentication using a noncontact IC card
0001: Use CSN
(Card Serial Number) of a noncontact IC card
0002: Use the Data
Area Address Information of a noncontact IC card

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 228
07/11

Code

Classification

1773

General

1774

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Card reader format inforALL
SYS To access the data in
mation -1
the noncontact IC card,
the Key Information
"LLLL" and the Sector
Number "MMMM"
should be set.
The "LLLL" should be
set first, and then
"MMMM".
KP-2003:
LLLL: System code
(hexadecimal number)
MMMM: Service code
(hexadecimal number)

Card reader format information -2

ALL

SYS

KP-2005:
LLLL :
Key information
MMMM:
Sector number
(hexadecimal number)
The data of the block
number in the noncontact IC is set.
KP-2003: <PPQRSSTU
(hexadecimal number)>
PP:1st block
Q: 1st block beginning
byte
R: 1st block endingbyte
SS:2nd block
T: 2nd block beginning byte
U: 2nd block ending
byte

Procedure
5

KP-2005: <RRBSEbse
(hexadecimal number)>
RR:00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block number
S: 1st area beginning
byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte
offset
b: 2nd area block
number
s: 2nd area beginning
byte offset
e: 2nd area ending
byte offset
* If the 2nd block/area is
not used, set the SSTU
to "FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the bse
to"FFF" (hexadecimal
number).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 229
07/11

Code

Classification

1775

General

1776

General

1777

General

1778

General

1779

Network

1781-0

Network

1781-1
1782

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
5
Card reader format inforALL
SYS Security key
mation -3
KKKKKKKKKKKK (12
digits) <hexadecimal
number> in the [Key
Information] of the [Sector Number] set in the
code 08-1773 should
be entered.
1
Card authentication LDAP
ALL
0
SYS LDAP server number
server
<0-100>
for the card authentication when a noncontact
IC card is used should
be set.
11
Card authentication LDAP
ALL
SYS LDAP search index
search index
when a noncontact IC
card is used is set.
1
Hang-up period of control
ALL
1
SYS 0: No hang-up
panel at the 3rd misentry of
<0-7>
1: 0.5 minutes (= 30
administrator's password
seconds)
2: 1 minute
3: 3 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: 10 minutes
6: 15 minutes
7: 30 minutes
1
Default data saving direcALL
0
SYS 0: Local directory
tory of "Scan to File"
<0-2>
1: REMOTE 1
2: REMOTE 2
Notification of When job
ALL
0
SYS Sets the notification
4
scan job
completed
<0-1>
method of scan job
On error
ALL
0
SYS completion.
4
0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
1
ALL
0
SYS Sets the naming
File name format of "Save
<0-6>
method of the file of
as file" and Email transmis"Save as file" and Email
sion
transmission.
0: [FileName]-[Data][Page]
1: [FileName]-[Page][Data]
2: [Data]-[FileName][Page]
3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName]
4: [Page]-[FileName][Data]
5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName]
6: [HostName]_[Data][Page]

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 230
07/11

Code

Classification

1783

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Date display format of the
ALL
0
SYS Sets the data display
file name of "Save as file"
<0-5>
format of the file of
and Email transmission
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
0: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
1: [YY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]
3: [YY][MM][DD]
4: [HH][mm][SS]
5: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS][mm0]

1784

Network

Single page data saving


directory at "Save as file"

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

1785

Network

ALL

4
<3-6>

SYS

1786

Network

Page number display format of the file of "Save as


file" and Email transmission
Extension (suffix) format of
the file of "Save as file"

ALL

3
<3-6>

SYS

1850

Network

ALL

Network

1852

Network

1853

Network

1854

Network

16
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>

NIC

1851

IPP
MaxConnection
IPP
ActiveConnection
LPD
MaxConnection
LPD
ActiveConnection
AppleTalk
MaxConnection

1855

Network

ALL

Network

1857

Network

1913

General

10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
0
<0-1>

NIC

1856

AppleTalk
ActiveConnection
RawPrint
MaxConnection
RawPrint
ActiveConnection
Page number addition on
multipage file names of
"File/Email"

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

ALL
ALL
ALL

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC

NIC
NIC
SYS

The order of [YY], [MM]


and [DD] varies
depending on the setting of the code 08-640
(Data display format).
Sets the directory
where the file of "Save
as file" is saved.
0: Save it under a subfolder
1: Save it without creating a subfolder
Sets the digit of a page
number attached on the
file.
3-6: 3-6 digits
Sets the extension digits of the file to be
saved.
3: Auto
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
Number of maximum
connections(IPP).
Number of active connections(IPP).
Number of maximum
connections(LPD).
Number of active connections(LPD).
Number of maximum
connections(AppleTalk).
Number of active connections(AppleTalk).
Number of maximum
connections(RawPrint).
Number of active connections(RawPrint).

Procedure
1

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 231
07/11

Code

Classification

1914

General

1915

Network

1916

General

1920

Network

1921

Network

1922

Network

1923

Network

1924

Network

1925

Network

1926

FAX

1927

Network

1928

Network

1929

User
interface

1930

User
interface

1931

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Maximum number of deciALL
2
SYS 0: 0 digit
mals in extension fields
<0-6>
1: 1 digit
2: 2 digits
3: 3 digits
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
Filing size for Network
ALL
0
SYS 0: Eliminates 2 mm
scanning function
<0-1>
from circumference
(Void: 2 mm)
1: No space eliminated
(Void: 0 mm)
Default saving/attachment
ALL
0
SYS
files of "File/Email"
<0-1>
Device domain name of
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
device authentication
Windows domain No. 2 of
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
user authentication
Windows domain No. 3 of
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
user authentication
LDAP authentication
ALL
1
NIC 1: Windows Server
Server type
<1-2>
2: Not Windows Server
LDAP authentication
ALL
NIC Sets a user attribute
User attribute
name.
Execution of user authentiALL
2
SYS 0: Forcible execution
cation when the user ID is
<0-2>
1: Execution impossinot entered
ble (pooled in the
invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
ALL
0
SYS Sets on or off of the
Tab/cover sheet printing at
<0-1>
printing function of speFAX reception
cial sheets such as tab
Printing stop function
or cover sheet of FAX,
Email or list print.
0: Function off
1: Function on
ALL eBMUser SYS Up to 32 letters
LDAP server attribute
Card
name setting for card
authentication
Role Based Access
ALL
0
SYS
LDAP search index
<04294967
295>
Keyboard layout for LanALL
0
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 1
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
Keyboard layout for LanALL
1
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 2
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
Keyboard layout for LanALL
EUR:2
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 3
Other:0
(for Europe)
<0-2>
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
12
12
12
12
12
1

11
5

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 232
07/11

Code

Classification

1932

User
interface

1933

User
interface

1934

User
interface

1935

User
interface

1936

Network

1937

Network

1940

General

1941

Bluetooth

1942

Network

1943

Network

1944

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Keyboard layout for LanALL
0
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 4
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
Keyboard layout for LanALL
0
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 5
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
Keyboard layout for LanALL
0
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 6
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
Keyboard layout for LanALL
0
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 7
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
AppleTalk device name
ALL
MFP_
UTY Maximum 32 letters
serial
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial".
User name and password
ALL
0
SYS 0: User name and
at user authentication or
<0-2>
password of the
"Save as file"
device
1: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(Template registration information
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
2: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(User information of
the authentication
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
STAGE port number
SCN
20080
SYS Port number used for
<0the remote scanning is
65535>
set.
Bluetooth
ALL
EUR: 6
SYS 0: Ledger 1: Legal
BIP Paper size
UC: 2
2: Letter 3: Computer
JPN: 6
4: Statement 5: A3
<0-13>
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: Folio
12: Legal13"
13: LetterSquare
Device authentication
ALL
60
NIC Unit: Second
PDC/BDC time-out period
<1-180>
User authentication
ALL
30
NIC Unit: Second
PDC/BDC time-out period
<1-180>
1
NIC 1: Auto
Device/User authentication ALL
<1-3>
2: Kerberos
Method of Windows
3: NTLMv2
domain authentication

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

12

1
1

12
12
12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 233
07/11

Code

Classification

1950

Network

1951

Network

1952

Network

1953

Network

1954

Network

1955

Network

1956

Network

1957

Network

1958

Network

1959

Network

1960

General

1961

General

1963

General

1964

General

1965

General

1966

General

1967

General

1968

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
SMB signature for SMB
ALL
1
UTY 1: Auto
server
<1-3>
2: Valid
3: Invalid
SMB signature for SMB cli- ALL
1
UTY 1: Auto
ent
<1-3>
2: Valid
3: Invalid
Device name for device
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
authentication
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
Password for the device
name used for device
authentication
PDC2 of user authenticaALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
tion
BDC2 of user authenticaALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
tion
PDC3 of user authenticaALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
tion
BDC3 of user authenticaALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
tion
PDC of device authenticaALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
tion
BDC of device authenticaALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
tion
KS Filter operation mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
<0-1>
1: Enabled
KS/KSSM setting all clearALL
Does not reset the
ing
value of the code 081960 but resets those
of the codes 08-1963 to
1994.
KS Filter Emulation Mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Auto
<0-2>
1: KS
2: KSSM
KS Filter Paper Size
ALL
1
SYS 0: A3
<0-5>
1: A4
2: B4
3: B5
4: Letter
5: Legal
KS Filter Orientation
ALL
0
SYS 0: Portrait
<0-1>
1: Landscape
KS Filter Copies
ALL
1
SYS
<1-999>
KS Paper Source
ALL
0
SYS
<0-1>
KS Duplex Mode
ALL
0
SYS
<0-2>

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
3

1
1

1
1
1
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 234
07/11

Code

Classification

1970

General

1971

General

1972

General

1973

General

1974

General

1975

General

1976

General

1977

General

1978

General

1979

General

1980

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
KS CPI (English CPI/
ALL
1
SYS 0: (5/10)
Hangle CPI)
<0-10>
1: (6/12)
2: (6.7/13.3)
3: (6.9/13.8)
4: (7.5/15)
5: (8.3/16.7)
6: (9/18)
7: (10/10)
8: (10/20)
9: (12/24)
10: (15/30)
KS LPI
ALL
60
SYS Key in the value 10
<30-160>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "45" for a
font size 4.5.)
KS Type Face
ALL
0
SYS 0: MYUNGJO
<0-5>
1: GOTHIC
2: GUNGSEO
3: GULLIM
4: GRAPH
5: SAMMUL
KS Font Size
ALL
96
SYS Key in the value 10
<96-160>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "100" for a
font size 10.0.)
KS Zoom
ALL
100
SYS
<20-400>
KS CR/LF Mode
ALL
2
SYS 0: CR->CR,
<0-3>
LF->LF
1: CR->CR+LF,
LF->LF
2: CR->CR,
LF->CR+LF
3: CR->CR+LF,
LF->CR+LF
KS Top Margin
ALL
0
SYS Key in the value 10
<0-50>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "40" for a
font size 4.0.)
KS Left Margin
ALL
0
SYS Key in the value 10
<0-50>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "40" for a
font size 4.0.)
KS Auto Wrap
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KS Han Mode
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KS Han Code
ALL
0
SYS 0: Wansung
<0-1>
1: Johap

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1

1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 235
07/11

Code

Classification

1984

General

1985

General

1986

General

1987

General

1988

General

1989

General

1990

General

1991

General

1992

General

1993

General

1994

General

3506

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
KSSM CPI
ALL
1
SYS 0: (5/10)
(English CPI/ Hangle CPI)
<0-10>
1: (6/12)
2: (6.7/13.3)
3: (6.9/13.8)
4: (7.5/15)
5: (8.3/16.7)
6: (9/18)
7: (10/10)
8: (10/20)
9: (12/24)
10: (15/30)
KSSM LPI
ALL
60
SYS Key in the value 10
<30-160>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "45" for a
font size 4.5.)
KSSM Type Face
ALL
0
SYS 0: MYUNGJO
<0-5>
1: GOTHIC
2: GUNGSEO
3: GULLIM
4: GRAPH
5: SAMMUL
KSSM Font Size
ALL
96
SYS Key in the value 10
<96-160>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "100" for a
font size 10.0.)
KSSM Zoom
ALL
100
SYS
<20-400>
KSSM CR/LF Mode
ALL
2
SYS 0: CR->CR,
<0-3>
LF->LF
1: CR->CR+LF,
LF->LF
2: CR->CR,
LF->CR+LF
3: CR->CR+LF,
LF->CR+LF
KSSM Top Margin
ALL
0
SYS Key in the value 10
<0-50>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "40" for a
font size 4.0.)
KSSM Left Margin
ALL
0
SYS Key in the value 10
<0-50>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "40" for a
font size 4.0.)
KSSM Auto Wrap
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KSSM Han Mode
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KSSM Han Code
ALL
0
SYS 0: Wansung
<0-1>
1: Johap
"Attribute 1" indicated in
ALL
company SYS Attribute name for
the LDAP search result
"Attribute 1" indicated in
the LDAP search result
list

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

1
1

1
1
1
11

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 236
07/11

Code

Classification

3507

General

3736

Network

3737

Network

3738

Network

3739

Network

3740

Network

3741

Network

3742

Network

3743

Network

3744

Network

3745

General

3746

General

3747

General

3748

General

3749

General

3750

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
"Attribute 2" indicated in
ALL
departSYS Attribute name for
the LDAP search result
ment
"attribute 2" indicated in
the LDAP search result
list
DNS Client Time Out
ALL
60
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at DNS client
connection
DDNS Client Time Out
ALL
60
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at DDNS client connection
HTTP Client Time Out
ALL
60
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at HTTP client connection
FTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC Use when a timeout
(SCAN)
<1-180>
occurred at FTP client
connection
SNTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at SNTP client
connection
SMTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at SMTP client
connection
POP3 Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at POP3 client
connection
LDAP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at LDAP client connection
POP3 Authentication
ALL
1
NIC POP3 authentication
method
<1-3>
method setting
1: Disable (Default)
2: NTLM
3: Kerberos
Secure DDNS Primary
ALL
NIC Login name for login
Login Name
<1-128>
with the Primary DDNS
Secure DDNS Primary
ALL
NIC Login password for
Login Password
<1-128>
login with the Primary
DDNS
Secure DDNS Secondary
ALL
NIC Login name for login
Login Name
<1-128>
with the Secondary
DDNS
Secure DDNS Secondary
ALL
NIC Login password for
Login Password
<1-128>
login with the Secondary DDNS
DPWS Friendly Name
ALL
NIC MFP name indicated in
DPWS search result
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx
[NIC serial number]
DPWS Printer Name
ALL
NIC Printer name used for
installing the printer
with DPWS
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx Printer[NIC serial number]

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
11

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

12
12
12
12
12

12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 237
07/11

Code

Classification

3751

General

3752

General

3753

General

3754

Network

3755

Network

3756

Network

3757

Network

3758

Network

3759

Network

3760

Network

3761

Network

3762

Network

3763

Network

3764

Network

3765

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
12
DPWS Scanner Name
ALL
NIC Scanner name used for
installing the printer
with DPWS
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx Scanner[NIC serial number]
DPWS Printer Information
ALL
NIC Information regarding
12
DPWS printer
<Default value> NULL
12
DPWS Scanner InformaALL
NIC Information regarding
tion
DPWS scanner
<Default value> NULL
Switching DPWS Printer
ALL
1
NIC DPWS printer /DPWS
12
setting
<1-2>
secure printer function
is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3: Security enabled
Switching DPWS Scanner
ALL
1
NIC DPWS scanner function
12
setting
<1-2>
is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Switching DPWS Security
ALL
1
NIC DPWS security func12
setting
<1-2>
tion is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
NIC Port number used for
12
DPWS Discovery Port
ALL
3702
DPWS Discovery
Number
<165535>
DPWS Metadata
ALL
5081
NIC Port number used for
12
Exchange Port Number
<1DPWS Metadata
65535>
Exchange
DPWS Print Port Number
ALL
5082
NIC Port number used for
12
<1DPWS Print
65535>
NIC Port number used for
12
DPWS Scan Port Number
ALL
5083
DPWS Scan
<165535>
DPWS Security Discovery
ALL
3702
NIC Port number used for
12
Port Number
<1DPWS Security Discov65535>
ery
DPWS Security Metadata
ALL
5084
NIC Port number used for
12
Exchange Port Number
<1DPWS Security Meta65535>
data Exchange
NIC Port number used for
12
DPWS Security Print Port
ALL
5085
DPWS Security Print
Number
<165535>
DPWS Security Scan Port
ALL
5086
NIC Port number used for
12
Number
<1DPWS Security Scan
65535>
12
DPWS Print Max numbers
ALL
10
NIC Maximum numbers
of connection
<1-20>
received from more
than one connection
request in the DPWS
print

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 238
07/11

Code

Classification

3766

Network

3767

Network

3768

Network

3769

Network

3770

Network

3771

Network

3772

Network

3773

Network

3774

Network

3775

Network

3776

Network

3777

Network

3778

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
DPWS Print Max numbers
ALL
10
NIC Maximum numbers of
of reception
<1-20>
data received from
more than one clients in
the DPWS print
Switching IPv6 setting
ALL
2
NIC IPv6 function is
<1-2>
switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Switching IP(IPv6)
ALL
2
NIC IP(IPv6) Address
Address Acquisition
<1-2>
Acquisition setting is
switched.
1: Manual
2: Auto configuration
Link Local Address
ALL
NIC Link Local Address is
<0-16>
displayed. Unique IP
address (128 bits) is set
using Mac address.
IPv6 Address
ALL
0
NIC DHCPv6 Address in
<0-16>
Manual/Auto configuration is displayed.
Prefix display setting
ALL
0
NIC The range of Prefix dis<0-128>
play is set.
Default Gateway setting
ALL
0
NIC Default Gateway of
<0-16>
DHCPv6 Address in
Manual/Auto configuration is set.
Displaying previous
ALL
0
NIC The previous DHCPv6
DHCPv6 Address
<0-16>
Address is displayed.
DHCPv6 Option setting
ALL
2
NIC DHCPv6 Option is
<1-2>
switched when the
Manual is set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Stateless Address Auto
ALL
1
NIC Stateless Address Auto
Configuration
<1-2>
Configuration is
switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Stateless Address setting
ALL
2
NIC When Prefix sent from
continuation
<1-2>
router is changed,
Stateless Address is
continued to be set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Stateless Address setting
ALL
2
NIC IP Address is acquired
<1-2>
by both Stateless and
State full Address.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Acquiring DHCPv6 Option
ALL
2
NIC When Stateless
<1-2>
Address is selected, an
option is acquired from
DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
12

12

12

12

12
12
12

12
12

12

12

12

12

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 239
07/11

Code

Classification

3779

Network

3780

Network

3781

Network

3782

Network

3783

Network

3784

Network

3785

Network

3793

Network

3794

Network

3804

Scanner

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
State full Address setting
ALL
2
NIC IP Address is acquired
<1-2>
from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
State full Option setting
ALL
2
NIC An option is acquired
<1-2>
from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Primary DNS Server
ALL
0
NIC Registration of Primary
Address Registration
<0-16>
DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server
ALL
0
NIC Registration of SecondAddress Registration
<0-16>
ary DNS Server
Address
Selecting SAMBA Protocol
ALL
2
NIC Either IPv6 or IPv4 is
<2-3>
selected to use
SAMBA.
2: IPv6
3: IPv4
DSN Server resolve type
ALL
4
NIC Either "ip6.arpa" or
<1-4>
"ip6.int" is selected for
the name resolution in
DNS.
1: "ip6.arpa" only
2: "ip6.int" only
3: In case of error with
"ip6.int", "ip6.arpa"
is requested.
4: In case of error with
ip6.arpa, ip6.int
is requested.
DPWS IPv4 or IPv4 with
ALL
2
NIC Either IPv4 only or IPv6
IPv6
<1-2>
together with it is
selected to operate
Print, Scan and Security related with DPWS.
1: Multi (IPv4 and
IPv6)
2: IPv4
Switching LLTD setting
ALL
1
NIC LLTD function is
switched.
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Switching LLMNR setting
ALL
2
NIC LLMNR function is
switched.
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
List Analysis Logic of Scan
ALL
0
SYS Acquisition of Contents
to File (FTP)
<0-1>
in Host side is switched
by Scan to File (FTP).
0: NLST
1: LIST

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
12

12

12
12
12

12

12

12

12

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 240
07/11

Code

Classification

3805

Scanner

3810

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Department Management
ALL
0
SYS Department Managesetting by Remote Scan
<0-3>
ment is set when
Remote Scan is performed.
0: w/o GUI OFF,
w/ GUI OFF
1: w/o GUI ON,
w/ GUI OFF
2: w/o GUI OFF,
w/ GUI ON
3: w/o GUI ON,
w/ GUI ON
1
Direct SMTP communicaALL
0
SYS When an Internet Fax is
tion setting
<0-1>
sent, Direct SMTP communication is set.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When "0: Disabled" is
set, an Internet Fax is
sent using an SMTP
server.

3811

Network

Image encrypting at the


Direct SMTP communication

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

3812

Scanner

Dummy full mode at the


Internet Fax transmission

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

When "1: Enabled" is


set, direct SMTP communication is enabled
and an Internet Fax is
sent to MFPs on the
intranet without using
an SMTP server. Since
no SMTP server is
used, the SSL encryption and SMTP-AUTH
function cannot be used
for internet Fax transmission.
If "1: Enabled" is set in
08-3810, set "1:
Enabled" in 08-3812 as
well.
When Direct SMTP
communication is performed, an attached
image is encrypted.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When an Internet Fax is
sent, the resolution ratio
and the paper size of an
attached image are set
to the full mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If "1: Enabled" is set in
08-3810, set "1:
Enabled" in 08-3812 as
well.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 241
07/11

Code

Classification

3815

Scanner

3816

Scanner

3817

Scanner

3818

Scanner

3819

General

3820

General

3821

General

3822

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
XPS file thumbnail addition ALL
1
SYS Thumbnail is added to
1
<0-1>
the XPS file produced
by the Scan function.
0: Not added
1: Only the top page
added
1
XPS file paper size setting
ALL
1
SYS The paper size of the
<0-1>
XPS file produced by
the Scan function is set.
0: Scanned image size
1: Standard size
1
PDF file version setting
ALL
0
SYS The version of PDF file
<0-1>
produced by the Scan
function is set.
0: PDF V1.3
1: PDF V1.4
DPWS Scan operation
ALL
1
SYS The operation mode in
1
mode
<0-1>
the DPWS Scan function is switched.
0: Batch type
1: Serial type
1
Network Fax/Internet Fax
ALL
2
SYS The processing mode
processing mode (STD)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
1
Network Fax/Internet Fax
ALL
0
SYS The processing mode
processing mode (FINE)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
1
Network Fax/Internet Fax
ALL
0
SYS The processing mode
processing mode (S-FINE)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
1
Network Fax/Internet Fax
ALL
0
SYS The processing mode
processing mode (U-FINE)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 242
07/11

Code

Classification

3823

General

3824

General

3825

General

3826

General

3827

General

3828

General

3829

General

3830

General

3831

Network

3833

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Processing mode threshALL
254
SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Standard"
net Fax (STD) [Standard]
is set for the Network
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (STD)
Processing mode threshALL
254
SYS Image quality adjust1
old for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Standard"
net Fax (FINE) [Standard]
is set for the Network
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (FINE)
1
Processing mode threshALL
180
SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Standard"
net Fax (S-FINE)
is set for the Network
[Standard]
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE)
1
Processing mode threshALL
166
SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Standard"
net Fax (U-FINE)
is set for the Network
[Standard]
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE)
1
Processing mode threshALL
200
SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Low speed/
net Fax (STD) [Low speed/
High image quality" is
High image quality]
set for the Network Fax/
Internet Fax processing mode (STD)
1
Processing mode threshALL
204
SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Low speed/
net Fax (FINE) [Low
High image quality" is
speed/High image quality]
set for the Network Fax/
Internet Fax processing mode (FINE)
Processing mode threshALL
206
SYS Image quality adjust1
old for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Low speed/
net Fax (S-FINE) [Low
High image quality" is
speed/High image quality]
set for the Network Fax/
Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE)
Processing mode threshALL
161
SYS Image quality adjust1
old for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
ment when "Low speed/
net Fax (U-FINE) [Low
High image quality" is
speed/High image quality]
set for the Network Fax/
Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Require eBMUser1
Mode switching for Role
<0-1>
Role attribute
Based Access Control
1: User available
function
LDAP attribute
1
Home directory function
ALL
0
SYS Function to store a file
<0-1>
in the user's home
directory
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 243
07/11

Code

Classification

3834

General

3837

General

3840

General

3841

General

3842

General

3845

Network

3847

General

3848

General

3849

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Backup file encryption
ALL
0
SYS When the backup file is
<0-1>
created from TopAccess, it is encrypted.
0: Enabled (Encryption)
1: Disabled (No
encryption)
Display switching for the
ALL
0
SYS The display method of
machine name/computer
<0-1>
the machine name/
name shown in the notificomputer name shown
in the event-related
cation
notification is switched.
0: IP address
1: NetBIOS name/
FQDN
Electronic License Key
Licenses for Electronic
ALL
Registration
License Key are registered.
Electronic License Key
ALL
Registered licenses for
Deletion
Electronic License Key
are deleted.
Electronic License Key
ALL
All licenses stored in
Display
the ELK jig are displayed.
SNMP Trap Enterprise OID
ALL
0
SYS Trap Enterprise OID is
mode setting
<0-1>
enabled for existing
models.
0: Normal (Not
enabling for existing models)
1: Enabled for existing
models
FAX mistransmission preFAX
0
SYS FAX mistransmission
vention
prevention function is
<0-1>
switched.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
Restriction on Address
0
SYS Availability of destinaFAX
Book destination setting
tion selection from the
<0-1>
Address Book is
switched as one of FAX
mistransmission prevention functions when
setting FAX destinations.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
Restriction on destination
0
SYS Availability of direct
FAX
direct entry
entry is switched as one
<0-1>
of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX
destinations.
0: OFF (Disabled )
1: ON (Enabled)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

3
3
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 244
07/11

Code

Classification

3850

General

3851

General

3852

User
interface

3853

User
interface

3854

User
interface

3855

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Remote Scan
ALL
0
SYS User authentication on
User authentication
Remote Scan driver is
<0-3>
switched according to
the availability of GUI.
0: OFF (No GUI) / OFF
(GUI installed)
1: ON (No GUI) / OFF
(GUI installed)
2: OFF (No GUI) / ON
(GUI installed)
3: ON (No GUI) / ON
(GUI installed)
Template display
ALL
0
SYS The order of displaying
<0-1>
templates on the LCD
screen is switched.
0: Order of IDs
1: Alphabetical order
Automatic summer time
ALL
0
SYS Automatic summer time
change
<0-1>
change on the day previously set is switched.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS Summer time is started
Offset value
<0-7>
as follows when 083852 is enabled.
0: +2:00
1: +1:30
2: +1:00
3: +0:30
4: 0:30
5: -1:00
6: -1:30
7: -2:00
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The month in which
Starting month
<1-12>
summer time is started
is set.
1: January
2: February
3: March
4: April
5: May
6: June
7: July
8: August
9: September
10: October
11: November
12: December
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The week in which
Starting week
<1-5>
summer time is started
is set.
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
5: Last

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 245
07/11

Code

Classification

3856

User
interface

3857

User
interface

3858

User
interface

3859

User
interface

3860

User
interface

3861

User
interface

3862

User
interface

3863

User
interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The day on which sumStarting day
<0-6>
mer time is started is
set.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Summer time mode
0
ALL
SYS The time at which sumStarting time
mer time is started is
<00-23>
set.
00-23
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The minute at which
Starting minute
<00-59>
summer time is started
is set.
00-59
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The month in which
Ending month
summer time is ended
<1-12>
is set.
1: January
2: February
3: March
4: April
5: May
6: June
7: July
8: August
9: September
10: October
11: November
12: December
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The week in which
Ending week
summer time is ended
<1-5>
is set.
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
5: Last
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The day on which sumEnding day
mer time is ended is
<0-6>
set.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The time at which sumEnding time
mer time is ended is
<00-23>
set.
00-23
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The minute at which
Ending minute
summer time is ended
<00-59>
is set.
00-59

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
1

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 246
07/11

Code

Classification

3864

Network

3865

Network

3866

Network

3867

Network

3868

Network

6810-0

Counter

6810-1

6810-2
6810-3
6810-4
6810-7

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1
Disclosing Telnet Server
ALL
0
SYS Disclosure of Telnet
function
Server function is
<0-1>
switched.
0: Not disclosed
1: Disclosed
Availability of Telnet Server ALL
2
NIC Availability of Telnet
12
<1-2>
Server is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Telnet Server
ALL
23
12
NIC A port number for TelTCP port number
<1net Server is set.
65535>
Telnet Server
ALL
Admin
NIC A user name for the Tel12
Server administrator's user
<Maxinet Server administraname
mum 15
tor is confirmed.
letters>
Telnet Server
ALL
System
NIC A password for the Tel12
Server administrator's
<Maxinet Server administrapassword
mum 15
tor is set.
letters>
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Number of
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages.
output pages Duplex
in black mode printing
/ Large size
2-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
2-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [2IN1] or
printing
[MAGAZINE SORT].
4-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
4-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [4IN1].
Simplex
printing
1-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
output pages.
printing

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 247
07/11

Code

Classification

6813-0

Counter

6813-1

6813-2
6813-3
6813-4
6813-5
6813-6
6813-7
6815-0

Counter

6815-7
9117

Network

9359
9394

User
interface
Network

9629

Network

9739

Maintenance

9819

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
1-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Number of
<8 digits>
output pages.
output pages Duplex
printing
of the printer
or BOX /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
2-UP /
Large
<8 digits>
output pages using
Duplex
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
printing
SORT].
4
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
2-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [2IN1] or
Simplex
[MAGAZINE SORT].
printing
4-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
4-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [4IN1].
printing
4
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
N-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages using [N
Duplex
IN1].
printing
N-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [N IN1].
printing
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages.
Simplex
printing
Number of
1-UP /
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
4
<8 digits>
output pages in the
output pages Simplex
printing
default settings.
of the FAX
printing /
1-UP /
FAX
0
SYS
4
Large
Duplex
<8 digits>
printing
PRT
0
SYS 0: OFF
1
Raw printing job
<0-1>
1: ON
(Blank page will not be
printed)
Printing resume after jam
ALL
0
SYS 0: Auto resume
1
releasing
<0-1>
1: Resume by users
1
Single-page option for stor- ALL
0
SYS 0: Sets 1 page as 1 file
ing File and sending Email
<0-1>
1: Makes a file based
on the original
Attribute name for LDAP
ALL eBMUser SYS
11
Role Based Access
R
<->
Remote service
ALL
0
SYS 0: RDMS toner empty
1
Toner-end notification
<0-2>
notified immediately
1: RDMS toner empty
notified once a day
2: RDMS toner empty
not notified
1
STAGE SSL
ALL
1
SYS When remote scanning
<0-1>
is performed, the SSL
communication is carried out.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (SSL communication)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 248
07/11

Code
9822

9828
9829

9847
9880
9881

9882

9886

9888

9889

9891

9946

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
General STAGE SSL port number
ALL
20443
SYS When remote scanning
<0is performed using SSL
65535>
communication, the
SSL port number is set.
General Remote scanning mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Batch
<0-1>
1: Sequential
General Department management
ALL
0
SYS Decide the default limilimitation setting
<0-3>
tation setting when the
new department code is
created.
0: No limit
1: Limited only in the
black mode
2: Limited in the color
mode
3: Limited in the black/
color mode
Finisher Hole punching setting
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
General Total counter transmission
ALL
0
SYS 0 to 31
date setting (2)
<0-31>
General Day of total counter data
ALL
1 byte 00000000(0)transmission
<0-127>
01111111(127)
From the 2nd bit Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
General Display mode of the used
ALL
1
SYS 0: All files search
capacity on the e-Filing
<0-1>
mode
administrator page
1: Performance priority
mode
Scanning Decimal point indication for SCN
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Comma
Enhanced Scan Template
UC: 1
1: Period
JPN: 1
<0-1>
Scanner Permission setting for
SCN
1
SYS
changing the scan parame<0-1>
ter when recalling an
extension
General Acceptance of data cloning
ALL
0
SYS Acceptance of the
using USB storage device
<0-1>
usage of the USB data
cloning tool
0: Accepted
1: Not accepted
User
Warning message on the
ALL
1
SYS 0: No warning notificainterface touch panel when PM
<0-1>
tion
(Periodic Maintenance)
1: Warning notification
time has come
General E-mail transmission retry
ALL
3
SYS The number of times of
number
<0-14>
E-mail communication
retry for Scan to E-mail
and Internet Fax is set.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Procedure
1

1
1

1
1
1

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 249
07/11

Code

Classification

9947

General

9960

Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
E-mail transmission retry
ALL
1
SYS When E-mail transmis1
interval
<0-15>
sion retry for Scan to Email and Internet Fax is
performed, the interval
is set.
0 min - 15 min
2
Displaying equipment
ALL
0
SYS Equipment information
information
<0-2>
stored in NVRAM is displayed.
0: Unset
1: e-STUDIO202L/
232/282
2: e-STUDIO203L/
233/283

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 250
07/11

<<Pixel counter related code>> (Chap. 2.2.9)

Code
1500

Classification
Pixel
counter

1501

Pixel
counter

1502

Pixel
counter

1503

Pixel
counter

1504

Pixel
counter

1505

Pixel
counter

1506

Pixel
counter

1507

Pixel
counter

1508

Pixel
counter

1509

Pixel
counter

1510

Pixel
counter

1514

Pixel
counter

1518

Pixel
counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
Standard paper size setting ALL
EUR: 0
SYS Selects the standard
1
UC: 1
paper size to convert it
JPN: 0
into the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1: LT
3
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
SYS Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
Service technician referALL
SYS Clears all information
3
ence counter clearing
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Clears all information
3
counter clearing
related to the toner cartridge reference pixel
counter.
1
Pixel counter display setALL
1
SYS Selects whether or not
ting
<0-1>
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
1
Displayed reference setALL
0
SYS Selects the reference
ting
<0-1>
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference
1: Toner cartridge reference
Toner empty determination
ALL
0
SYS Selects the counter to
1
counter setting
<0-1>
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
1
ALL
800
SYS Sets the number of outThreshold setting for toner
<0-999>
put pages to determine
empty determination
toner empty. This set(Output pages)
ting is valid when 0 is
set at 08-1506.
Threshold setting for toner
ALL
35100
SYS Sets the pixel count to
1
empty determination
<0determine the toner
(Pixel count)
60000>
empty status.
This setting is valid
when "1" is set at 081506.
ALL
0
SYS Becomes 1 when 082
Pixel counter clear flag/
<0-1>
1502 is performed.
Service technician reference
Service technician referALL
SYS Displays the date on
2
ence cleared date
which 08-1502 was performed.
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Displays the date on
2
cleared date
which 08-1503 was performed.
2
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Displays the date on
count started date
which 08-1503 was performed.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 251
07/11

Code

Classification

1548

Pixel
counter

1550

Pixel
counter

1551

Pixel
counter

1553

Pixel
counter

1555

Pixel
counter

1556

Pixel
counter

1566

Pixel
counter

1592

Pixel
counter

1593

Pixel
counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of output pages
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Toner cartridge reference)
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Toner cartridge reference)
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages
FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Toner cartridge reference)
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Toner cartridge replaceALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of
ment counter
time of the toner cartridge replacement.
Average pixel count
PPC
0
SYS Displays the average
(Service technician refer<0pixel count in the copy
ence)
10000>
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
SYS Displays the average
PRT
0
Average pixel count
pixel count in the printer
<0(Service technician referfunction and service
10000>
ence)
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Procedure
2

2
2

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 252
07/11

Code
1594

Classification
Pixel
counter

1595

Pixel
counter

1606

Pixel
counter

1607

Pixel
counter

1608

Pixel
counter

1613

Pixel
counter

1619

Pixel
counter

1624

Pixel
counter

1625

Pixel
counter

1634

Pixel
counter

1639

Pixel
counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptProceItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
dure
value>
2
Average pixel count
FAX
0
SYS Displays the average
(Service technician refer<0pixel count in the FAX
ence)
10000>
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PPC/
0
SYS Displays the average
2
(Service technician referPRT/
<0pixel count in the copy/
ence)
FAX
10000>
printer/FAX function
and service technician
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
PPC
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
Latest pixel count
(Service technician refer<0count in the copy funcence)
10000>
tion and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
(Service technician refer<0count in the printer
ence)
10000>
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Latest pixel count
FAX
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
(Service technician refer<0count in the FAX funcence)
10000>
tion and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
SYS Displays the average
Average pixel count
PPC
0
pixel count in the copy
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0function and toner car10000>
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Average pixel count
PRT
0
SYS Displays the average
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0pixel count in the printer
10000>
function, and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PPC/
0
SYS Displays the average
2
(Toner cartridge reference) PRT/
<0pixel count in the copy/
FAX
10000>
printer/FAX function
and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
2
SYS Displays the average
Average pixel count
FAX
0
pixel count in the FAX
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0function and toner car10000>
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Latest pixel count
FAX
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
2
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0count in the FAX func10000>
tion and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Latest pixel count
PPC
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
2
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0count in the copy func10000>
tion and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 253
07/11

Code

Classification

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283>


Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
(Toner cartridge reference)
<0count in the printer
10000>
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel count
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
distribution
5.1-10%
PPC <8 digits> SYS are divided into 10
10.1-15%
PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of
output pages in each
15.1-20%
PPC <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In
20.1-25%
PPC <8 digits> SYS this code, the distribu25.1-30%
PPC <8 digits> SYS tions in the copy func30.1-40%
PPC <8 digits> SYS tion are displayed.
40.1-60%
PPC <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page]

1640

Pixel
counter

1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9

Pixel
counter

1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9

Pixel
counter

Pixel count
distribution

1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9

Pixel
counter

Pixel count
distribution

60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%

Procedure
2

14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

PPC
PPC

<8 digits>
<8 digits>

SYS
SYS

PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT

<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The pixel count data


are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed.
[Unit: page]

14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX

<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The pixel count data


are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed.
[Unit: page]

14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 254
07/11

<<PM support mode related code>>


The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
When 0 is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to 0.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 255
05/12

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits
1150-0 to 8

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151

Drum cleaning blade

1158-0 to 8

1159

Drum separation finger

1172-0 to 8

1173

Main charger grid

1174-0 to 8

1175

Needle electrode

1182-0 to 8

1183

Ozone filter

1198-0 to 8

1199

Developer material

1200-0 to 8

1201

Transfer charger wire

1214-0 to 8

1215

Separation charger wire

1224-0 to 8

1225

Items
Photoconductive drum

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1172
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1214
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1224
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 256
07/11

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Fuser roller

1246-0 to 8

1247

Pressure roller

1250-0 to 8

1251

Cleaning roller

1266-0 to 8

1267

Fuser roller separation


finger

1268-0 to 8

1269

Pickup roller (RADF)

1282-0,1,2,8

1283

Feed roller (RADF)

1284-0,1,2,8

1285

Separation roller
(RADF)

1286-0,1,2,8

1287

Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)

1290-0,1,2,8

1291

Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)

1292-0,1,2,8

1293

Pickup roller (LCF)

1294-0,1,2,8

1295

Feed roller
(Upper drawer)

1298-0,1,2,8

1299

Items

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1246
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1250
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1266
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1268
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 128,000/148,000/180,000
Sub-code 4: 240,000/240,000/240,000
<Default values of code 1282
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1284
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1286
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1290
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1292
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1294
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1298
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 257
05/12

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Feed roller
(Lower drawer)

1300-0,1,2,8

1301

Feed roller (LCF)

1302-0,1,2,8

1303

Separation roller
(Upper drawer)

1306-0,1,2,8

1307

Separation roller
(Lower drawer)

1308-0,1,2,8

1309

Separation roller (LCF)

1310-0,1,2,8

1311

Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1312-0,1,2,8

1313

Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1314-0,1,2,8

1315

Separation roller
(Bypass unit)

1316-0,1,2,8

1317

Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1320-0,1,2,8

1321

Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1322-0,1,2,8

1323

Feed roller
(Bypass unit)

1324-0,1,2,8

1325

Items

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1300
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1302
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1306
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1308
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1310
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1312
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1314
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1316
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1320
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1322
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1324
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 258
07/11

PM management setting <Procedure 4>


*Indicated in 8 digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1328-0,1,2,8

1329

Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1330-0,1,2,8

1331

Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)

1332-0,1,2,8

1333

Recovery blade

1336-0 to 8

1337

Items

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1328
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1330
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1332
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1336
(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/
283)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 64,000/74,000/90,000
Sub-code 4: 120,000/120,000/120,000

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 259
07/11

<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>


(1)
(2)

Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in the code 257 with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.

Fig. 2-7

(3)

Key in the value 1 or 2 with the digital key and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)

Key in 1 to copy the value of the total


counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).

(A)

(B)

Fig. 2-8

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 260
05/11

Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup


counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).

(A)

(B)

Fig. 2-9

(4)

Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.

Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 261
06/09

2.2.9

Pixel counter

1) Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This Print ratio (%) per standard paper size is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 262
05/11

2) Factors affecting toner consumption


Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:
- Original/Data coverage
- Original/Data density
- Original/Print mode
- Density setting
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.

Toner consumption

Toner consumption

The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption
per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:

Toner consumption

Original density

Toner consumption

Original coverage

TEXT
/PHOTO

TEXT

Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual


density density density density density density
-5
-1
Center
+1
+5

PHOTO

Original mode

Density setting
Fig. 2-10 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 263
06/09

3) Details of pixel counter


- Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference.
Toner cartridge reference
This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.
The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output
pages after the detection of toner empty has exceeded the threshold.
The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and
output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting
mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new
toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and
replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner
cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503).
Service technician reference
This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.
Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (081502).
-

Print count (number of output pages)


The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).
The examples of conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
1 is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
2 is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
1.49 is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
1.27 is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 264
06/09

Pixel count (%)


Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Note:
In the following examples, solid copy is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.

2
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission
Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission
Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4
-

Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)


There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest
pixel count (%).
Average pixel count (%)
The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
Latest pixel count (%)
The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 265
06/09

Type of calculated data


Since this is multifunctional, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function.
The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more
information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).
See after-mentioned 5)-Display in the setting mode (08) for details.
: With data
: Without data
Toner cartridge reference

Service technician reference

Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total

Table 2-201 Type of calculated data


-

Setting related with the pixel counter function


Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).
Pixel counter display setting
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).
Display reference setting
The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or
service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).
Determination counter of toner empty
This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is
detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is
not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.
Pixel counter clearing
There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 266

4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption


The users printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density
setting may cause it as well.
In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output
pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.
The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:

Number of output pages per cartridge (page)

Standard number of output pages


X

X/2

X/10
60%

6% 12%

Pixel count (%)


Fig. 2-11 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 267

5) Pixel counter confirmation


- Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner
cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON.
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).

Fig. 2-12 Information screen of toner cartridge reference

The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).

Fig. 2-13 Information screen of service technician reference

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 268

Data list printing


The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

2004.7.11 09:55
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE
0 20040711
1 20040711
2 20040711

Print Count [LT/A4]


Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]

PPC
12345
12345
12345

PRN
23456
23456
23456

FAX
12345
12345
12345

TOTAL
45678
45678
45678

FAX
12345
12345
12345

TOTAL
45678
45678
45678

Fig. 2-14 Data list of toner cartridge reference

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST


2004.7.11 09:55
SERVICEMAN
No DATE
0 20040711
1 20040711
2 20040711

Print Count [LT/A4]


Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]

PPC
12345
12345
12345

PRN
23456
23456
23456

Fig. 2-15 Data list of service technician reference

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 269

Display in the setting mode (08)


Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see
P. 2-84 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)"/
"2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)".

P. 2-153

Print count, pixel count


Copier
function

Printer
function

FAX
function

Total

Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Average pixel count
(%)

Toner cartridge reference


1553

Service technician reference


1548

1613

1592

1639

1606

1555

1550

1619

1593

1640

1607

1556

1551

1625

1594

1634

1608

1624

1595

Table 2-202 Pixel count code table


Pixel count distribution
Copier function
Printer function
FAX function

Pixel count distribution (page)


1649
1650
1651

Table 2-203 Pixel count code table

Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5%
1: 5.1 - 10%
2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 270
07/11

Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566)
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (08-1518)
Service technician reference cleared date
The service technician reference cleared date is displayed.(08-1510)
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 271

2.2.10

Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)


(e-STUDIO200L/230/280)

Classification

e-STUDIO200L/230/280
Adjustment Mode (05)

Setting Mode (08)


[Date/Time] 200, 638, 640
[Timer] 204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen] 207, 602, 1132
[File] 209, 219, 264, 288
[Language] 220, 221
[Administrator] 263
[Scanning] 265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing] 267, 270, 950, 976, 980, 981, 985
[HDD] 271 [E-mail] 272, 1097, 1098
[default setting] 276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286,
331, 480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
682, 969, 986, 1135
[Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295,
296, 297, 298, 299, 973, 978, 979
[Copy volume] 300 [Original counter] 302
[Custom Mode] 508
[Energy saving] 601, 948, 970
[AMS] 605 [Sound] 610 [Book duplexing] 611
[Summer time] 612 [Paper size] 613
[Department management] 617 620, 621, 622,
623, 624, 629, 672
[Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649
[Original direction] 628 [Image shift] 636
[Edit copying] 645, 646
[Box printing] 647, 953, 954
[X in 1] 650 [Annotation] 651, 657
[Automatic transfer] 660, 661
[Indicator] 671 [Priority drawer] 689
[Media type] 697 [Job Build] 1130, 1131

User interface

Scanner

Image

Drive

[Position] 305, 306


[Distortion] 308
[Reproduction ratio] 340
[Carriage position] 359
[Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435,
436, 437, 438
[Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507,
508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715,
719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 931,
932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 940,
941, 942
[Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571,
572, 693, 694, 695, 820, 821, 822, 825, 826,
827, 830, 831, 832, 835, 836, 837, 913, 914,
915, 916, 917, 918, 919, 920, 921
[Gamma slope] 593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945
[Sharpness] 620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0
to 2, 867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924
[Smudged/Faint text] 653, 654, 655, 928
[Printer density] 667-0 to 4, 672-0 to 4, 676-0
to 4
[Binarizing] 700, 701, 702
[Main motor] 421, 422
[Exit motor] 424, 425

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

[Error diffusion / Dither] 502, 509

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 272

Classification
Paper feeding

Laser

Development
High-voltage
transformer

e-STUDIO200L/230/280
Adjustment Mode (05)

Setting Mode (08)

[Aligning amount] 448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0


to 2, 452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 463-0 to 2,
464-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2, 471-0 to 2,
472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2
[Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 7

[paper dimension] 210, 229, 230, 231, 232,


233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241,
242, 243, 244, 245, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341,
471
[Paper feeding] 254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659,
988, 1133
[Retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 4660 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391,
1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398,
1399, 1400, 1401
[Paper size] 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 256
[Blank copying prevention] 625
[Polygonal motor] 398, 399, 478, 479, 483,
484, 485, 486, 488, 489, 490
[Power correction] 872, 873, 875, 876, 877

[Laser power] 286


[Polygonal motor] 401, 405
[Write starting] 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443,
444, 445, 498-0 to 1
[Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 5
[Auto-toner] 200, 201
[Main charger bias] 210
[Developer bias] 205
[Transfer bias] 220, 221, 222
[Separation bias] 233, 234, 235

Fuser

RADF

Finisher

[Aligning amount] 354, 355


[Sensors/EEPROM] 356, 367, 368
[Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366
[Folding / Binding position] 468-0 to 2

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

[Auto-toner] 414, 455


[Transfer bias] 491, 492, 493, 830, 868, 869
[Main charger bias] 805, 806, 807, 808, 809,
826, 864, 865, 866, 867
[Developer bias] 833, 834, 835, 836, 837, 859,
860, 861, 862, 863
[Separation bias] 831, 870, 871
[Status counter] 400
[Temperature] 404-0 to 3, 405-0 to 3, 407, 409,
410, 411, 412, 413, 424-0 to 3, 425-0 to 3,
433-0 to 1, 437, 438, 448, 450, 451, 452, 453,
515, 516, 518, 520, 521, 525-0 to 3, 527-0 to
3, 535, 536-0 to 3, 537-0 to 3, 800-0 to 1, 8010 to 1, 802-0 to 1, 803-0 to 1, 804-0 to 1, 886,
896-0 to 1
[Pre-running] 417, 439, 440, 441, 523, 526
[Switchback] 462

[Tray reset] 648


[Cascade] 652, 653

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 273
07/04

Classification

e-STUDIO200L/230/280
Adjustment Mode (05)

Setting Mode (08)

Network

[NIC] 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1120


[IP address] 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009,
1010 [IPX] 1011, 1099
[Frame type] 1012 [NCP] 1013
[AppleTalk] 1014, 1015
[LDAP] 1016, 1138, 1139, 1486
[DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019 [DDNS] 1020
[SLP] 1021 [NetBios] 1023 [WINS] 1024, 1025
[Bindery] 1026
[NDS] 1027 [Directory] 1028, 1029
[HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035
[SMTP] 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042,
1100, 1101, 1102
[Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045
[POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051,
1052
[FTP] 1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058,
1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090, 1091,
1092
[MIB] 1063 [Community] 1065, 1066
[TRAP] 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070
[Raw/TCP] 945, 1073, 1074
[LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077
[IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088
[Novell] 1093, 1094 [SerchRoot] 1095
[Print queue] 1096 [Rendezvous] 1103
[SMB] 1117, 1136 [ASCII code] 977
[Link local host name] 1104
[Service name] 1105 [Host name] 1112
[Internet FAX] 1114, 1485
[Workgroup name] 1124 [Private print] 1432
[Function] 1433, 1434 [Scan to E-mail] 1484
[From Address] 1487, 1488, 1489
[E-mail domain] 1491
[External counter] 202, 381, 683, 975, 1126
[Counter copy] 257
[Paper size] 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to
16, 308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 3140 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Large/Small size] 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 3220 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0
to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2
[Double count] 345, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352,
353
[Paper source] 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370,
372, 374
[HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393
[Fuser unit] 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382
[Toner cartridge] 1376, 1410
[Media type] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1411
[System firmware] 900, 920, 921, 922, 923,
924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933,
934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944
[Engine firmware] 903, 905, 907, 908
[FAX] 915 [NIC] 916

Counter

Version

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 274
07/04

Classification

e-STUDIO200L/230/280
Adjustment Mode (05)

Setting Mode (08)

Maintenance

Others

[PM counter] 251, 252 [Telephone] 250


[Error history] 253 [FSMS] 258, 999
[Service notification] 702, 703, 707, 715, 716,
717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769,
770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778,
779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787,
788, 789, 790, 796
[HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740,
741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758,
759, 760, 765, 794, 1145
[Firmware download] 797
[Emergency Mode] 710, 711
[Destination] 201, 701, 849 [Line] 203
[Private printing] 259 [Local I/F] 614
[Memory] 615 [Partition] 662, 666, 667
[Clear] 693 [Trial period] 673, 695, 798, 799
[Banner] 678, 679, 680, 681
[Database] 684, 685, 686
[HDD] 670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426
[Control panel] 692
[Scrambler board] 696, 698, 699
[Data overwrite kit] 633
[Equipment number] 995
[Toner recycle] 838
[Machine identification information] 477
[Temperature/humidity] 839
[Initialization] 947 [Mode setting] 949
[Template] 1140 [NVRAM] 1427 [SRAM] 1428

[Equipment number] 976


[Toner recycle] 280

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 275
007/11

2.2.11

Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)


(e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283)

Classification
User interface

Scanner

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Date/Time] 200, 638, 640
[Timer] 204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen] 207, 602, 1132
[File] 209, 219, 264, 288
[Language] 220, 221
[Administrator] 263
[Scanning] 265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing] 267, 270, 950, 976, 980, 981, 985
[HDD] 271
[E-mail] 272, 1097, 1098
[default setting] 276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286,
331, 480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
682, 969, 986, 1135
[Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295,
296, 297, 298, 299, 973, 978, 979, 1856,
1857, 9117
[Copy volume] 300
[Original counter] 302
[Custom Mode] 508
[Energy saving] 601, 970
[AMS] 605 [Sound] 610
[Book duplexing] 611
[Summer time] 3852, 3853, 3854, 3855, 3856,
3857, 3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863
[Paper size] 613
[Department management] 617 620, 621, 622,
623, 624, 629, 672
[Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649
[Original direction] 628
[Image shift] 636, 1429, 1430
[Edit copying] 645, 646
[Box printing] 953, 954
[X in 1] 650
[Annotation] 651, 657
[Automatic transfer] 660, 661
[Indicator] 671
[Priority drawer] 689
[Media type] 697
[Job Build] 1130, 1131
[Display of REVERSE ORDER] 213
[Displaying number of original pages] 342
[Toner is nearly empty] 972
[Paper size setting (drawers)] 1478
[Selectable security level] 1708
[Keyboard layout] 1929, 1930, 1931, 1932,
1933, 1934, 1935
[JOB STATUS] 983
[Jam releasing] 9359
[PM] 9891
[Position] 305, 306
[Enhanced template] 9886, 9888
[Distortion] 308
[Reproduction ratio] 340
[Carriage position] 359
[Shading position] 350, 351

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 276
07/11

Classification
Image

Drive
Paper feeding

Laser

Development
High-voltage
transformer

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435,
436, 437, 438
[Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507,
508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715,
719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 931,
932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 940,
941, 942
[Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571,
572, 693, 694, 695, 820, 821, 822, 825, 826,
827, 830, 831, 832, 835, 836, 837, 913, 914,
915, 916, 917, 918, 919, 920, 921
[Gamma slope] 593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945
[Gamma balance] 596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 5980 to 2, 599-0 to 2
[Sharpness] 620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0
to 2, 867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924
[Smudged/Faint text] 648, 654, 655, 928
[Printer density] 667-0 to 4, 672-0 to 4, 676-0
to 4
[Binarizing] 700, 701, 702
[Main motor] 421, 422
[Exit motor] 424, 425
[Aligning amount] 448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0
to 2, 452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 463-0 to 2,
464-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2, 471-0 to 2,
472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2
[Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 7

[Laser power] 286


[Polygonal motor] 401, 405
[Write starting] 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443,
444, 445, 498-0 to 1
[Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 5
[Auto-toner] 200, 201
[Main charger bias] 210
[Developer bias] 205
[Transfer bias] 220, 221, 222
[Separation bias] 233, 234, 235

Fuser

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

[Error diffusion / Dither] 502, 509


[Default setting of sharpness] 1479

[paper dimension] 210, 229, 230, 231, 232,


233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241,
242, 243, 244, 245, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341,
471
[Paper feeding] 254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659,
988, 1133
[Retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 4660 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391,
1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398,
1399, 1400, 1401
[Paper size] 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 256
[Blank copying prevention] 625
[Incorrect paper size jam] 449
[Tab paper] 1437, 1438, 1439
[Detection method of 13" LG] 1492
[Polygonal motor] 398, 399, 478, 479, 483,
484, 485, 486, 488, 489, 490
[Power correction] 872, 873, 875, 876, 877

[Auto-toner] 414, 455


[Transfer bias] 491, 492, 493, 830, 868, 869
[Main charger bias] 805, 806, 807, 808, 809,
826, 864, 865, 866, 867
[Developer bias] 833, 834, 835, 836, 837, 859,
860, 861, 862, 863
[Separation bias] 831, 870, 871
[Status counter] 400
[Temperature] 404-0 to 3, 405-0 to 3, 407, 409,
410, 411, 412, 413, 424-0 to 3, 425-0 to 3,
433-0 to 1, 437, 438, 448, 450, 451, 452, 453,
515, 516, 518, 520, 521, 525-0 to 3, 527-0 to
3, 535, 536-0 to 3, 537-0 to 3, 800-0 to 1, 8010 to 1, 802-0 to 1, 803-0 to 1, 804-0 to 1, 886,
896-0 to 1
[Pre-running] 417, 439, 440, 441, 523, 526

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 277
07/11

Classification
RADF
Finisher

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Aligning amount] 354, 355
[Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366
[Folding / Binding position] 468-0 to 2

Network

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

[Switchback] 462
[Tray reset] 648
[Cascade] 652, 653
[Interruption of stapling operation (no staple) ]
704-0 to 1
[Hole punching] 9847
[NIC] 1002, 1003, 1119
[IP address] 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010,
3769
[IPv6] 3767, 3768, 3770, 3775, 3776, 3777
[IPX] 1011, 1099
[Frame type] 1012
[NCP] 1013
[AppleTalk] 1014, 1015, 1854, 1855, 1936
[LDAP] 1016, 1138, 1139, 3506, 3507, 3743,
9629
[DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019, 3736, 3781, 3782,
3784
[DDNS] 1020, 3737, 3745, 3746, 3747, 3748
[DPWS] 3749, 3750, 3751, 3752, 3753, 3754,
3755, 3756, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760, 3761,
3762, 3763, 3764, 3765, 3766, 3785
[NetBios] 1023
[WINS] 1024, 1025
[Bindery] 1026
[NDS] 1027
[Directory] 1028, 1029
[HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 3738
[SMTP] 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042,
1100, 1101, 1102, 3741
[Direct SMTP] 3810, 3811
[Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045
[POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051,
1052, 3742, 3744
[FTP] 1055, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061,
1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 3739
[MIB] 1063
[Community] 1065, 1066
[TRAP] 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070
[Raw/TCP] 945, 1073, 1074
[LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077, 1852, 1853
[IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447, 1448,
1449, 1450, 1451, 1850, 1851
[Novell] 1093, 1094
[SerchRoot] 1095
[Print queue] 1096
[Rendezvous] 1103
[SMB] 1117, 1950, 1951
[ASCII code] 977
[Link local host name] 1104
[Service name] 1105
[Host name] 1112
[Internet FAX] 1114, 1485, 3812, 3819, 3820,
3821, 3822, 3823, 3824, 3825, 3826, 3827,
3828, 3829, 3830
[Workgroup name] 1124
[Samba] 1464, 3783, 3833
[Private print] 1432

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 278
07/11

Classification

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)

Network

[Scan to E-mail] 1484


[From Address] 1487, 1489
[E-mail] 3837, 9946, 9947
[E-mail domain] 1491
[User authentication] 1113, 1471, 1496, 1921,
1922, 1925, 1937, 1943, 1954, 1955, 1956,
1957
[PDC] 1121
[BDC] 1122
[NT domain] 1123
[Address book] 1125, 1476, 1477
[Netware] 1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148
[MAC address] 1141
[ACC] 1431
[Disable print save] 1435
[Disable fax save] 1436
[IP Confilct] 1440
[SNTP] 1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446, 3740,
3845
[Device authentication] 1470, 1920, 1952,
1953, 1958, 1959, 1942, 1944
[IP Filter] 1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725,
1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731, 1732,
1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1739
[SSL setting] 1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744,
1745, 1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751,
9819, 9822
[Enable server's IP] 1755, 1756, 1757, 1759,
1760, 1762, 1767, 3772, 3773, 3774, 3778,
3779, 3780
[Previous IP address] 1768
[Card authentification] 1776, 1777, 1927
[Scan to File] 1779, 1784, 1786
[Notification of scan job] 1781-0 to 1
[Save as file and Email transmission] 1782,
1783, 1785, 9394
[Network scanning] 1915, 1940, 3804, 3815,
3816, 3817, 3818
[LDAP authentication] 1923, 1924
[Role Based Access] 1928, 3831
[Prefix] 3771
[LLTD] 3793
[LLMNR] 3794
[Telnet] 3864, 3865, 3866, 3867, 3868
[Driver] 1660, 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665,
1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672,
1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678
[Supplicant] 1679, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685,
1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1696,
1697, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1704, 1705, 1706,
1707, 1764, 1765, 1766, 1764, 1765, 1766
[Bluetooth] 1709, 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713,
1714, 1715, 1716, 1717, 1719, 1941

Wireless LAN

Bluetooth

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 279
07/11

Classification

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)

Counter

[External counter] 202, 381, 683, 975, 1126


[Counter copy] 257
[Paper size] 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to
16, 308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 3140 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Large/Small size] 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 3220 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0
to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2
[Double count] 345, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352,
353
[Paper source] 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370,
372, 374
[HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393
[Fuser unit] 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382
[Toner cartridge] 1376, 1410
[Media type] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1411
[Number of output pages] 1530-0 to 7, 1533-0
to 7, 1535-0 to 7, 6810-0 to 7, 6813-0 to 7,
6815-0 to 7
[System firmware] 900, 920, 921, 922, 923,
924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933,
934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944
[Engine firmware] 903, 905, 907, 908
[FAX] 915

Version

Maintenance

[PM counter] 251, 252


[Telephone] 250
[Error history] 253
[FSMS] 258, 999
[Service notification] 702, 703, 707, 715, 716,
717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769,
770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778,
780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788,
789, 790, 796
[HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740,
741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758,
759, 760, 765, 794, 1145, 9739, 9880, 9881
[Firmware download] 797
[Emergency Mode] 710, 711
[Service call checking period] 1495
[Equipment information] 9960

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 280
07/11

Classification
General

e-STUDIO202L/203L/232/233/282/283
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Equipment number] 976
[Toner recycle] 280

[Destination] 201, 701, 849


[Line] 203
[Private printing] 259
[Local I/F] 614
[Memory] 615
[Partition] 662, 666, 667
[Clear] 693
[Trial period] 673, 695, 798, 799
[Banner] 678, 679, 680, 681
[Database] 684, 685, 686
[HDD] 670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426
[Control panel] 692
[Scrambler board] 696, 698, 699
[Data overwrite kit] 633
[Equipment number] 995
[Toner recycle] 838
[Machine identification information] 477
[Temperature/humidity] 839
[Initialization] 947
[Mode setting] 949
[Template] 1140, 3851
[NVRAM] 1427
[SRAM] 1428
[TAT partition] 1118
[Enhanced bold] 1149
[User data management] 1472, 1473, 1474,
1481, 1482, 1483
[Limitation] 1494, 9829
[e-Filing Access Mode] 1497
[Inbound FAX] 1498
[Card reader] 1772, 1773, 1774, 1775
[Administrator's password] 1778
[FAX reception] 1926
[File/Email] 1913, 1916
[Extension fields] 1914
[KS/KSMM setting] 1961
[KS] 1960, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967,
1968, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975,
1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980
[KSSM] 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989,
1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994
[Remote scanning] 3850, 9828
[Filling box] 9882
[Data encryption] 3834
[Data cloning] 9889
[Electronic licence key] 3840, 3841, 3842
[FAX function] 3847, 3848, 3849

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 281
07/11

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 282

3.

ADJUSTMENT

3.1

Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor

When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
<Procedure> (Adjustment Mode (05-200))
(1) Install the process unit into the equipment.
Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.

[0][5]
[POWER]

A3

100%

TEST MODE

Fig. 3-1

(3)

Key in code [200] and press the [START] button.


The display changes as follows.
B

230%
[200]

[START]

200

A3

TEST MODE

128

128
C

A
Fig. 3-2

Notes:
A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output. Press the Up or Down button
to change the value.
B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
C indicates the latest adjustment value.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3-1

(4)

After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.

230%

A3

200

TEST MODE

WAIT

128

128
Fig. 3-3

(5)

After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.
B

240%

A3

200

ADJUSTMENT MODE

150

128

A
Fig. 3-4

(6)

Check if the value B is within the range of 235 to 245 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.35 V to 2.45 V).

(7)

If the value B is not within the range of 235 to 245, press the Up or Down button to adjust the
value manually.
Note:
The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.

(8)

Button to be pressed

Value A

Value B

Up

Increased

Increased

Down

Decreased

Decreased

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.


The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]

100%

A3

TEST MODE

Fig. 3-5

(9)

Turn the power OFF.

(10) Install the toner cartridge.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2

3.2
3.2.1

Image Dimensional Adjustment


General description

There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted
1

Paper alignment at the registration roller

Printer related
adjustment

Scanner related
adjustment

Code in mode 05
448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474

(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction


(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed)

401

(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position

411

(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction


(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)

421

(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position

441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445

(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position


at duplexing

498

(a) Image distortion

(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction

405

(c) Image location of primary scanning direction

306

(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction

340

(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction

305

(f) Top margin

430

(g) Right margin

432

(h) Bottom margin

433

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3-3

[Procedure to key in adjustment values]


In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).

<Operation keys>

<Display>

100%
0

A3

TEST MODE

POWER
1
Code No.

Digital keys : Enter codes.

XXX

100%
START

A3

TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment
values.
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored

replacing values YYY.


INTERRUPT
or

FAX

Test copy

YYY

ZZZ

Adjustment value newly entered


(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)

Current adjustment value


100%

A3

A3

A3

TEST MODE

100%
Wait Warming Up

If the test copy does not


satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
procedure.

100%
COPYING

Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.

Fig. 3-6

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4

3.2.2

Paper alignment at the registration roller

The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Paper
type

Weight

Plain
paper

Upper
drawer

Lower
drawer

PFP upper
drawer

PFP lower
drawer

LCF

ADU

Bypass
feed

64-80 g/m2
17-20 lb.

450 (*1)

452 (*1)

448 (*1)

449 (*1)

457

455 (*1)

458 (*1)

Thick
paper 1

81-105g/m2
21-28 lb.

469 (*1)

470 (*1)

471 (*1)

472 (*1)

473

474 (*1)

460 (*1)

Thick
paper 2

106-163g/m2
29-43 lb.

461 (*1)

Thick
paper 3

164-209g/m2
44-55 lb.

462 (*2)

OHP

463 (*3)

Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size
(*2) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size 3: Post card
(*3) 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-239 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of Post card is for Japan only.
<Procedure>
(1)

Perform the test print according to the following procedure.


(Not necessary for LCF)

[0][5]
[Power]

(Code)

[START]

(Sub-code)

[SET] or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores in memory

[START]
[Drawer
selection]

Current value
displayed
(*4) +[FAX]

(Test print)

Enter new
value
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(*4) 1: Single-sided grid pattern 3: Double-sided grid pattern

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3-5

(2)

Check if any transfer void is occurring. If


there is a transfer problem, try the values in
descending order as 31
30
29
until the transfer void disappears. At the
same time, confirm if any paper jam occurs.
Also, when the aligning amount has been
increased, this may increase the scraping
noise caused by the paper and the Mylar
sheet as it is transported by the registration
roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to
decrease the value.

Transfer void

mm

00

mm

-1

50

Fig. 3-7

(3)

Perform the same procedure for all paper sources.

Note:
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration
section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge
position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while
confirming the leading edge position is not shifted.
* As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the aligning amount.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6

3.2.3

Printer related adjustment

[A]

Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed (Printer))
<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Press [1]
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from standard
drawer of the equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(3)

Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance A from the 1st line
to the 21st line of the grid pattern.

(4)

Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm.

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in code [401])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [1]
[FAX]
(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.125 mm/
step).

[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Press [1]
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from standard
drawer of the equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(3)

Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge
of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.

(4)

Check if the distance B is within 520.5 mm.

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [411])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [1]
[FAX]
(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/
step).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3-7
04/09

(6)

After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.

(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [410])
[START]
(Key in the same value in the step 5 above)
Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed
(Copier/Printer))
<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment mode)

(2)

Press [1]
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from standard
drawer of the equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(3)

Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 10th
line at the leading edge of the paper to the 30th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.

(4)

Check if the distance C is within 2000.5 mm.

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in code [421])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [1]
[FAX]
(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.125 mm/
step).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8
04/09

[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position


This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. (If there is no paper source, skip this step.)
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values.
Perform 08-477 and check the value.
When the value is 0.
Order for
adjustment

Paper source

Code

Paper size

Acceptable
value

Lower drawer

441

A3/LD

0 to 40

Upper drawer

440

A4/LT

0 to 15

PFP or LCF

444/443

A4/LT

0 to 15

Bypass feed

442

A4/LT

0 to 15

Duplexing

445

A3/LD

0 to 15

Paper fed from the lower drawer

Remarks

Remarks

When the value is 1.


Order for
adjustment

Paper source

Code

Paper size

Acceptable
value

Upper drawer

440

A3/LD

0 to 40

Lower drawer

441

A4/LT

0 to 40

PFP or LCF

444/443

A4/LT

0 to 15

Bypass feed

442

A4/LT

0 to 15

Duplexing

445

A3/LD

0 to 15

Paper fed from the upper drawer

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)

(3)

Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance D from the leading
edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.

(4)

Check if the distance D is within 520.5 mm.

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.

[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)

(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code shown above)
[START]
(Key in an acceptable value shown above)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]
(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/step).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3-9
07/04

[E]

Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing


Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

[E-1] Adjustment for long-sized paper


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Press [3]
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from standard
drawer of the equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(3)

Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.

(4)

Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm.

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in code [498])
[START]
[0]
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed.
Press [3]
[FAX]
(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/
step).

[E-2] Adjustment for short-sized paper


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Press [3]
drawer.)

(3)

Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.

(4)

Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm.

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.

[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper

(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [498])
[START]
[1]
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
100% A is displayed
Press [3]
[FAX]
(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/
step).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10
04/09

21

A
6

B, E

30

Feeding direction

10

Fig. 3-8 Grid pattern

<Procedure>
Perform 08-477 and check the value.
When the value is 0.
[0] [5] [Power ON]
[1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing)
[FAX]
A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)
2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)
B:

05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)

520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)


Key in the same value for 05-410.

C:
D:

05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)

2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)


05-441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
520.5 mm(0.4 mm/step)

E:

05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD),


498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)

520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 11
04/09

When the value is 1.


[0] [5] [Power ON]
[1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing)
[FAX]
A: 05-401 (Upper drawer, A3/LD)
2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)
B:

05-411 (Upper drawer, A3/LD)

C:

05-421 (Upper drawer, A3/LD)

520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)


Key in the same value for 05-410.

D:

2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)


05-440 (Upper drawer, A3/LD), 441 (Lower drawer, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
520.5 mm(0.4 mm/step)

E:

05-498-0 (Upper drawer, A3/LD),


498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT))

520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)

Remark:
When the adjustment (05-421) is performed, the same adjustment for FAX (05-422) is automatically and consecutively performed.

3.2.4
[A]

Scanner related adjustment

Image distortion

Feeding direction

Step 1

Feeding direction

Step 2

Fig. 3-9

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12
05/05

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously,


turn the power ON.

Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)

(2)

Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on


a sheet of A3/LD paper.

(3)

Key in [308] and press the [START] button to


move the carriage to the adjustment position.

(4)

Make an adjustment in the order of step 1


and 2.
Step 1
- In case of A:
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CW).
- In case of B:
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Step 2
- In case of C:
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CW).
- In case of D:
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CCW).

(5)

Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)


Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Product name: 1401E

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Carriage-2

Fig. 3-10

Adjustment screw
for the mirror-1 (Rear)

Carriage-1

Fig. 3-11

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 13

[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction


<Procedure>
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).

(3)

Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and standard drawer of the equipment
(Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.

(5)

Check if the distance A is within the range of 2600.5 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [405])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance A become (approx. 0.125 mm/step).

50

100

150

Copied image of the ruler

200

250

(1)

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-12
e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 14
04/09

[C] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.

(3)

Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and standard drawer of the equipment
(Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.

(5)

Check if the distance B is within the range of 100.5 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [306])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance
B becomes narrower (0.085 mm/step).

50

100

150

200

Copied image of the ruler

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-13

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 15
04/09

[D] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.

(3)

Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and standard drawer of the equipment
(Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the distance C from 200 mm to 400 mm of the copied image of the ruler.

(5)

Check if the distance C is within the range of 2000.5 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [340])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes (0.45 mm/
step).
Copied image of the ruler

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-14

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16
04/09

[E] Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.

(3)

Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and standard drawer of the equipment
(Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.

(5)

Check if the distance D is within the range of 100.5 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [305])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (0.14
mm/step).
Copied image of the ruler

10

20

30

40

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-15

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 17
04/09

[F] Top margin


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Open the platen cover or RADF.

(3)

Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and standard drawer of the
equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.

(5)

Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 0.5 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [430])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

Feeding direction

E
Fig. 3-16

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18
04/09

[G] Right margin


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Open platen cover or RADF.

(3)

Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and standard drawer of the
equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.

(5)

Check if the blank area F is within the range of 21.0 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [432])
[START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-17

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 19
04/09

[H] Bottom margin


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(Adjustment Mode)

(2)

Open platen cover or RADF.

(3)

Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and standard drawer of
the equipment (Refer to *).
* Perform 08-477 and check the value.
If the value is 0, use the lower drawer.
If the value is 1, use the upper drawer.

(4)

Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.

(5)

Check if the blank area G is within the range of 21.0 mm.

(6)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode)
(Key in the code [433])
[START]
(Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

G
Fig. 3-18

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20
04/09

3.3

Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)

3.3.1

Density adjustment

The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

503
(931)

501
(933)

504
(932)

Manual density mode center


value

The larger the value is, the darker the


image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

505
(934)

506
(936)

507
(935)

Manual density mode light


step value

The larger the value is, the lighter the


light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

508
(937)

509
(939)

510
(938)

Manual density mode dark


step value

The larger the value is, the darker the


dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

514
(940)

512
(942)

515
(941)

Automatic density mode

The larger the value is, the darker the


image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

* The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.


Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3)

Key in an adjustment value.


(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)

(4)

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value.


the ready state.

(5)

Let the equipment restarted and perform copying job.

(6)

If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

The equipment goes back to

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 21

3.3.2

Gamma slope adjustment

Gamma slope is adjustable with the following codes.


< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

593
(943)

594
(945)

595
(944)

Item to be adjusted
Gamma slope adjustment

Remarks
One's place:
0: equivalent to the set value 5
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope
angle. (The larger the value
is, the larger the angle
becomes.)
Ten's place:
0: equivalent to the set value 5
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle
of the low density area. (The
smaller the value is, the
darker the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value

The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

P.3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22

3.3.3

Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo

Photo

Text

620
(922)

621
(924)

622
(923)

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Sharpness adjustment

Key in the following values depending on the original mode.


Ones place
1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 5: Text
Tens place
0: Use Default value
1 to 9: Change intensity
(The larger the value is, the sharper
the image becomes.)
Example of value entry in case
the mode is Text/Photo.

21

Fixed value for Text/


Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9

Note:
Note:

When the value 0 is keyed in


at the tens digit, the value is
not displayed on LCD screen.

* The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.


Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

P.3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 23

3.3.4

Setting range correction

The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or
fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

570
(913)

571
(915)

572
(914)

Range correction for original


manually set on the original
glass

693
(916)

694
(918)

695
(917)

Range correction for original


set on the RADF

Remarks
The following are the default values
set for each original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
Tens place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied

* The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.


Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

3.3.5

P.3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)

The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo

Photo

Text

532
(919)

533
(921)

534
(920)

Item to be adjusted
Background peak for range
correction

Remarks
When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the
image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 64)

* The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.


Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

P.3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24

3.3.6

Adjustment of smudged/faint text

The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.


< Adjustment Mode (05) >
< e-STUDIO 200L/230/280 >
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text/Photo
653
(928)

Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text

Remarks
When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.

< e-STUDIO 202L/203L/232/233/282/283 >


Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text/Photo
648
(928)

Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text

Remarks
When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 2)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.

The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

3.3.7

P.3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

Gamma balance adjustment


< e-STUDIO 202L/203L/232/233/282/283 >

The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language and screen
Item to be adjusted

Smooth
(PS)

Detail
(PS)

Smooth
(PCL)

Detail
(PCL)

596-0

597-0

598-0

599-0

Low density

596-1

597-1

598-1

599-1

Medium density

596-2

597-2

598-2

599-2

High density

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 25
07/11

3.3.8

Adjustment of image density

The image density level can be set at the following codes.


< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Code
667-0 to 4

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Adjustment of image density

When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.


Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and small number of the setting value corresponding to the
sub code.
Ex.) When the image density level for 667-0,
667-1, 667-2, 667-3, and 667-4 is assumed
to be "A","B", "C", "D", and "E" respectively,
they should have the following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image specifications
and life span of the replacing parts may not
meet the standard when the setting value is
changed from the default value.

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Key in the code 667 and press the [START] button.

(3)

Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.

(4)

Key in an adjustment value.


(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)

(5)

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.

(6)

For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7)

Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.

(8)

If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26
06/09

3.4

Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)

3.4.1

Adjustment of smudged/faint text

The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.


< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language
PS

PCL

654

655

Remarks
When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value
decreases, the faint text is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3)

Key in an adjustment value.


(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)

(4)

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.

(5)

Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.

(6)

If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 27

3.4.2

Adjustment of image density

The image density level is adjustable both at standard and toner saving modes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Toner mode
Standard

Toner saving

672-0 to 4

676-0 to 4

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Adjustment of image density

When the value is decreased, text becomes


lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and
small number of the setting value
corresponding to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density
level for 672-0, 672-1, 672-2,
672-3, and 672-4 is assumed to
be "A","B", "C", "D", and "E"
respectively, they should have the
following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image specifications and life span of the
replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value
is changed from the default value.

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3)

Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.

(4)

Key in an adjustment value.


(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)

(5)

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.

(6)

For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7)

Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.

(8)

If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28
06/09

3.5

Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)

3.5.1

Density adjustment

Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment button.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

845

847

846

Manual density mode center


value

The larger the value is, the darker the


image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

850

852

851

Manual density mode light


step value

The larger the value is, the lighter the


light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

855

857

856

Manual density mode dark


step value

The larger the value is, the darker the


dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

860

862

861

Automatic density mode

The larger the value is, the darker the


image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3)

Key in an adjustment value.


(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)

(4)

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.

(5)

Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform scanning job.

(6)

If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 29

3.5.2

Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

865-0

867-0

866-0

Reproduction ratio:
25% to 40%

865-1

867-1

866-1

Reproduction ratio:
41% to 80%

865-2

867-2

866-2

Reproduction ratio:
81% to 400%

Remarks
Key in the following values depending on the original mode.
Ones place
1: Text/Photo 5: Photo 2: Text
Tens place
0: Use Default value
1 to 9: Change intensity
The larger the value is, the
sharper the image becomes.)
Example of value entry in case
the mode is Text/Photo.

21

Fixed value for Text/


Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9

Note:
Note:

When the value 0 is keyed in


at the tens digit, the value is
not displayed on LCD screen.

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3)

Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.

(4)

Key in an adjustment value.


(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)

(5)

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.

(6)

For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7)

Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform scanning job.

(8)

If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30

3.5.3

Setting range correction

The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or
fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

825

827

826

Range correction for original


manually set on the original
glass

830

832

831

Range correction for original


set on the RADF

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

Remarks
The following are the default values
set for each original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 12
Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
Tens place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1: fixed
fixed
2: varied
fixed
3: fixed
varied
4: varied
varied

P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 31

3.5.4

Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)

The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo

Photo

Text

835

837

836

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

3.5.5

Item to be adjusted
Background peak for range
correction

Remarks
When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the
image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: text/photo: 48, photo: 40,
text: 48)

P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".

Setting range correction (Adjustment of text peak)

The levels of the text peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode

Text/Photo

Photo

Text

820

822

821

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Text peak for range correction When the value is increased, text
(high image density part) becomes
lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: text/photo: 224, photo: 239,
text: 224)

The image changes slightly in text mode because it is treated as a simple binary format image.

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of

P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32
04/09

3.6

Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer

When replacing the high-voltage transformer, checking each output adjustment of main charger, developer bias, transfer charger and separation charger is needed.

3.6.1

Adjustment

[ 1 ] Preparation
Items to check

Developer Bias

Process Unit

Main Charger

Transfer
Charger

Separation
Charger

Take off from the equipment. (Not used)

High-Voltage Transformer Jig Install the high-voltage transformer jig in the equipment.
Note:
Note:
Connect the green cable of the high-voltage transformer jig to ground on
the equipment frame. Refer to
P.3-34 "[A] Installation of the high-voltage transformer jig".
Digital
Tester

(+) terminal

() terminal

Connect with the black


cable of the high-voltage transformer jig.

Connect with the red


cable (thick line) of the
high-voltage transformer jig.

Connect with the white cable of the high-voltage transformer jig.

Function switch

DC

Full-scale (range)
Remarks

Connect with the red cable


(thin line) of the high-voltage
transformer jig.

1000 V

2V

Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 M (RMS value) or higher.

How to turn ON the power

Attach the door switch jig and start with the adjustment mode [05] while the front
cover opened. Then press the front cover opening/closing switch.

Note

Refer to
P.3-36 "[B]
Connection for developer bias adjustment".

Refer to
P.3-36 "[C]
Connection for main
charger adjustment".

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Refer to
P.3-37 "[D] Connection for transfer/separation
charger adjustment".

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 33

[A]

Installation of the high-voltage transformer jig

(1)

Open the bypass tray, ADU and transfer


cover.
(2) Open the front cover and take off the toner
cartridge.
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Loosen 2 screws
and pull out the process unit.
Note:
Be careful not to let the connector and the
harness be caught when installing the process unit after adjustment.
Process unit

Connector

Fig. 3-19

(4)

Install the high-voltage transformer jig and fix


it with 2 screws.
Note:
Be careful not to let the connector and the
harness be caught.

High-voltage transformer jig

Fig. 3-20

(5)

Fix the green cable of the high-voltage transformer jig to the frame of the equipment.

Screw
Green cable

Fig. 3-21

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34
04/09

(6)
(7)

Install the door switch jig.


Close the transfer cover.

Front cover opening/closing switch

Door switch jig

3
Fig. 3-22

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 35

[B]

Connection for developer bias adjustment

Front cover opening/closing switch

Ground to the
machine frame
(green cable)

(+) terminal:
Connect with the black cable

(-) terminal:
Connect with the white cable

Fig. 3-23

[C] Connection for main charger adjustment

Front cover opening/closing switch

Ground to the
machine frame
(green cable)

(+) terminal:
Connect with the
red cable (thick line)

(-) terminal:
Connect with the white cable

Fig. 3-24

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36

[D] Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment

Front cover opening/closing switch

Ground to the
machine frame
(green cable)

3
(+) terminal:
Connect with the
red cable (thin line)

(-) terminal:
Connect with the white cable

Fig. 3-25

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 37

[ 2 ] Operation
Note:
When adjusting output of high-voltage transformer, make sure to use the high-voltage transformer jig.
Connect the digital testers as described in [1] Preparation, and follow the procedure on the next
page to adjust the output from the main charger, developer bias charger, transfer charger and separation charger.
<Keys to press>

<Display>

A3

XXX

A3

100%

[0][5]
[POWER]

TEST MODE

Press the front cover


opening/closing switch.
1
[Digital keys] : Enter the code.

100%

Code No.

TEST MODE

[START]

YYY
Current set value
[UP] or [DOWN]: Adjust the value YYY to satisfy the following table.
Code
Adjustment value

Developer bias
205
-3575V

Main charger
210
-4955V

Code
Adjustment value

Leading edge
area of paper
220
1326141mV

Transfer charger
Center area
of paper
221
1407141mV

Code
Adjustment value

Leading edge
area of paper
233
-56672mV

[SET] : Adjusted value YYY is stored in memory.


or
[INTERRUPT]
100%

Trailing edge
area of paper
222
1005106mV

Separation charger
Trailing edge
Center area
area of paper
of paper
234
235
-56672mV
-39136mV

A3

TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter
the other adjustment
code.
[POWER] : OFF/ON
Fig. 3-26

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38

3.6.2

Precautions

[ 1 ] Developer bias
Note for adjustment
Adjust the developer bias if fogging occurs over the entire image even though the main charger grid
voltage and toner density are appropriate. However, the following may occur if the developer bias is
lowered too much:
Image contrast becomes low.
Image is patchy or blurred.
The carrier in the developer material adheres to the photoconductive drum, causing scratches
around the cleaner.

[ 2 ] Transfer
Items to check before adjustment
Blotched image or poor transfer can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
transfer output. Check the following items before adjusting the transfer charger. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the transfer charger.
Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty? Is the transfer guide deformed?
Is the process unit properly installed? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the process unit worked correctly? Is the toner density low?
Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
Is the separation output different from the set value?
Is the developer bias value an appropriate one?
Are the transfer/separation charger case grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded?
Note for adjustment
When blotched image appear:
If blotched image appear in halftone areas, lower the transfer output value. Remember that transfer
performance becomes low if the transfer output value is lowered too much.
When poor transfer occurs:
Increase the transfer output value under the following conditions. Remember that blotched image
appear if the transfer output value is increased too much.
Transfer is poor even though the charger wire is not dirty.
Thick paper has been frequently used.
The adjustment code varies according to where blotched image and poor transfer occur. Select the
required adjustment code while referring to the following diagram.
Approx. 11mm
Adjustment code

"220"

Approx. 5mm
"221"

Leading edge
area of paper

"222"
Trailing edge
area of paper

Fig. 3-27

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 39

[ 3 ] Separation
Items to check before adjustment
Poor paper separation from the drum can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
the separation output. Check the following items before making an adjustment. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the separation charger.
Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty?
Is the process unit installed properly? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the process unit worked correctly? Is the toner density low?
Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
Is the output of the main charger normal?
Is the developer bias an appropriate value?
Is the transfer output different from the set value?
Is the transfer/separation charger case grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded?
Is the separation finger in contact with the drum surface?
Note for adjustment
When poor paper separation occurs:
Increase the separation output value under the following conditions. Remember that if the separation
output value is increased too much, blotched image occurs and separation performance becomes low.
Poor separation occurs even though the charger wire is not dirty.
Thin paper has been frequently used.
When poor transfer occurs:
Decrease the separation output value when poor transfer occurs. Remember that the separation
performance becomes low if the separation output value is decreased too much.
The adjustment code varies according to where poor paper separation and poor transfer occur. Select
the required adjustment code while referring to the following diagram.
Approx. 11mm Approx. 35mm
Adjustment code

"233"

"235"

Approx. 48mm
"234"

Leading edge
area of paper

"235"
Trailing edge
area of paper

Fig. 3-28

Adjustment code 235 performs the adjustment for 2 areas.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40

3.7

Adjustment of the Scanner Section

3.7.1

Carriages

[A] Installing carriage wires


When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:
[Front side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire

Bracket for carriage-1

Idler pulley

Wire pulley

Hook
Tension spring

Fig. 3-29

[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire

Idler pulley

Bracket for carriage-1


Hook

Tension spring

Wire pulley

Fig. 3-30

Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 41

[B] Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions


<Procedure>
(1)

Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.

(2)

Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2

Pulley bracket
[Front]

[Rear]

Exit side frame

A
Fig. 3-31

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42

(3)

Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Front]

[Rear]

Exit side frame


Bracket

Bracket

C
Fig. 3-32

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 43

[C] Assembling carriage wires (Winding the wire around the wire pulley)
<Procedure>
(1)

Pull the 3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.

(2)

Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
4 turns toward the boss side

Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire.
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
4 turns

4 turns

2 turns

2 turns

Ball terminal
Ball terminal
No space between turns

Hook

Hook

Color: Silver

[Rear]

Color: Black

[Front]
Fig. 3-33

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44

(3)

After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.

Notes:
When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed through between the
arm and the jig.

Arm

3
Wire holder jig

Fig. 3-34

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 45

3.7.2

Lens unit

[A] Replacing the lens unit


The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the
field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole
unit.
When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 4 screws indicated with the arrows.

Fig. 3-35

Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).

Fig. 3-36

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46

[B]

Adjustment of the magnification ratio of the lens


Notes:
Perform this adjustment only when the lens unit is taken off or replaced.
Make sure that the primary scanning reproduction ratio (printer section) is correct before this
adjustment.

(1)

Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LTsized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.

(2)

Compare the copied ruler with the actual


ruler.

Feeding Direction

Copied ruler

Actual ruler

Fig. 3-37

(3)

If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.

<Procedure>
(1)

Take off the original glass and lens cover.

(2)

Loosen 2 screws fixing the lens unit.

Screw

Lens unit

Fig. 3-38

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 47

(3)

Slide the lens unit to the right or left direction using the marks on the lens base as a guide. (Slide
right when the copied ruler is magnified and slide left when the copied ruler is demagnified.)
The following table shows how the reproduction ratio difference between the copied ruler and
actual ruler corresponds to the movement amount of the lens unit.
Reproduction-ratio error

Movement amount of unit

0.1%

0.5 mm

0.2%

0.9 mm

0.3%

1.4 mm

0.4%

1.8 mm

0.5%

2.3 mm

0.6%

2.7 mm

0.7%

3.2 mm

0.8%

3.6 mm

0.9%

4.1 mm

1.0%

4.5 mm

Lens unit
Fig. 3-39

Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer).
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
(4)

Tighten 2 screws fixing the lens unit.

(5)

Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.

(6)

Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48

3.8
3.8.1

Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System


Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding

<Procedure>
The center of the printed image shifts to the front
side.
Move the guide to the front side (Arrow
(A) direction in the lower figure).

The center of the printed image shifts to the rear


side.
Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow
(B) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]

[Rear]

3
Feeding direction

Feeding direction

Center

Center

[Front]

[Front]
Fig. 3-40

Fig. 3-41

Bypass feeding
1) Loosen the screen.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screw.

Drawer feeding
1) Loosen 2 screws.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screws.

(B)
(A)

(A)

(B)

Fig. 3-42

Fig. 3-43

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 49
05/07

3.9

Adjustment of Developer Unit

3.9.1

Doctor-to-sleeve gap

Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig


<Procedure>
(1)

Perform the adjustment code 05-280.

(2)

Take out the process unit from the equipment.

(3)

Take out the developer unit from the process unit.

(4)

Remove 2 screws and take off the developer


material cover and discharge the developer
material.
Note:
Discharge the developer material from the
rear side, being careful not to let it be scattered on the gear.

Developer
material cover

Fig. 3-44

(5)

Turn the adjustment screw to widen the gap


so that the jig can be inserted in it.
(Turning the screw clockwise widens the
gap)

Screw

Fig. 3-45

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50

(6)

Insert the gauge with the thickness 0.45 of


the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between
the developer sleeve and doctor blade after
lifting up the toner scattering prevention
sheet.
Adjust the screws with the doctor blade to
push the doctor sleeve jig lightly.

Doctor sleeve jig

Screw

Toner scattering
prevention sheet

3
Fig. 3-46

(7)

Insert the gauge 0.40 of the doctor sleeve


jig into the gap between the developer
sleeve and doctor blade. Confirm that the jig
moves smoothly to the front and rear side,
and the gauge 0.50 cannot be inserted into
the gap.

Doctor sleeve jig

Developer
sleeve

Fig. 3-47

(8)

Confirm that the side seals are attached on


the toner scattering prevention sheet.

Side seal

Toner scattering
prevention sheet

Fig. 3-48

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 51

(9)

Attach the developer material cover and


tighten 2 screws.
Note:
After the developer material has been
replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor.
(See
P.3-1 "3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner
Sensor".)

Developer
material cover

Fig. 3-49

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52

3.10 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3016)


3.10.1

Adjustment of RADF position

It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Remove the platen sheet during adjustment.
<Procedure>
(1)

Open the RADF and then attach 2 positioning pins to the equipment.
(The positioning pins have been attached at
the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)

Positioning pin

Fig. 3-50

(2)

Close the RADF to check that the positioning


pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.
If they do not, adjust them according to the
following procedure.

Fig. 3-51

(3)

Loosen the stepped screw 1 turn and 2


screws on the adjustment plate a half turn
(status of temporary fixing).
Half turn

1 turn

Fig. 3-52

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 53

(4)

Remove the stepped screw at the rear of


right-hand hinge.

Fig. 3-53

(5)

Open the RADF, and then loosen 2 hand


screws 1 turn (status of tentative fixing).

Screw

Fig. 3-54

(6)

Remove the positioning pin at the front side.


Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into
the hole at the rear side of the RADF. While
peering inside from the front side, fit the positions of the pin and hole by moving the
RADF right and left.

Fig. 3-55

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54

(7)

Tighten the positioning pin at the front side.


Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into
the hole at the front side of the RADF. (For
the front side, adjust the RADF position all
around.)

3
Fig. 3-56

(8)

While peering inside from the left side, close


the RADF. Check the positions of the holes
of the RADF and pins and then fit their positions by moving the RADF back and forth.
(For the front side, also adjust the RADF
position right and left.) Make sure not to dislocate the positions of the pin and hole at the
rear side.

Fig. 3-57

(9)

Open the RADF to tighten 2 hand screws.


Close the RADF and then check again that
the positioning pins fit smoothly into the
holes on the RADF.

Fig. 3-58

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 55

(10) Match the rear hole of the right-hand hinge


and the hole of the equipment side to tighten
the stepped screw. If they do not fit, adjust
the position of the hole by turning the screw
of the adjustment plate.

Screw of the adjustment plate

Fig. 3-59

(11) Tighten the stepped screw and 2 screws on


the adjustment plate.
Open and close the RADF to check again
that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the
holes on the RADF. Remove the positioning
pins after checking it.
(Replace the positioning pins at the rear of
the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)

Screw

Stepped screw

Fig. 3-60

(12) Place the platen sheet on the original glass


with the semi round cutout toward you.
Align the platen sheet against the left and
rear side of the original glass. Close the
RADF slowly. Open the RADF to check that
the platen sheet is correctly attached.

Fig. 3-61

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56

3.10.2

Adjustment of RADF height

It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Perform the following adjustment by using the screw of the left and right hinge.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after 3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position.
Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check. (Test Mode: 03-267)
<Procedure>
(1)

Adjustment standard:
Adjust the height so that the platen guide front holder touches the ADF original glass.
Adjust the height so that the gap between the platen guide rear holder and the ADF original glass
becomes 0.5 mm 0.3.

Platen guide
front holder

0mm

0.5mm0.3

Platen guide
rear holder

ADF original glass

Fig. 3-62

(2)

Adjust the height by turning the height


adjusting screw on the right hinge.
CW: The height of the hinge becomes high.
CCW: The height of the hinge becomes low.

Fig. 3-63

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 57

(3)

Adjust the height by turning the height


adjusting screw on the left hinge.
CW: The height of the hinge becomes high.
CCW: The height of the hinge becomes low.

Fig. 3-64

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58

3.10.3

Adjustment of skew

When an image skew occurs, adjust it according to the following steps, Step 1

Step 2

Step 3.

Note:
Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly.
Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted.
(1)

Step 1
Case A:
Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original (
Adjustment of aligning").
Case B:
Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original (
Adjustment of aligning").

P.3-62 "3.10.5
P.3-62 "3.10.5

B
White arrow: feeding direction

Paper
Original

Fig. 3-65

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 59

(2)

Step 2
Case C:
Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn the adjustment
screw counterclockwise.
Case D:
Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn the adjustment
screw clockwise.

Note:
When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the
hinge position 0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.

Fixing screw

D
Adjustment screw

Paper
Hand screw

Original
RADF

Front side
Fig. 3-66

(3)

Fig. 3-67

Step 3
Case E:
Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original (
"3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing").
Case F:
Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original (
"3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing").

P.3-63
P.3-63

F
Paper
Original

Fig. 3-68

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60

3.10.4

Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM

When any of the PC board, original length sensor, read sensor, reverse sensor is replaced with a new
one, make sure to perform the initialization of EEPROM and adjustment of sensors in the Adjustment
Mode (05).
Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF.
Also, make sure to adjust the tray volume when the initialization of EEPROM and automatic sensor
adjustment have been performed.
Refer to
P.2-44 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO200L/230/280)" for the details.
Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not initialized and the sensors are not
adjusted after the above mentioned parts were replaced.

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 61
05/12

3.10.5

Adjustment of aligning

Adjust the aligning according to Step 1 of 3.10.3.

Rear side "+" of the original +

- Rear side "-" of the original

Skew of paper
Fig. 3-69

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62

3.10.6

Adjustment of aligning at reversing

Adjust the aligning according to Step 3 of 3.10.3.

per

f pa

o
crew

Fig. 3-70

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 63

3.10.7

Adjustment of reverse solenoid

When operating the reverse solenoid, adjust it if the position of the flapper lever is out of the following
dimension.
Gap between A of the front frame and the flapper lever C: 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm
<Procedure>
(1)

Remove the screw on the left and take off the


plate spring.
Plate spring

Fig. 3-71

(2)

Align B of the front frame with the edge of the


reverse solenoid, and temporarily fix the
reverse solenoid with the screw on the right.

Fig. 3-72

(3)

While the plunger of the reverse solenoid is


put in the position to be turned ON (by pressing it in the direction of an arrow), loosen the
screw on the right to adjust the reverse solenoid so that the gap (C) between A of the
front frame and the flapper lever is 0.5 mm to
2.0 mm.

Fig. 3-73

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64

(4)

Fix the plate spring temporarily with the


screw on the left. Then press the plate spring
slightly in the direction of an arrow and
tighten the screw in the position where the
gap (D) between the plunger and the flapper
lever is eliminated.

Plunger

Flapper lever

Fig. 3-74

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 65

3.10.8

Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch

Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40-45 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).

Glass surface

Center

Fig. 3-75

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66

3.10.9

Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor

Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 30-35 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).

Glass surface

Center

Fig. 3-76

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 67

3.10.10 Adjustment of tray volume


<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously,


turn the power ON.

(2)

Narrow the original guide to the limit.

(3)

Input the code "367".

(4)

Press the [START] button.

Fig. 3-77

(5)

Extend the original guide to the limit.

(6)

Input the code "368".

(7)

Press the [START] button

(8)

Turn the power OFF.

Fig. 3-78

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68

3.11 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3020)


3.11.1

Adjustment of RADF Position

Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position.
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A]
(1)

Checking
Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins
(the positioning pins are installed to the back
side of the hinge which is on the left side of
the RADF).

Fig. 3-79

(2)

Remove the platen sheet.

Fig. 3-80

2004 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO200L/202L/203L/230/232/233/280/282/283
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 69
05/11

(3)

Close the RADF and check if the positioning


pins fit the holes on the RADF.

Fig. 3-81

[B] Adjustment
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.
(1)

Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the


rear side.

Fig. 3-82

(2)

Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at th